Router Manager User Manual English

HUAWEI

HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System User Manual V2.10

HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System User Manual
Manual Version Product Version BOM T2-080122-20031104-C-2.15 V2.10 31011422

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. If you purchase the products from the sales agent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., please contact our sales agent. If you purchase the products from Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. directly, Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com

Copyright © 2003 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

About This Manual
Release Notes
The product version that corresponds to the manual is HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System V2.10.

Organization
The manual introduces the use of HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System V2.10.
! !

There are twenty-seven chapters and three appendixes in the manual Chapter 1 Overview profiles the features and applicable scope of Quidview Network Management System and Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

Chapter 2 User Interface focuses on the startup, user interface and main menu functions of Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 3 System Configuration elaborates on the configuration of Quidview Router Network Management System and the auxiliary functions. Chapter 4 Topology Management details the topology management functions of Quidview Router Network Management System integrated to the topology platform.

!

!

!

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing describes in detail how to browse the common device information of Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

Chapter 6 Port Management describes in detail how to browse and configure port in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 7 Device Management describes in detail how to browse and manage device in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring describes in detail how to monitor the performances of different objects in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

!

!

Chapter 9 RMON Management introduces the RMON management of Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 10 VLAN Management describes in detail how to query, create, delete and configure S8016 VLAN and VLAN Trunk in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

!

Chapter 11 RSTP Management describes in detail how to configure the RSTP on S8016 device and ports in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Browsing describes in detail how to browse routing protocols (RIP, OSPF and BGP) in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

!

Chapter 13 S8016NAT Management describes in detail NAT function management for S8016 in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 14 Ethernet Port Configuration describes in detail the configuration, querying and statistics making of Ethernet port in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

!

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management describes in detail how to add, delete, configure and query Ethernet Trunk in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management describes in detail how to add, delete, configure and query IP Trunk in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 17 POS Interface Management describes in detail how to configure and query POS interface in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management describes in detail the configuration, querying and statistics making of RPR interface in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

!

!

Chapter 19 CPOS Interface Management describes in detail the configuration, querying and statistics making of CPOS interface in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management describes in detail the configuration, querying and statistics making of ATM interface in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

Chapter 21 Portal Configuraiton describes in detail the configuration of portal service for high-end routes in Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 22 Voice Management describes in detail the configuration, querying and statistics making of voice services in Quidview Router Network Management System.

!

!

Chapter 23 POS Access Management describes in detail the POS access management of Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 24 NDEC Management describes in detail NDEC management of Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management describes in detail terminal server management of Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management describes in detail the management of DLSW service of Quidview Router Network Management System. Chapter 27 DHCP Management describes in detail DHCP configuration for core roures and S8016 of Quidview Router Network Management System. Appendix A How to Use SNMPc 5.0 Appendix B Abbreviations

!

!

!

!

! !

!

Appendix C FAQ

Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers:
! ! !

Network engineers Network administrators Customers who are familiar with network fundamentals

Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions
Convention Arial Arial Narrow Boldface Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Arial. Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow. Headings are in Boldface. Terminal Display is in Courier New.

II. GUI conventions
Convention <> [] / Description Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK> button. Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window. Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].

III. Mouse operation
Action Click Double Click Drag Description Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default). Press the left button twice continuously and quickly. Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.

IV. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation. " Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Overview of Quidview Network Management System....................................................... 1-1 1.2 Overview of Quidview RouterManager .............................................................................. 1-1 Chapter 2 User Interface ............................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 Starting Quidview RouterManager..................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Starting Quidview Independently ............................................................................ 2-1 2.1.2 Starting Quidview on SNMPc Topology Platform ................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 Starting Quidview on WhatsUp Gold ...................................................................... 2-2 2.1.4 Starting Quidview on HP OpenView ....................................................................... 2-2 2.1.5 Starting Quidview on IBM NetView NMS Platform.................................................. 2-2 2.1.6 Starting RouterManager on N2000 EMF Platform .................................................. 2-2 2.1.7 Starting RouterManager on N2000 Platform........................................................... 2-2 2.2 User Interface .................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.1 Menu ....................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.3 Device List Window................................................................................................. 2-5 2.2.4 Function Window..................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2.5 Information Display Area......................................................................................... 2-5 2.2.6 Message Window.................................................................................................... 2-6 2.3 Open Device ...................................................................................................................... 2-6 Chapter 3 System Configuration ................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 Parameter Setting .............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1.1 System Options Setting........................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Authentication Options Setting................................................................................ 3-2 3.2 User Management ............................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.1 User Management................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.2 Modify Password ..................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 Auxiliary Functions............................................................................................................. 3-6 3.3.1 Browsing Message Window .................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.2 Creating Telnet Connection .................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.3 Ping ......................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3.4 TraceRoute.............................................................................................................. 3-7 3.3.5 Refreshing Panel..................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3.6 Selecting Window Layout........................................................................................ 3-7 3.3.7 Viewing Logs ........................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3.8 Online Help.............................................................................................................. 3-8

i

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

Chapter 4 Topology Management................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2 Starting NTM of SNMPc .................................................................................................... 4-1 4.3 Starting NTM of WhatsUp Gold ......................................................................................... 4-3 4.4 Starting NTM of HP OpenView NNM................................................................................. 4-5 4.5 Starting NTM of IBM NetView............................................................................................ 4-9 4.6 Starting the Network Topology Management of N2000 EMF .......................................... 4-11 4.7 Starting the Network Topology Management of N2000................................................... 4-13 Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 Device Browsing ................................................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 Board Browsing.................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Board Browsing for Core Routers ........................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Board Browsing for High-end Routers .................................................................... 5-6 5.3 SubCard Browsing ............................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4 Clock Source Browsing...................................................................................................... 5-8 5.5 Fan Browsing ..................................................................................................................... 5-9 5.6 Power Browsing ............................................................................................................... 5-10 Chapter 6 Port Management......................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Port Information ................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.2 Subport Browsing .............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.3 Port Time Slot .................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.4 Port UP/Down Configuration.............................................................................................. 6-5 6.5 Port Mirror Management.................................................................................................... 6-5 6.5.1 Monitoring Port Management.................................................................................. 6-6 6.5.2 Port Mirror Management ......................................................................................... 6-6 6.6 Port L2/L3 Configuration.................................................................................................... 6-8 6.7 Link-aggregation Management .......................................................................................... 6-9 6.7.1 Querying Link-aggregation Information................................................................... 6-9 6.7.2 Add Link-aggregation ............................................................................................ 6-10 6.7.3 Delete Link-aggregation ........................................................................................ 6-11 6.7.4 Config Link-aggregation ........................................................................................ 6-12 Chapter 7 Device Management .................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Active/Standby Switching .................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2 Card Reset......................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.3 Attribute Config .................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.4 L2 Forwarding Table Management.................................................................................... 7-3 7.4.1 Querying L2 Forwarding Table Information ............................................................ 7-3 7.4.2 Creating L2 Forwarding Entry ................................................................................. 7-4 7.4.3 Deleting L2 Forwarding Entry.................................................................................. 7-5 7.4.4 Configuring L2 Forwarding Entry ............................................................................ 7-5 7.4.5 Querying and Configuring L2 Forwarding Table Aging Time.................................. 7-5

ii

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring ............................................................................................. 8-1 8.1 Operation Description ........................................................................................................ 8-1 8.2 Device Monitoring .............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.3 Port Monitoring................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.4 System Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 8-6 8.5 Card Monitoring ................................................................................................................. 8-6 Chapter 9 RMON Management..................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 Configuration and Real-time Monitoring of Statistics Group ............................................. 9-1 9.2 Configuration and Data Browsing of History Group........................................................... 9-5 9.3 Configuration and Browsing of Alarm Group ..................................................................... 9-9 9.4 Configuration and Log Browsing of Event Group ............................................................ 9-14 9.5 Configuration and Browsing of Alarm Extended Group................................................... 9-17 9.6 Browsing of Log Information ............................................................................................ 9-22 Chapter 10 VLAN Management .................................................................................................. 10-1 10.1 VLAN Management ....................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1.1 Querying VLAN Information ................................................................................ 10-1 10.1.2 Creating Common VLAN..................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.3 Deleting VLAN..................................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.4 Configuring Common VLAN................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.5 Configuring Aggregate VLAN.............................................................................. 10-4 10.1.6 Setting Common VLAN as Aggregate VLAN ...................................................... 10-5 10.2 VLAN Interface Management ........................................................................................ 10-5 10.2.1 Querying VLAN Interface Information ................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Creating VLAN Interface ..................................................................................... 10-6 10.2.3 Deleting VLAN Interface...................................................................................... 10-7 10.2.4 Configuring VLAN Interface ................................................................................ 10-7 10.3 VLAN Trunk Management ............................................................................................. 10-8 10.3.1 Querying Trunk Port Information......................................................................... 10-9 10.3.2 Creating Trunk Port............................................................................................. 10-9 10.3.3 Deleting Trunk Port ........................................................................................... 10-10 10.3.4 Configuring Trunk Port ...................................................................................... 10-10 Chapter 11 RSTP Management .................................................................................................. 11-1 11.1 Device RSTP Configuration........................................................................................... 11-1 11.2 Port RSTP Management................................................................................................ 11-3 Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management .............................................................................. 12-1 12.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 12-1 12.2 Browsing of RIP Information .......................................................................................... 12-3 12.2.1 Interface Config ................................................................................................... 12-4 12.2.2 Interface Statistics ............................................................................................... 12-5 12.2.3 Peer Information.................................................................................................. 12-5 12.3 OSPF Protocol Information............................................................................................ 12-6

iii

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

12.3.1 Query of OSPF Protocol Attribute ....................................................................... 12-7 12.3.2 OSPF Protocol Area Information Browsing......................................................... 12-8 12.3.3 OSPF Protocol Connection Status Database Information ................................ 12-10 12.3.4 OSPF Protocol Interface Information Browsing ................................................ 12-11 12.3.5 OSPF Protocol Peer Information Browsing....................................................... 12-13 12.3.6 OSPF Protocol Virtual Link Information Browsing ............................................ 12-14 12.4 BGP Information .......................................................................................................... 12-16 12.4.1 Query of BGP Attribute ..................................................................................... 12-17 12.4.2 BGP Peer Information Browsing ....................................................................... 12-18 12.4.3 BGP4 Path Information Browsing ..................................................................... 12-20 12.5 Routing Protocol Enable Configuration ....................................................................... 12-21 12.6 Routing Table Browsing............................................................................................... 12-22 12.6.1 Static Routing Information................................................................................. 12-23 12.6.2 Dynamic Routing Information............................................................................ 12-24 Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management ......................................................................................... 13-1 13.1 NAT Board Attribute and Monitor .................................................................................. 13-2 13.1.1 Querying NAT Board Attribute ............................................................................ 13-2 13.1.2 Configuring NAT Board Attribute ........................................................................ 13-3 13.1.3 NAT Board Flow Monitor..................................................................................... 13-4 13.1.4 Clearing Dynamic Entries on a NAT Board......................................................... 13-4 13.2 Address Group and ACL Management ......................................................................... 13-4 13.2.1 Querying NAT Address Group Information ......................................................... 13-5 13.2.2 Creating a NAT Address Group .......................................................................... 13-5 13.2.3 Deleting a NAT Address Group........................................................................... 13-6 13.2.4 Querying NAT ACL Information .......................................................................... 13-6 13.2.5 Creating a NAT ACL ........................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.6 Deleting a NAT ACL............................................................................................ 13-8 13.2.7 Querying NAT Bind Information .......................................................................... 13-8 13.2.8 Creating a NAT Bind ........................................................................................... 13-9 13.2.9 Deleting a NAT Bind............................................................................................ 13-9 13.3 Server Management ...................................................................................................... 13-9 13.3.1 Querying NAT Server Information..................................................................... 13-10 13.3.2 Creating a NAT Server...................................................................................... 13-11 13.3.3 Deleting a NAT Server ...................................................................................... 13-12 13.4 Aging Time Management............................................................................................. 13-12 13.5 NAT Enable Attribute Management ............................................................................. 13-12 13.5.1 Querying the NAT Enable Attribute of an Interface .......................................... 13-13 13.5.2 Changing the NAT Enable Status of an Interface ............................................. 13-13 13.5.3 Creating a NAT-enabled Destination Segment................................................. 13-13 13.5.4 Deleting a NAT-enabled Destination Segment ................................................. 13-14 13.6 Blacklist Management.................................................................................................. 13-14 13.6.1 Querying Blacklist Information .......................................................................... 13-15

iv

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

13.6.2 Deleting Blacklist Information............................................................................ 13-15 13.6.3 Querying and Configuring Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters ........... 13-16 13.6.4 Querying Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs.............. 13-17 13.6.5 Creating Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs............... 13-18 13.6.6 Deleting Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs ............... 13-19 13.6.7 Configuring Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs .......... 13-19 Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration ........................................................................... 14-1 14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 14-1 14.2 Ethernet Interface Configuration.................................................................................... 14-4 14.2.1 Ethernet Port Status Configuration ..................................................................... 14-4 14.2.2 Interface Parameter Configuration ...................................................................... 14-5 14.2.3 Reset Counter ..................................................................................................... 14-7 14.3 Ethernet Interface Information Query ............................................................................ 14-8 14.3.1 Browse Basic Information ................................................................................... 14-8 14.3.2 Browse Received Information ............................................................................. 14-9 14.3.3 Browse Sent Information................................................................................... 14-10 14.3.4 Browse Invalid VLAN ID.................................................................................... 14-12 14.3.5 Browse E4GC Information ................................................................................ 14-13 14.4 Real-time Statistics of Ethernet Interface .................................................................... 14-14 14.4.1 Real-Time Flow Statistics.................................................................................. 14-14 14.4.2 Real-Time Collision Statistics............................................................................ 14-15 14.4.3 Real-Time Error Statistics ................................................................................. 14-16 14.5 Subinterface Management........................................................................................... 14-16 14.5.1 Subinterface Management ................................................................................ 14-17 14.5.2 Subinterface MultiCast Query ........................................................................... 14-20 14.5.3 Subinterface Flow Query................................................................................... 14-21 Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management .................................................................................. 15-1 15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 15-1 15.2 Adding an Eth Trunk ...................................................................................................... 15-3 15.3 Deleting an Eth Trunk .................................................................................................... 15-4 15.4 Eth Trunk Configuration................................................................................................. 15-4 15.4.1 Eth Trunk Status Configuration ........................................................................... 15-4 15.4.2 Eth Trunk Parameter Configuration .................................................................... 15-6 15.4.3 Eth Trunk Counter Reset .................................................................................... 15-7 15.4.4 Port Configuration ............................................................................................... 15-7 15.5 Eth Trunk Information Query ......................................................................................... 15-9 15.5.1 Trunk Information ................................................................................................ 15-9 15.5.2 Trunk Port Information ...................................................................................... 15-10 15.6 Eth Trunk Statistic Information Query.......................................................................... 15-11 15.7 Eth Trunk Subinterface Management.......................................................................... 15-13 15.7.1 Eth Trunk Subinterface Management ............................................................... 15-13 15.7.2 Trunk Subinterface MultiCast Query................................................................. 15-16

v

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

15.7.3 Trunk Subinterface Flow Query ........................................................................ 15-17 Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management ............................................................................................. 16-1 16.1 Brief Introduction to the IP Trunk ................................................................................... 16-1 16.2 Adding an IP Trunk ........................................................................................................ 16-3 16.3 Deleting an IP Trunk Interface ....................................................................................... 16-4 16.4 Configuring the IP Trunk................................................................................................ 16-4 16.4.1 IP Trunk Status Configuration ............................................................................. 16-4 16.4.2 IP Trunk Parameter Configuration ...................................................................... 16-5 16.4.3 Add/Delete IP Trunk Member Port ...................................................................... 16-6 16.5 IP Trunk View................................................................................................................. 16-7 16.5.1 IP Trunk Member Port Information...................................................................... 16-7 16.5.2 IP Trunk Flow Statistics Query............................................................................ 16-8 Chapter 17 POS Interface Management .................................................................................... 17-1 17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 17-1 17.2 POS Interface Configuration.......................................................................................... 17-3 17.3 Path Configuration ......................................................................................................... 17-5 17.4 SDH Interface Query ..................................................................................................... 17-8 17.5 SDH Path Query .......................................................................................................... 17-11 Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management .................................................................................... 18-1 18.1 Logical and Physical Interfaces of RPR ........................................................................ 18-2 18.2 Interface Management................................................................................................... 18-3 18.2.1 MAC Parameter .................................................................................................. 18-4 18.2.2 Interface Status ................................................................................................... 18-5 18.2.3 Interface Parameter ............................................................................................ 18-6 18.3 Counter Configuration.................................................................................................... 18-7 18.3.1 Source Counter Configuration............................................................................. 18-8 18.3.2 Destination Counter Configuration .................................................................... 18-11 18.3.3 Source Reject Counter Configuration ............................................................... 18-12 18.4 Topology Management ................................................................................................ 18-13 18.4.1 Static Ring Selection ......................................................................................... 18-14 18.4.2 Querying the Topology Information................................................................... 18-16 18.5 Querying the SDH Interface......................................................................................... 18-17 18.6 SDH Path Query .......................................................................................................... 18-18 18.7 Ring Monitoring............................................................................................................ 18-19 18.8 Host Monitoring............................................................................................................ 18-21 18.9 Error Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 18-23 18.10 Display Topology Ring............................................................................................... 18-24 Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management ......................................................................................... 19-1 19.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 19-1 19.2 CPOS Interface Configuration ....................................................................................... 19-2 19.3 Higher-Order Path Management ................................................................................... 19-4

vi

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

19.3.1 Higher-Order Path Configuration ........................................................................ 19-5 19.3.2 Higher-Order Path Current View ......................................................................... 19-5 19.3.3 Higher-Order Path History View.......................................................................... 19-7 19.4 Lower-Order Path Management .................................................................................... 19-9 19.4.1 Adding a Lower-Order Path ................................................................................ 19-9 19.4.2 Deleting a Lower-Order Path ............................................................................ 19-10 19.4.3 Lower-Order Path Configuration ....................................................................... 19-11 19.4.4 Lower-Order Path Traffic Monitor ..................................................................... 19-14 19.4.5 Lower-Order Path Current View........................................................................ 19-16 19.4.6 Lower-Order Path History View......................................................................... 19-18 19.5 Multilink Management.................................................................................................. 19-19 19.5.1 Adding a Multilink .............................................................................................. 19-20 19.5.2 Deleting a Multilink ............................................................................................ 19-21 19.5.3 Configuring a Multilink....................................................................................... 19-21 19.5.4 Multilink Statistics .............................................................................................. 19-25 19.6 SDH Interface Query ................................................................................................... 19-25 Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management .................................................................................... 20-1 20.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 20-1 20.2 Interface Configuration .................................................................................................. 20-2 20.2.1 Interface Maintenance......................................................................................... 20-3 20.2.2 SDH Parameter Configuration ............................................................................ 20-5 20.3 PVC Management ......................................................................................................... 20-6 20.3.1 PVC Configuration .............................................................................................. 20-7 20.3.2 OAM Test Configuration.................................................................................... 20-12 20.4 SDH Interface Query ................................................................................................... 20-13 20.5 SDH Path Query .......................................................................................................... 20-13 Chapter 21 Portal Configuration ................................................................................................ 21-1 21.1 Portal Protocol Overview ............................................................................................... 21-1 21.2 Portal Configuration ....................................................................................................... 21-2 21.2.1 Portal Function List ............................................................................................. 21-2 21.2.2 Enabling Portal .................................................................................................... 21-2 21.2.3 Configuring Portal ID........................................................................................... 21-3 21.2.4 Address Pool Configuration ................................................................................ 21-6 21.2.5 NAS Configuration .............................................................................................. 21-7 21.2.6 iTELLIN Key Configuration.................................................................................. 21-8 21.2.7 Browsing Portal User Information ..................................................................... 21-10 21.2.8 Browsing Portal Status Information................................................................... 21-10 Chapter 22 Voice Management .................................................................................................. 22-1 22.1 Voice Common Information ........................................................................................... 22-2 22.2 Voice Port Information ................................................................................................... 22-3 22.2.1 Analog Port Configuration ................................................................................... 22-3 22.2.2 Digital Port Configuration .................................................................................. 22-10
vii

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

22.3 Voice Entity Information............................................................................................... 22-15 22.3.1 POTS Voice Entity Configuration ...................................................................... 22-16 22.3.2 VOIP Voice Entity Configuration ....................................................................... 22-20 22.4 Voice AAA Information................................................................................................. 22-23 22.4.1 AAA Attribute Configuration .............................................................................. 22-23 22.4.2 Local User Configuration................................................................................... 22-24 22.4.3 Access Number Configuration .......................................................................... 22-25 22.5 GK Client Information .................................................................................................. 22-27 22.6 Voice Call Information.................................................................................................. 22-29 22.7 H.323 Call Statistics..................................................................................................... 22-34 Chapter 23 POS Access Management....................................................................................... 23-1 23.1 POS Access Common Information ................................................................................ 23-1 23.2 POS Access Port Management ..................................................................................... 23-3 23.2.1 Browse POS Access Port ................................................................................... 23-3 23.2.2 Add POS Access Port ......................................................................................... 23-4 23.2.3 Delete POS Access Port ..................................................................................... 23-5 23.2.4 Config POS Access Port ..................................................................................... 23-5 23.2.5 Monitoring Statistical Information of POS Access Port ....................................... 23-6 23.3 POS App Port Management .......................................................................................... 23-7 23.4 POS Application Management....................................................................................... 23-8 23.4.1 Browse POS Applications ................................................................................... 23-8 23.4.2 Add POS Application......................................................................................... 23-10 23.4.3 Delete POS Application..................................................................................... 23-11 23.4.4 Config POS Application..................................................................................... 23-11 23.4.5 Monitoring Statistical Information of POS Application ...................................... 23-11 23.5 POS Map Management ............................................................................................... 23-12 23.5.1 Browsing POS Map........................................................................................... 23-13 23.5.2 Add POS Map ................................................................................................... 23-14 23.5.3 Delete POS Map ............................................................................................... 23-15 23.5.4 Config POS Map ............................................................................................... 23-15 23.6 FCM Port Management ............................................................................................... 23-15 Chapter 24 NDEC Management.................................................................................................. 24-1 24.1 NDEC Management....................................................................................................... 24-1 24.2 NDEC Information.......................................................................................................... 24-2 24.2.1 Clearing Statistics ............................................................................................... 24-3 24.2.2 Resetting NDEC .................................................................................................. 24-3 24.2.3 Synchronizing Clock............................................................................................ 24-4 24.2.4 NDEC Logging .................................................................................................... 24-4 24.3 Router SA Information ................................................................................................... 24-4 24.4 NDEC IKE SA Information ............................................................................................. 24-5 24.5 Router IKE Policy Information........................................................................................ 24-6 24.6 Router Security Policy Information ................................................................................ 24-7

viii

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

24.7 Transform Mode Security Information ........................................................................... 24-8 Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management ................................................................................ 25-1 25.1 Terminal Access Server Management .......................................................................... 25-1 25.2 Terminal Access Application Management ................................................................... 25-2 25.3 Physical Terminal and Virtual Terminal Management ................................................... 25-5 25.4 Physical Terminal Information ....................................................................................... 25-8 25.5 Management Path Information .................................................................................... 25-11 Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management ................................................................................... 26-1 26.1 DLSW Configuration ...................................................................................................... 26-1 26.2 Local Peer...................................................................................................................... 26-2 26.3 Remote Peer.................................................................................................................. 26-3 26.4 Bridge Group.................................................................................................................. 26-5 26.5 SDLC Interface .............................................................................................................. 26-8 26.5.1 SDLC Interface Configuration ............................................................................. 26-9 26.5.2 SDLC Prot Remote Peer Configuration ............................................................ 26-10 26.6 LLC2 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................... 26-12 26.7 DLSW View.................................................................................................................. 26-14 Chapter 27 DHCP Management.................................................................................................. 27-1 27.1 DHCP Server Group Management ................................................................................ 27-1 27.1.1 Browsing DHCP Server Group Information ........................................................ 27-1 27.1.2 Configuring DHCP Server Group ........................................................................ 27-2 27.2 DHCP Relay Management ............................................................................................ 27-3 27.2.1 Querying VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association....................................... 27-3 27.2.2 Creating VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association........................................ 27-4 27.2.3 Deleting VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association ........................................ 27-5 27.2.4 Configuring VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association................................... 27-5 27.3 VLAN Address Pool Management ................................................................................. 27-6 27.3.1 Querying VLAN Address Pool Information.......................................................... 27-6 27.3.2 Changing VLAN Address Allocation Mode ......................................................... 27-7 27.3.3 Configuring VLAN Address Pool ......................................................................... 27-7 27.3.4 Querying Statistics Information ........................................................................... 27-8 27.3.5 Appending Disabled IP Segment ........................................................................ 27-9 27.3.6 Canceling Disabled IP Segment ......................................................................... 27-9 27.4 Global Address Pool Management .............................................................................. 27-10 27.4.1 Querying Global Address Pool Information....................................................... 27-10 27.4.2 Creating Global Address Pool........................................................................... 27-11 27.4.3 Deleting Global Address Pool ........................................................................... 27-13 27.4.4 Configuring Global Address Pool ...................................................................... 27-13 27.4.5 Querying Statistics Information ......................................................................... 27-13 27.4.6 Appending Disabled IP Segment ...................................................................... 27-14 27.4.7 Canceling Disabled IP Segment ....................................................................... 27-15 27.5 DHCP Traffic Monitoring.............................................................................................. 27-16
ix

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Table of Contents

Appendix A How to Use SNMPc 5.0 ............................................................................................A-1 A.1 Installing SNMPc 5.0 ......................................................................................................... A-1 A.2 Starting SNMPc ................................................................................................................. A-2 A.3 Editing SNMPc 5.0 Topology Map Manually..................................................................... A-5 Appendix B Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................B-1 Appendix C FAQ ............................................................................................................................C-1

x

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 1 Overview

Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Overview of Quidview Network Management System
Quidview is a network management product, which is independently developed by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as Huawei), and is intended for integrated management and maintenance of such data communication products as routers and Ethernet switches. Quidview is used at the management layer of network solutions and implements management for multi-device network element and network. In combination with Huawei data communication products, Quidview provides overall network solutions, not only supporting maintenance and network management of data communication devices but also providing support and interface for Operating Support System (OSS) of telecom network. The system uses the universal standard network management protocol SNMP and supports SNMP V1, V2c and V3. Quidview network management system (NMS) can help users to reach the following goals:
! ! ! ! ! !

Improving reliability of networks Ensuring QoS of network operation Outlining and allocating network resources reasonably Forecasting and detecting network faults Centralized management of widely distributed network nodes Statistics and analysis of device performance

1.2 Overview of Quidview RouterManager
HUAWEI iManager Quidview RouterManager is the network management software of device level, which is independently designed by Huawei, and is applied to various operating systems including Windows platform (NT/2000) and UNIX platform (SUN Solaris /HP UX). Huawei Quidview RouterManager is one of the Quidview series NM products and is mainly used to manage Huawei Quidway series routers and NE series routers. The devices it can manage include R1602, R1603, R1604, R1612, R1613, R1614, R1615, R1760, R2501, R2509, R2511, R4001, R2501E, R2509E, R2511E, R4001E, R2610, R2610-RPS, R2611, R2611-RPS, R2620, R2621, R2630, R2631, R3640, R3680, R2630E, R2631E, R2631E-RPS, R3640E, R3680E, R3680E-RPS, High-end router s(NE05, NE16E/08E, NE16/08), Core routers(NE80, NE40-8, NE40-4, NE40-2). Other devices include Eudemon 100,S8016.

1-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 1 Overview

As a compact NM tool making sufficient use of the management information base of the device, it fulfils such fundamental network management functions as browsing configuration information of the device and monitoring running status of the device etc. Moreover, it can also be integrated with some universal NM platforms such as SNMPc, HP OpenView NNM, WhatsUp Gold, IBM Tivoli NetView, N2000 V1 and N2000 EMF, implementing all-round network management from device level to network level. Quidview RouterManager endeavors to meet requirements of more abundant functions while helping users reduce product cost. Quidview RouterManager has the following features:

I. Powerful functions
Huawei Quidview RouterManager provides visual operations on the whole device. That is, it provides users with complete device views, in which, users can directly select objects such as the overall device, object panels and interfaces etc and select corresponding functions to fulfill corresponding function operations including browsing the configuration information and monitoring the system status etc. Huawei Quidview RouterManager provides corresponding service functions according to different devices, including RMON management, VLAN management, RSTP management, routing protocol information browse, Ethernet interface management, Ethernet Trunk management, IP Trunk management, POS interface management, RPR interface management, CPOS Port Management, ATM Interface Management, Portal Management, VOIP service management, POS access management, NDEC Management, Terminal Server Management, DLSW Service Management and DHCP Management.

II. Irrelevance between operating environment and platform
Developed with Java that is independent of the platform, the system can run on multiple operating platforms and also can be integrated with multiple NM platforms such as SNMPc, WhatsUp Gold, NetView, OpenView and N2000. At present, the NMS supports two operating systems, namely, Windows (NT/2000) and UNIX (SUN Solaris/HP UX). In addition, the system also provides various graphic operating interfaces that display data obviously, thus easing the use of various management functions.

III. Visual display
The system provides GUI (Graphic User Interface) for users to select desired operations. Users can access the device managed by specifying the IP address of the device and obtain full emulated and complete device panel view. Changes of the interface colors obviously reflect the running status of all the interfaces of the device.

1-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 1 Overview

IV. Easy and universal operations
On the GUI of the system, users just click on the menu items to complete a series of functional operations. The operation style is consistent with that of Windows. Users who have experience in Windows can easily master the use of this software.

V. Cost effective and investment protection
The system is simple and practical. It provides to with the most reasonable functions at minimum investment. Users can use the powerful functions provided in the MIB to monitor the device and browse configuration information, thus implementing real-time monitoring on the running status of the device and network management. With low requirement for hardware environment of the running platform, the system can be installed normally on both workstation and PC, thereby saving costs greatly and protecting investment of users to a maximum extent.

1-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

Chapter 2 User Interface
2.1 Starting Quidview RouterManager
Quidview can run as a standalone application or be integrated to a network topology platform. The startup of Quidview is slightly different on different platforms.

2.1.1 Starting Quidview Independently
I. Startup under Windows OS
When Quidview is installed independently, select the

[Start/Program/Quidview/RouterManager/RouterManager] under Widows environment and a user login window will pop up. After the user correctly enters “user name” and “password”, Quidview RouterManager will be started.

II. Startup under UNIX OS
After installing Quidview RouterManager under UNIX OS, run the "RouterManager" file under the "bin" directory of the installation path to access the login dialog box. Enter the proper user name and password in the dialog box and you will start the Quidview RouterManager.

" Note: Quidview RouterManager can be installed and run under both Windows and UNIX series OSs to implement exactly same functions. This manual details the use and operation of Quidview RouterManager by taking Windows system as an example. For the installation of Quidview RouterManager, refer to the related installation manual.

2.1.2 Starting Quidview on SNMPc Topology Platform
After Quidview has been installed on the SNMPc NMS platform, the Quidway series network devices will be automatically discovered when SNMPc is started, and their icons will be displayed in the SNMPc topology view. Double-click a device icon, and you will start Quidview RouterManager and open the corresponding device panel.

2-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

2.1.3 Starting Quidview on WhatsUp Gold
After installing Quidview on the WhatsUp Gold platform, run WhatsUp Gold to open an existing topology view or create a new topology view, where you will view the icons of Quidway series devices. Double-click an icon to start Quidview RouterManager that automatically obtains the IP address of the corresponding device and opens the related management interface without user's interworking.

2.1.4 Starting Quidview on HP OpenView
After installing Quidview RouterManager on the HP Openview NNM platform, run HP Openview NNM and you will view the icons of Quidway series devices in the topology view. Meanwhile, the "HW" icon and a menu item [Quidview] (containing pull-down menu [RouterManager...]) are added to the toolbar and the menu bar respectively. Select a device icon, and click the "HW" icon on the toolbar or select [RouterManager...] from the menu bar, and you will start Quidview RouterManager, and access the corresponding device panel.

2.1.5 Starting Quidview on IBM NetView NMS Platform
After installing Quidview on IBM NetView NMS platform, run IBM NetView and you will view the icons of Quidway series devices in the topology view. Meanwhile, the menu item [Quidview] (containing the pull-down menu items [RouterManager…] and [RouterManager…] that are grayed out initially) is added to the menu bar. Select a device icon and select [RouterManager…] or [RouterManager…], and you will start Quidview RouterManager and access the corresponding device panel.

2.1.6 Starting RouterManager on N2000 EMF Platform
Integrate Quidview to the N2000 EMF platform, and start N2000 EMF to open an existent topology view or create a topology view. Add a Quidway router device to the topology view, when the device icon is displayed in the interface. Double clicking on the icon will start Quidview RouterManager and display the related device panel.

2.1.7 Starting RouterManager on N2000 Platform
Integrate Quidview to the N2000 NMS platform, and start N2000 to open an existent topology view or create a topology view. Add a Quidway router device to the topology view, when the device icon is displayed in the interface. Double clicking on the icon will start Quidview RouterManager and display the related device panel.

2-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

Caution: The user name and password of the default login account of Quidview RouterManager is "admin" and "quidview" respectively.

2.2 User Interface
After the Quidview RouterManager is started, the main user interface as shown in Figure 2-1 is displayed.

Figure 2-1 Main interface of Quidview RouterManager

The interface comprises menu bar, toolbar, device list window, function window and display area. The following details these parts respectively.

2.2.1 Menu
The main interface of the Quidview RouterManager includes such main menu items as System, Device, View, Tools, Window and Help. Each menu item consists of different

2-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

sub-menu items. The functions implemented by these menu items are described in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Description of menu items
Menu item User Management Modify Password Authentication Options System System Options View Logs Exit Device Open Device Close Device Refresh View Search Show Device List Show Function Window Show Message Window Telnet Ping Traceroute Select Layout Legend Help Help Topics About Quidview Description Manages the uses of the Quidview RouterManager Modifies the login password of RouterManager users. Sets SNMP and Telnet parameters Accesses the "System Options" window where to set the running parameters such as the refresh interval. Accesses the "Log View" window, displaying the Operation Logs of all users and system Run Log information. Exit the Quidview RouterManager Opens the "Open Device" window where you may create a connection with the device by entering its IP address and community name. Disconnects the device. Refreshes the device panel and corresponding display information immediately to show current state of the device. Searches for a device in the device tree according to the “label” or IP address. Opens or closes the device list window. Opens or closes the function window. Opens or closes the message window. Invokes the Telnet application of the operating system. Invokes the Ping application of the operating system. Invokes the TraceRoute application of the operating system. Selects window layout mode. Describes device icons, interface colors in the device panel, device status and board status in detail. Displays the online help of the Quidview RouterManager. Displays the version and copyright information of the Quidview RouterManager.

Tools Window

The system also supports three kinds of short-cut menus, device short-cut menu popping up when right clicking on a device, board short-cut menu popping up when right clicking on a board and port short-cut menu popping up when right clicking on a port. The short-cut menu provides quick start of the functions contained in the function tree, facilitating user's operation.

2.2.2 Toolbar
The toolbar offers the short-cut buttons for some commonly used functions of Quidview RouterManager.

2-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

2.2.3 Device List Window
The device list window displays the information (including device label and IP address) of all the accessed devices in the format of a tree. Right click on a device on the device tree, and a short-cut menu pops up, as shown in Figure 2-2:

Figure 2-2 Device tree menu

With the device tree menu, you may open, close or delete a device in the device list, and browse device attributes. Meanwhile, the device tree supports sorting function by device label or IP address. For the meaning of various icons on the device tree, select [Help/Legend…].

2.2.4 Function Window
The function window provides major functions of the Quidview RouterManager in the format of a tree, including browsing and monitoring device and port information. You can select any function node on the function tree to browse the execution result in the information display area.

2.2.5 Information Display Area
This area displays the panel view and corresponding information about the managed device. The colors of the interfaces and boards in the device panel represent their current working status. For the convenience of browsing the panel view and device information simultaneously, you can select suitable layout of various windows in the information area.

2-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

2.2.6 Message Window
The prompt information generated during the operation is displayed in the message window.

2.3 Open Device
In the main interface of Quidview RouterManager, perform any of the following operations to access the "Open Device" interface, as shown in Figure 2-3: I. II. Select [Device/Open Device…] from the main menu. Right click on the device in the device list window and select [Open].

III. Click <Open Device> button on the toolbar.

Figure 2-3 Open Device

Enter the IP address of the managed device in "IP Address" edit box. Enter a device identifier in "Label" edit box to facilitate the identification of the device (optional). If this item is not specified, it will be defaulted to the device name. Select the protocol parameter in "SNMP" edit box. For SNMP V1 and SNMP V2, the read-only or read-write community names could be specified. For SNMP V3, Auth Type, Auth Password, Encryption Type and Encryption Password could be set. After above settings, click <OK> button to open the device panel view in the information display area. Quidview RouterManager provides front and rear panel views for high-end routers such as NE05, NE08 and NE16. For NE80, S8016 and all mid-range and low-end routers, only the rear panel views are displayed. Network administrators can learn about the current operation status of various interfaces via the colors shown on the panel.

2-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 2 User Interface

Corresponding relations between interface colors and status in device panel view are listed in Table 2-2: Table 2-2 Corresponding relations between interface colors and status
Interface color Green Interface operation status Administra tion Status UP Operation Status UP Meaning of status The interface operates normally, i.e., available for receiving and transmitting packets. Administration status and operation status of the interface are different, when the interface cannot receive or transmit packets. In this case, the network administrator should check the configuration of the interface (it may have not been configured with an IP address or could not respond to Ping correctly). For multiplexed interface, it means the administration and operation status of some time slots are UP (green status) or DOWN (blue status), and the administration and operation status of the others are UP (red status) and DOWN respectively. The interface cannot receive or transmit packets (it may be shut down manually).

Red

UP

DOWN

Yellow

Blue Gray

DOWN

DOWN

Unavailable for management The interface is unavailable for management.

Table 2-3 Corresponding relations between board colors and status
Board color Green Blue Red Meaning of status The board operating normally is represented by green screws in device panel. The backup board operating normally is represented by blue screws in device panel. The board (including backup board) operating abnormally is represented by red screws in device panel.

2-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

Chapter 3 System Configuration
3.1 Parameter Setting
3.1.1 System Options Setting
Operation procedure: 1) 2) 3) In the main interface of Quidview, select [System/System Options…] to access the "System Options" interface. After parameter modification, click <OK> button to close the interface and validate the new parameters immediately. If <Cancel> button is clicked, the modification will be canceled.

The system options window is shown in:Figure 3-1

Figure 3-1 System Options

Various parameters in this window are described in Table 3-1: Table 3-1 Parameters in system options window
Name Description Value range

Refreshing interval of such interfaces as Device Browse, Port Browse, etc. Polling interval may affect network performance to Browse It is a value in the range of 60 certain extent. By reducing polling frequency (e.g. changing the Refresh to 65535s. By default, it is polling interval from 10s to 100s), SNMP packet traffic on the network Interval 300s. and SNMP requests to be processed by the managed device will be decreased. RealMonitor It is a value in the range of 2 Predefined refreshing interval of Port Monitoring and Device Refresh to 65535s. By default, it is Monitoring interface. Interval 60s.

3-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

" Note: When current user logs off Quidview, the settings of above parameters will be stored on the disk automatically.

3.1.2 Authentication Options Setting
This function is used to set SNMP parameters and Telnet parameters of the device. In the main interface of Quidview, select [System/Authentication Options…] to access the "Authentication Options" window, as shown in Figure 3-2:

I. SNMP V1 & SNMP V2

Figure 3-2 SNMP Options - SNMP V1 & SNMP V2

SNMP V1 and SNMP V2 adopt community name authentication mode, and the SNMP packets whose community names are not consistent with those configured on the device will be discarded. Read-only community name is only used to view the information of the device, whereas read-write community name can be used to perform configuration on the device. As shown in Figure 3-2, during setting SNMP V1 and SNMP V2 parameters, you are required to set "ReadCommunity", "ReadWriteCommunity", "Timeout" and "Number of

3-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

Retries". "Timeout" is the maximum duration the network management station will wait for the response from the managed device during their communication. This value should be set to at least twice of the mean delay value of the communication from the network management station to the managed device. If the network management station and the managed device are connected via low speed network, the timeout should be set to a relatively larger value. If the network management station and the managed device are located on the same LAN, this value could be relatively smaller. "Number of Retries" is the maximum times the network management station will resend the SNMP requests when the communication between it and the managed device failed. When the network is busy, SNMP packets may be discarded so that the network management station cannot receive response from the device. To solve this problem, Quidview resends SNMP request after the timeout of the response from the device. This process is repeated continuously until the SNMP response packet from the device is received or certain retry times are reached.

II. SNMP V3

Figure 3-3 SNMP Option - SNMP V3

As shown in Figure 3-3, SNMP V3 adopts user name and password authentication mode. According to different security levels, corresponding "Auth Password" and "Encryption Password" should be set. Various parameters of SNMP V3 are described in Table 3-2:

3-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

Table 3-2 Parameters of SNMP V3
Content User Name Security Level Auth Type Encryption Type Auth Password Encryption Password Description SNMP V3 user name Includes Auth with Encrypt, Auth No Encrypt and No Auth No Encrypt Includes MD5 and SHA DES If the security level is set to Auth with Encrypt or Auth No Encrypt, you should enter the correct auth password. If the security level is set to Auth with Encrypt, you should enter the correct encryption password.

III. Telnet parameters

Figure 3-4 Authentication Options - Telnet Options

Device configuration is not available unless the Telnet parameters are correctly configured.

3-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

Caution: Select [System/Authentication Options…], and you can set the Telnet parameters to the default values, that is, the values used for opening a device. To modify the Telnet parameters of a specific device, you must select [Device Property…] from the short-cut menu of the device node in the device list for configuration.

3.2 User Management
3.2.1 User Management
This function is used to manage the users using the Quidview RouterManager. Select [System/User Management…] to access the "User Management" interface, as shown in Figure 3-5:

Figure 3-5 User Management

Buttons are provided in this window to add new users or delete existent users. During adding a new user, there are two options available for "User Type" filed, Manager and Common User. Common users only have browsing rights, whereas administrators have all rights in terms of browsing and configuration.

3-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

" Note: Only administrators are authorized to perform user management function while common users do not have this function. In the meantime, the “admin” user is the default administrator of the system, so it cannot be deleted.

3.2.2 Modify Password
This function is provided for all users to change their own passwords. Select [System/Modify Password…] to enable this application where to change the password. The modify password window is shown in Figure 3-6:

Figure 3-6 Modify Password

3.3 Auxiliary Functions
3.3.1 Browsing Message Window
Message window is used to view operation results and background messages of the system. In the case of operation failure or there are background messages, the message window will pop up automatically prompting the corresponding information. To open the message window manually where to view the related information, you may select [View/Show Message Window].

3.3.2 Creating Telnet Connection
Click the shortcut button of <Telnet…> or select [Tools/Telnet…] to access the "Input IP Address" window, displaying the IP address of current device. Click <OK> button in the window, and you will enable the Telnet application of the OS and get connection to the device.

3-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

" Note: In Windows 2000 system, as Telnet is enabled through Internet browser (different from previous versions), the dialog box of Internet connecting wizard will pop up upon the enabling of Telnet if no Internet connection has been created. The Telnet function of Quidview is not available until the Internet connection is correctly configured.

3.3.3 Ping
Click the shortcut button of <Ping…> or select [Tools/Ping…] to access the "Input IP Address" window, displaying the IP address of currently opened device. Click <OK> button in the window, and the system will invoke the system interface of the Ping command. The result the Ping operation is displayed in the "Message Window".

3.3.4 TraceRoute
Click the shortcut button of <TraceRoute…> or select [Tools/Traceroute…] to access the "Input IP Address" window, displaying the IP address of currently opened device. Click <OK> button in the window, and the system will invoke the system interface of the TraceRoute command. The result the TraceRoute operation is displayed in the "Message Window".

3.3.5 Refreshing Panel
In device panel view, you may select [View/Refresh] to refresh the device panel immediately instead of waiting for the next polling interval.

3.3.6 Selecting Window Layout
As multiple windows can be displayed in the information display area and both transverse and longitudinal device panels are provided, window layout selection is provided to facilitate viewing by users. Click the shortcut button of <Select Layout…> or select [Window/Select Layout…] to open the "Select Layout" window. The system provides 5 layout modes for users to select from based on different cases.

3.3.7 Viewing Logs
Users' operations and system running information are completely logged, and you can select [System/View Logs...] to browse this log information.

3-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 3 System Configuration

3.3.8 Online Help
During operating, you may click the shortcut button of <Help> to view the online help information of the corresponding section so as to facilitate the operation.

3-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Chapter 4 Topology Management
4.1 Overview
Network topology management is used to construct and manage the topology structure of the whole data communications network. The Network Management System (NMS) ensures the consistency between the displayed network view and the actual network topology, by regularly polling the network devices (according to the status set for each device and the configured polling interval) and processing Trap reported by the devices. In this way, users can have a real-time perspective of the entire network operation by browsing the network view. In combination with the network topology platform, Quidview can implement the following functions:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Automatic discovery of network topology Topological display of IP network layer Automatic lineup and proportional zooming of topology view Partial zooming of the selected view Different icons and colors to identify different devices and their status Manual adding/deleting of sub-net, device node and link Regular polling to update the status of sub-net, device node and link Browsing the properties of the network object Ping and Telnet the device Browsing the MIB information of the device

The topology management functions and operations of Quidview integrated with diversified NM platforms under Windows will be elaborated below. The functions and operations of Quidview under UNIX are similar. Users can refer to this section for specific information.

4.2 Starting NTM of SNMPc
The process of starting the network topology management (NTM) of SNMPc is as follows: 1) Select [Start/Program/SNMPc 5.0/Startup System] to start SNMPc and access the SNMPc main interface. If it is the first time to run SNMPc on the system after Quidview has been integrated, an interface will pop up to ask the user whether to compile MIBs. Compiling of MIBs aims to refresh the original database in user computer (if the user has installed SNMPc4.2 version, the system will prompt the

4-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

update of original MIB when you access SNMPc5.0 for the first time). Click <Yes>, and an interface shown in Figure 4-1 will appear:

Figure 4-1 Compile MIBs

After MIBs are compiled, <Add>, <Remove> and <Done> will be activated. The user can use <Add> to add a file into MIB, or use <Remove> to delete a file from MIB. Or directly click <Done> to access the main interface if no other operation is needed. The SNMPc main interface is shown in Figure 4-2:

Figure 4-2 "SNMPc" main interface after topology discovery 2) In the SNMPc main interface, select [Config/Discovery Agent....] to make the window shown in Figure 4-3 pop up:

4-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-3 Enable SNMPc topology discovery management window

The following operations are required on the interface:
!

In General page, select the two check boxes: Enable Discovery and Enable Status Poll. In Seeds page, enter the IP address of the device (multiple addresses can be entered). In Community page, enter the community name of the device, and click <OK>. You can double click the device with HW icon on its topology map to start Quidview and display the device panel view.

!

!

3)

For more information about SNMPc, please refer to Appendix A of the manual, online help files of SNMPc5.0, or related parts in SNMPc5.0 user manual.

4.3 Starting NTM of WhatsUp Gold
The process of starting the network topology management of WhatsUp Gold is as follows: 1) Select [Start/Program/WhatsUp Gold/WhatsUp Gold] to start WhatsUp Gold. The main interface of WhatsUp Gold after topology discovery is shown in Figure 4-4:

4-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-4 "WhatsUp Gold" main interface after topology discovery 2) Select [File/New] on the started interface to make the window shown in Figure 4-5 pop up.

Figure 4-5 New Map 3) In the "New Map" interface, select "Create a blank map" option and click <OK> button to open a blank interface. Select [Tool/Import/Scan IP...] in the interface to access the "Import Scan" window, as shown in Figure 4-6:

4-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-6 Import Scan 4) On the Import Scan interface, enter the IP address range of the devices to be discovered, select the Map Results, All IP and SNMP check boxes and click <Start>. Then Whatsup Gold will auto-search all IP devices within this range. After the searching is completed, click <Exit> to return to the WhatsUp Gold main interface, and the discovered devices will be arranged in the topology map. If there are many devices on the network, remove All IP in the option column on the left part of Import Scan interface, and WhatsUp Gold will display only the topology map of devices supporting SNMP. On the topology map of discovered devices, if the icon of HW device is not selected, the menu item of Quidview on the right-button popup menu will be in the deactivated state and grays out. If the icon of corresponding device is selected, the menu item of Quidview on the right-button popup menu will be activated and be displayed in bright color. Now, Quidview can be started by selecting Quidview. For more information about WhatsUp Gold, please refer to the online help of WhatsUp Gold or relevant parts in the user manual of WhatsUp Gold.

4.4 Starting NTM of HP OpenView NNM
The process of starting the NTM of HP OpenView NNM is as follows: 1) Select [Start/Program/HP OpenView/Net Node Manager] to make the HP OpenView main interface pop up. The main interface after topology discovery is shown in Figure 4-7:

4-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-7 “HP OpenView” main interface after topology discovery 2) If the IP address and type of device are known, or HP OpenView fails to discover the devices automatically, you can add the device manually: after successful installation of HP OpenView NNM, select the [Edit/Add Object...] to make the “Add Object Palette” window pop up, as shown in Figure 4-8:

Figure 4-8 Add Object Palette interface

The symbol of “HuaWei Router” or “HuaWei Switch” will appear in the “Symbol Classes” column. After “HuaWei Router” is selected, the icon for the HuaWei series routers will appear in the “Symbol Subclasses for Class HuaWei Router” column. Drag

4-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

the icon of corresponding router to the main interface, and the system will immediately pop up the window shown in Figure 4-9:

Figure 4-9 Add Object interface

In this interface, enter the host name (the host name is the IP address), select the highlighted item in the “Object Attributes” list box on the lower part of the window, and click <Set Object Attributes>. A window as shown in Figure 4-10 will pop up:

4-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-10 Set Attributes

“Set Attributes” displays the attributes of IP address entered by the user. Click <OK> at the bottom of the window, and the new device is added to the network topology map. 3) The type of device on the topology map can be modified according to real conditions. On the network topology map of HP OpenView interface, select the device icon, then right-click the device icon and a shortcut menu will appear. Select “Change Symbol Type...” on the popup menu and the interface to access the interface “Change Symbol Type” shown in Figure 4-11 will pop up. The device type can be modified on the interface.

4-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-11 Change Symbol Type

The “Change Symbol Type” interface is similar to that for adding device. There is “HuaWei Router” or “HuaWei Switch” symbol in the “Symbol Classes” column of the interface. Click on the symbol of “HuaWei Router” or “HuaWei Switch” and the symbol of Quidway series routers will appear in the “Symbol Subclasses” column. According to the type of device, select the corresponding icon to change the device type. 4) On the topology map of discovered devices, if the icon of HuaWei (HW) device is not selected, the menu item [RouterManager...] or the RouterManager... item that appears on the right-button popup menu will be in the deactivated state and grays out. If the icon of corresponding device is selected, the menu item of [RouterManager...] or the RouterManager... item that appears on the right-button popup menu will be activated and be displayed in bright color. You can start Quidview by clicking the HW icon and selecting [RouterManager...] from the menu, or by selecting “RouterManager...” in the right-click popup menu. If the icon of HW device is not selected, “RouterManager...” will not be displayed in the popup menu. For more information about HP OpenView, please refer to the online help of HP OpenView or relevant parts in the user manual of HP OpenView.

4.5 Starting NTM of IBM NetView
The process of starting the NTM of IBM NetView is as follows: 1) Select the menu [Start/Program/NetView/ NetView] to open the IBM NetView main interface. The main interface after discovery topology is shown in Figure 4-12.

4-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-12 "IBM NetView" window after discovery topology 2) If the IP address and type of device are known, or IBM NetView fails to discover the devices automatically, you can add the device manually: after successful installation of the network platform IBM NetView, select [Object/New...] to make the “Object Wizard” interface pop up, as shown in Figure 4-13. The symbols of “HuaWei Router”, “HuaWei Switch” and “HuaWei A8010” will appear in the “Type” column. After “HuaWei Router” is selected, the icon for the HW series routers will appear in the “Drag into the submap to place manually” column. Select the corresponding icon according to the actual device type and click the <Next> button. Then the system will automatically pop up the window as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Object Wizard
4-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

4.6 Starting the Network Topology Management of N2000 EMF
Follow these steps to start the network topology management of N2000 EMF: 1) Select [Start/Program/iManager N2000/N2000 Client] to open the N2000 EMF interface with the network topology discovered, as shown in Figure 4-14:

Figure 4-14 N2000 EMF interface with topology discoverd 2) If you have known the IP address or type of a device, or N2000 EMF does not discover devices automatically, you can follow these steps to add the device manually: After the N2000 EMF platform is successfully installed, select [Edit/Add Object...] to open the "Add Object" dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-15:

4-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-15 Adding an object

Select a router device from the left "Object Type" list, and enter the related information in the right pane, as shown in Figure 4-16:

4-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-16 Entering device information

Click <Add> in the interface to add the device to the topology view. Double click on the device icon in the toplogy view, and you will start Quidview RouterManager and browse the device panel.

4.7 Starting the Network Topology Management of N2000
The N2000 NMS platform only operates under UNIX. Follow these steps to start the network topology management of N2000 EMF under Solaris OS: 1) Run the "MapView" command from the command terminal window to log on to the N2000 NMS platform interface, as shown in Figure 4-17:

4-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Figure 4-17 N2000 interface with topology discovered 2) If you have known the IP address or type of a device, or N2000 does not discover devices automatically, you can follow these steps to add the device manually: After the N2000 platform is successfully installed, select [Topology/Add Device...] to open the "Add Device" dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-18:

Figure 4-18 Adding a device

Here type the IP address of the device and click <Add> to add the device to the topology view.

4-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 4 Topology Management

Double click on the device icon in the toplogy view, and you will start Quidview RouterManager and browse the device panel.

4-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing
5.1 Device Browsing
The Device Browsing offers the common configuration information about a router and S8016 Device, including System Information, Address Translation Table, Interfaces Table, IP Address Table, IP Route Table, and TCP Connection Table. In the function window, double click [Common Information Browsing/Device Browsing] node on the function tree and see the general configuration information about the device in the information boxes on the right, shown as Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 Device Browsing

The following tables are available: System Table, Address Translation Table, Interfaces Table, IP Address Table, IP Route Table, TCP Connection Table.

5-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

I. System Table
The system table, available for every device, describes the basic and indispensable information about them. The system tab contains some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-1 Description on the parameters of the System tab
Name System Description System OID UP Time Location Device Name Contact Description ASCII text describing the device name and versions of software and hardware. A group of unique ID of manufacturer and device used online. Continuous operation time of the system after being started. Describes the geographical location of the device. Mnemonic symbol of the device defined at the device side. Contact information about the responsible company of person.

II. Address Translation Table
The Address Translation Table maps the IP addresses to MAC addresses of the interfaces. For some interfaces, such as serial ports, which has no corresponding MAC addresses, the MAC address fields are specified as all 0s. The Address Translation Table contains some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-2 Description on the parameters of the Address Translation Table
Name Interface Description Interface NetAddress Interface PhyAddress Description Brief information about the interface IP address of the interface The interface MAC address at the link layer

III. Interfaces Table
The Interface Table records some important data about the current operation of the interface, which helps an administrator quickly locate and analyze the fault whenever the interface operates abnormally. The Interface Table contains some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-3 Description on the parameters of Interfaces Table
Name ifDescr IfAlias ifType ifMtu(byte) ifSpeed(bps) ifPhyAddress Description Interface name. The alias of the interface. Interface type, mainly decided by the physical and link layer protocols. Maximum transmission unit of an interface Bits passing through an interface per second Interface MAC address mapped on the link layer

5-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name ifAdminStatus ifOperStatus ifLastChange ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInNUcastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors ifInUnknowProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen ifSpecific

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Description The interface administration status specifies the expected operation status of the interface and can be configured. UP means an interface can transmit and receive data packets, while DOWN means it cannot transmit or receive any data packets. The interface operation status indicates the actual operation status of an interface and cannot be configured. UP means an interface can transmit and receive data packets, while DOWN means it cannot transmit or receive any data packets. Records when the interface changed into the current status. All octets received by the interface. Number of unicast packets received via the interface. Number of broadcast and multicast packets received via the interface. Number of discarded incoming packets due to packet errors or lack of buffer space. Number of packets with error received via the interface. Such packets will be discarded. Number of packets with illegal unknown protocols received via the interface. Such packets will be discarded. All octets transmitted from the interface. Number of unicast packets transmitted from the interface. Number of broadcast and multicast packets transmitted from the interface. Number of discarded outgoing packets due to packet errors or lack of buffer space. Number of packets with error transmitted from the interface. Such packets will be discarded. Length of the outgoing packet queue of an interface Specify the media to offer the interface.

IV. IP Address Table
The IP Address Table offers IP address information related to the device interface, which helps the administrator learn such information. IP table contains some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-4 Description on the parameters of IP Address Table
Name Interface Description Address NetMask Broadcast Address Description Brief information about an interface IP address of an interface Mask of the IP address of an interface Specifies the lowest bit in an IP broadcast address. If an interface has a broadcast address with all the digits being 1s, the value is 1.

V. IP Route Table
The IP Route Table offers the current routing information about all the interfaces of a device. A device forwards packets mainly based on this table. IP Route Table has some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-5 Description on the parameters of IP Route Table
Name Destination Address Port NetMask Description IP address of a destination host or network segment Uniquely specifies a port of a device Mask of the destination host or network segment

5-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name Metric Next Hop Route Protocol Route Type Route Age Description

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Maximum hops on a route IP address of the next hop on the route. Specifies the route protocol (as 1=other; 8=RIP; 13=OSPF; or 14=BGP). Specifies the route type (as 1=other; 2=invalid; 3=direct; or 4=indirect). How many seconds the route has been refreshed or decided as correct.

VI. TCP Connect Table
The TCP Connect Table lists the TCP connections of a device and includes the IP address and port number of the connection initiator and the connection status. TCP Connection table contains some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-6 Description on the parameters of TCP Connect Table
Name Local Address Local Port Remote Address Remote Port Status Description Local IP address for TCP connection. Local port of the TCP connection. IP address of the remote device of the TCP connection. Remote port of the TCP connection. Specifies the status of TCP connection as 1=CLOSED; 2=LISTEN; 3=SYN_SENT; 4=SYN_RCVD; 5=ESTABLISHED; 6=FIN_WAIT1; 7=FIN_WAIT2; 8=CLOSE_WAIT; 9=LAST_ACK; 10=CLOSING; 11=TIME_WAIT; or 12=Deleted.

5.2 Board Browsing
5.2.1 Board Browsing for Core Routers
In the function window, double click on the [Common Information Browsing/Board Browsing] function node and see the board information of a device in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 5-2:

5-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Figure 5-2 NE80 board browsing

The information tables vary according to different boards. Table 5-7, Table 5-8, Table 5-9 and Table 5-10 list the parameters contained in each kind of board: Table 5-7 Parameters of the main board
Name Status Running Status Alarm LED Description Shows the status of the main board as Master or Standby. Shows the running status of the main board as normal or abnormal. A normally running main board can receive the heart beat of the standby board. Shows the status of the alarm light on a main board as LightOn or LightOff.

Table 5-8 Parameters of the clock board
Name Status Phase Lock Method Warm-up Oscillator Running Status Trace Active Clock Current Active Clock Traction Status Export SSM Severity Description Shows the clock board status as Master or Standby. Shows the phase lock method of a clock board as free; free-verdict; snatch; track; retain; retain-verdict. Shows if it is in the warm-up oscillator status as normal or preheat. Shows the running status of a clock board as normal or abnormal. Shows the current active clock being traced. 0: Free oscillation of a clock board; 1: BITS1; 2: BITS2; or 3 through 18 are reference clock of the circuit board. Shows the current active clock, which can be 0: Free oscillation of a clock board; 1: BITS1; 2: BITS2; or 3 through 18 are reference clock of the circuit board. Shows the traction status of a clock board as normal or outrange. Shows the SSM severity, which can be 1: Unknown synchronous quality; 2: G8.11 clock signal; 3: G.812 transit node clock signal; 4: G.812 local node clock signal; 5: SDH device clock source signal; or 6: No synchronization.

Table 5-9 Parameters of the line and NAT board
Name Slot/SlotNum Number of Subcards Slot number of a card Number of subcards of a card. Description

5-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name FSU Version EFU Version Registration Info Up Date Up Time Network Port Status Syn Status Number of Subslots

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Description FSU Version of a card. EFU Version of a card. Registration information of a card. Shows the date on which the card was started last time. Shows the time when the card was started last time. Shows the network port status of a card as normal or abnormal. The synchronous status of LPU and NET board. The synchronous status of NAT board and NM. Number or subslots of a card.

Table 5-10 Parameters of the NET board
Name Self-Check Result Port Status Status Running Status Description Self-check of the NET board. The status of the port on a NET board. The port is the DASL channel between the interface LPU and NET board. NET board status, which can be Master or Standby. Running status of the NET board.

" Note: S8016 and middle-range and low-end routers do not support the card browsing.

5.2.2 Board Browsing for High-end Routers
In the function window, double click on the [Common Information Browsing/Module View] function node on the function tree of high-end routers and see the board information of a device in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 5-3:

5-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Figure 5-3 Board browsing for high-end routers

This window lists the information of all the boards contained in the device. The parameters are described in Table 5-11: Table 5-11 Parameters of high-end routers
Name Module Index Card Number Type Description Serial No. Number of Cards Hardware Ver Software Ver Last Card Change Admin Status Oper Status Description Index of the board Slot number of the board Type of the board Description of the board Serial number of the board Number of subcards of the board Hardware version of the board Software version of the board Last time when the board changes Administration status of the board Operation status of the board

" Note: S8016 and the mid-range and low-end routers do not support board browsing function.

5.3 SubCard Browsing
In the function window, double click the [Common Information Browsing/SubCard Browsing] function node and see the card information of a device in the boxes on the right. The subcard browsing tables are described as follows.

5-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Table 5-12 Description on the parameters of high-end router and S8016 subcard browsing table
Name Card Number SubCard Number SubCard Type Number of Ports Hard Version Logic Version Card number of the subcard. Subcard number Subcard type Number of port on a subcard. Hardware Version of a subcard Logic Version of a subcard Description

Table 5-13 Description on the parameters of NE16 and NE08 device subcard browsing
Name Card Number SubCard Number Type Description Serial NO Number of Ports Hardware Ver Software Ver Admin Status Operation Status Description Card number of the subcard. Subcard number Subcard type Subcard description. Unique hardware serial No. of a subcard. For example, 0 means the card is not in use. Number of ports on a subcard Hardware Version of a subcard Software Version of a subcard Administration status of a subcard Operation status of a subcard

Table 5-14 Description on the parameters of middle-range and low-end router subcard browsing
Name Slot Number Type Number of Ports Version Slot number of a subcard Subcard type Number of ports on a subcard. Subcard version. Description

5.4 Clock Source Browsing
You can browse the information about the clock source of the high-end routers and S8016. In the function window, double click [Common Information Browsing/ClockSrc Browsing] function node on the function tree and see the information about clock source in the boxes on the right. The Clock Source Browsing Table has some parameters described in the following table. Table 5-15 Description on the parameters of the Clock Source Browsing Table
Name Index Description SSM Level Priority Description Reference source index. Description on the clock Shows the SSM level, which can be 1: Unknown synchronous quality; 2: G8.11 clock signal; 3: G.812 transit node clock signal; 4: G.812 local node clock signal; 5: SDH device clock source signal; or 6: No synchronization Priority of the clock reference source, ranging from 1 to 19. 19 means no clock source is set.

5-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name Time-slot ForceSSM Description

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

Set the timeslots to extract ssm level for 2Mbps bits clock source. sa4: Set the timeslot of the clock reference source sa as sa4; sa5: Set the timeslot of the clock reference source sa as sa5; sa6: Set the timeslot of the clock reference source sa as sa6; sa7: Set the timeslot of the clock reference source sa as sa7; and sa8: Set the timeslot of the clock reference source sa as sa8. Shows if the clock board extracts SSM level from the input signals by force. 1: Not extract; 2: Extract.

5.5 Fan Browsing
This function makes it possible to monitor the fans of core router, S8016 and some middle-range and low-end routers. The following information can be displayed: Slot No, Online Status, Sub-Funs, Self-Test Result, Software Version, Hardware Version, Temperature, Running Status, Control Mode, Speed Adjustment Information, and Speed Type. The parameters are described in the following tables. Table 5-16 Description on the parameters of core router and S8016 fan browsing table
Name Slot No. Online Status Sub-Fans Self-Test Result Software Version Hardware Version Temperature Running Status Control Mode Speed Adjustment Information Speed Type Description Slot number of a fan of NE80, which can be 25 (upper FANA) or 26 (lower FANB). Shows if a fan is online or offline. Number of sub-fans. FANA has 4 sub-fans, while FANB has 3 sub-fans. Self-test result of a fan Software Version of a fan Hardware Version of a fan The temperature of a fan, which ranging from 20 to 50 normally. Running status of a fan, which can be normal or abnormal. Time control mode of a fan, which can be 1 (manual), 2 (automatic), or 3 (none). Shows the speed adjustment information of a fan as Series or noseries. Shows the speed type of a fan as LowSpeed or HighSpeed.

Table 5-17 Description on the parameters of NE40 Series Routers’ fan browsing table
Name Fan index Online status Running status Description Hardware serial number of a fan Shows if the fan is online or offline. Shows the running status of a fan as normal or abnormal.

Caution: 3680E-RPS, 2631E-RPS, 2610-RPS, and 2611-RPS only allow fan status monitoring.

5-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 5 Common Information Browsing

5.6 Power Browsing
This function shows the running status of a specific power. The following information will be displayed: Power Index, Slot, Serial Number, Power Type, Duration, Working Status, Dissipation Status, Description, Has Power, Has Fan, Fan Operation Status, and so on. The parameters are described in the following tables. Table 5-18 Description on the parameter of NE08/16 Series Router power browsing table
Name Slot Serial Number Power Type Duration Working Status Dissipation Status Description Has Power Has Fan Fan Operation Status Description Slot number of power. Specifies the hardware serial number of the power. Power type, which can be unknown, DC, and AC. Time passed since the power working status changed last time. Working status of the power, which can be unknown, ON, or OFF. Dissipation status of the fan, which can be unknown, good, alarm, or bad. Name or description of the slot where the power is located. Shows if the power is in position with unknown, exist, and inexistence. Shows if the fan is in position with unknown, exist, inexistence. The operation status of the fan, which can be unknown, highspeed, lowspeed, or stop.

Table 5-19 Description on the parameter of core router and S8016 power browsing table
Name Index Power Type Status Description Slot Number Description Specifies the hardware serial number of the power. Power type, which can be Power and Dpower (Distributed power). Working status of the power, which can be normal or abnormal. Description on the power. Inside slot number of the power, which can be PowerModule1, PowerModule2, PowerModule3, PowerModule4, PowerModule5 or Dpower (Distributed power).

Table 5-20 Description on the parameter of NE40 Series Router power browsing table
Name Power index Online status Running status Description Specifies the hardware serial number of the power. Shows if the power is in position with online or offline. Running status of the power, which can be normal or abnormal.

Caution: 3680E-RPS, 2631E-RPS, 2610-RPS, and 2611-RPS only allow the power status.

5-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Chapter 6 Port Management
6.1 Port Information
The port browsing function can display port related configuration information that will be automatically refreshed at certain interval. The user can browse the configuration information of various ports through modifying the value of port index. Double click [Port Management/Port Information] on function tree and the device port information displayed in right information display area is shown as Figure 6-1:

Figure 6-1 Port Information -Interface Information

There are two tabs in the port information interface, and the description of various parameters in interface information is shown in Table 6-1:

6-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Table 6-1 Parameter description of port information browsing interface
Name Interface Index Interface Description Interface Alias Interface Type MTU Interface Speed Physical Address Administration Status Operation Status Last Status Change Time Description Index number of current interface Characteristic description of interface The alias of the interface that is easier to memorize. Network type of interface Maximum transmission unit allowed by current interface Maximum transmission speed allowed by current interface, unit: bit/s Interface physical address. The interface without physical address is represented with all 0. Current administration status of interface: 1=UP; 2=DOWN. Current operation status of interface: 1=UP; 2=DOWN. Time of last change of interface status

When switching to the IP address information tab, the interface is shown in Figure 6-2:

Figure 6-2 Port Information – IP Address Information

I. Adding an IP address
Click <Add…> in Figure 6-2 to open the "Add Port IP Address" dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-3:

6-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Figure 6-3 Adding a port IP address

Here select "Chief Address" or "Sub Address", type an IP address and the mask, and click <OK> to add an IP address. Usually, a port needs only one IP address. When a router port needs connecting with several subnets, it can also be configured with several IP addresses with one as the chief IP address and the others as sub IP addresses.

II. Deleting all IP addresses
Click <Delete All> in Figure 6-2 to open the confirmation dialog box, where confirm to delete all the IP addresses configured for the port.

" Note: Port IP address configuration is not available unless the Telnet parameters of the device is configured properly in authentication options.

6.2 Subport Browsing
The user can browse the related information of various sub-ports for the physical port including subports. Double click [Port Management/Subport Browsing] on function tree and the device subport configuration information will be displayed in right information display area. The

6-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

description of various parameters in subport information browsing is shown in Table 6-2: Table 6-2 Subport Browsing parameters description
Name Interface Index Interface Description Administration Status Operation Status Description Index number of current subport Characteristic description of current subport Current administration status of port: 1=UP; 2=DOWN Current operation status of port: 1=UP; 2=DOWN

6.3 Port Time Slot
If the device has E1, T1, E3 and T3 ports, the user can view the encapsulation of various time slot interfaces of these ports. The encapsulation of E1/cE1 is described as an example. E1/cE1 port refers to the channelizable E1, i.e., Channelized E1. It has two work modes: E1 and cE1 work mode.
!

When working in E1 mode, E1/cE1 port equals to an interface whose data bandwidth is 2.048M and that has no time slot division. Its logical feature is same as synchronous serial port. E1/cE1 port supports such link layer protocol as PPP and frame relay, and supports such network protocols as IP.

!

When working in cE1 mode, E1/cE1 port is divided into 32 time slots physically and the time slots are numbered 0 to 31 correspondingly. 31 time slots of them can be divided into some groups at will (time slot 0 is used to transmit frame synchronization signal and cannot be bundled). Each group of time slots are bundled as one serial port (channel-group) whose logical feature is same as the synchronous serial port. It supports such link layer protocols as PPP, HDLC, FR, LAPB and X.25, and supports such network protocols as IP.

Double click [Port Management/Channel Group] on function tree and the interface time slot information will be displayed in right information display area. The description of various parameters in interface time slot browsing is shown in Table 6-3: Table 6-3 Parameters description of interface time slot table
Name Interface Description Channel Group No. Binding Timeslot Number Administration Status Operation Status Description Each group time slots are bundled as a serial port (channel-group). Here, the interface description refers to the description of channel-group. Channel group number, ranging from 0 to 30. Total amount of time slots bundled on channel group successfully. Current administration status of port: 1=UP; 2=DOWN Current operation status of port: 1=UP; 2=DOWN

6-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

6.4 Port UP/Down Configuration
This function can configure the administration status of interface. Double click [Port Management/Port UP/Down Configuration] on function tree to open the port configuration window. Here select the administration status of the interface from the drop-down list box to complete the interface UP/Down configuration.

6.5 Port Mirror Management
Port mirror functions mapping special traffic to a monitoring port for network debugging. It falls into the following types according to the selected traffic types:
!

Physical port based mirror: copies the traffic of a specified port fully to a monitoring port. VLAN based mirror: copies the traffic of a specified VLAN fully to a monitoring port. Virtual port based mirror: copies the traffic of a specified VLAN on a specified port fully to a monitoring port.

! !

S8016 supports physical port based mirror. In the function window, double click on [Port Management/Port Mirror Management] node on the function tree to open the "Port Mirror Management" window, as shown in Figure 6-4:

Figure 6-4 Port mirror management - Monitoring port

This window includes two tabbed pages, Monitoring Port and Port Mirror. Their functions are detailed as follows:

6-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

6.5.1 Monitoring Port Management
I. Adding a monitoring port
In Figure 6-4, click <Add…> to enter the "Monitoring Port Creation" window, as shown in Figure 6-5:

Figure 6-5 Monitoring port creation

Select the description of the port to be created and specify whether to permit data flow on the port, then click <OK> to create a monitoring port.

II. Deleting a monitoring port
Select one or more monitoring ports from the monitoring port list and click <Delete> to delete them.

III. Changing status
Select a monitoring port from the monitoring port list and click <Change Status>. After confirmation, you can change the data flow status of the port.

6.5.2 Port Mirror Management
The "Port Mirror" page is shown in the following figure:

6-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Figure 6-6 Port mirror management - Port mirror

I. Adding a mirroring port
In Figure 6-6, click <Add…> to open the "Port Mirror Creation" window, as shown in Figure 6-7:

Figure 6-7 Port mirror creation

Various parameters in the window are described in Table 6-4:

6-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Table 6-4 Port mirror parameters
Name Mirroring Port Ingress Monitoring Egress Monitoring Index of the mirroring port Index of the ingress monitoring port Index of the egress monitoring port Description

Select the parameters and click <OK> to create a mirroring port.

II. Deleting a mirroring port
Select one or more mirroring ports from the mirroring port list and click <Delete> to delete them.

6.6 Port L2/L3 Configuration
This fuction is available only on Core routers. Double click [Port Management/Port L2&L3 Configuration] node on function tree to open “Port L2/L3 Configuration” window, as shown in Figure 6-8:

Figure 6-8 Port L2/L3 Configuration

Parameter descriptions are shown in Table 6-5:

6-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Table 6-5 Parameters description of Port L2/L3 Configuration
Name Interface Index Interface Description Type Description Index of the interface. Text description of the interface. Type of the interface, l2port refers to layer 2 port, l3port refers to layer 3 interface.

Select the interfaces to be configured from the window (multiple selection available here) and click <Change Type> button to switch the layer attribute of the interface. By doing so, layer 2 interface changes to layer 3 interface and vice versa.

6.7 Link-aggregation Management
This fuction is available on Core routers and S8016 Core switch.These devices support aggregating multiple ports into one logical port which is called link-aggregation. The aggregated link supports automatic port traffic balancing protection by adopting traffic arranging algorithm, which ensures balanced traffic among the physical links. Packets to be sent via this aggragated link will be forwarded through any one (and the only one) physical link among all the aggregated links. The service quality and packets order are garanteed by the dispatching policy on the physical link. If one or more physical links break, traffic though these links will be automatically directed to other good links. And after the recovery of the links, traffic will be automatically distributed again among all the good links. The link type will be Point to Point after the link-aggregation. It demands that the peer (e.g. ethernetswitch) side supports link aggregation also. However, the traffic arranging algorithm can be different between the link aggregation on the two peers.

6.7.1 Querying Link-aggregation Information
Double click [Port Management/ Link-aggregation Management] node on function tree to open “Link-aggregation Management” window, as shown in Figure 6-9:

6-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Figure 6-9 Link-aggregation Management

Descriptions of the parameters in the window are listed in Table 6-6: Table 6-6 Parameters description of Link-aggregation Management
Name Link-aggregation List Slave Port List Description Text description of the main port of the aggregation Text description of the slave ports of the aggregation

Information of all the link-aggregations can be querried here. The main ports of the link-aggregations are shown in the left window. Click one of them and all the slave ports involved in the link-aggregation will be displayed in the “Slave Port List” window to the right.

6.7.2 Add Link-aggregation
Click <Add…> button in “Link-aggregation Management” window and

“Link-aggregation Creation” window will pop out as shown in Figure 6-10:

6-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

Figure 6-10 Link-aggregation Creation

Select the main port of the aggregation in the “Master Port” list. Then select one or more slave ports to be added into the aggregation in the “Available Slave Ports” list and click “>>” button to add them into the “Selected Slave Ports” list. Click <OK> to finish creating the link-aggregation.

" Notes: 1) Observing port and ports already involved in other link-aggregations are not available for new aggregations. So they will not appear in the “Master Port” list. What’s more, auto-negotiating port cannot be used in aggregations; 2) After selecting the master port, contents in the Available Port List will change respectively. All the slave ports involved in an link-aggregation cannot exceed the number of 7.

6.7.3 Delete Link-aggregation
Select one or more lines in “Link-aggregation List” in the “Link-aggregation Management” window. Then click <Delete> button to delete the corresponding aggregations.

6-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 6 Port Management

6.7.4 Config Link-aggregation
Select one line in “Link-aggregation List” in the “Link-aggregation Management” window. Then Click <Config…> button and the “Link-aggregation Configuration” window will be displayed as shown in Figure 6-11:

Figure 6-11 Link-aggregation Configuration

Click “>>” or “<<” button to add or remove slave ports to the link-aggregation in the window. Click <OK> to finish the configuration.

6-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 7 Device Management

Chapter 7 Device Management
7.1 Active/Standby Switching
High-speed and stability are the two important features for core router and S8016 device. To implement stability, the user should configure 1 + 1 backup work mode for main control board, network board and clock board when the device is configured fully. When the active board works abnormally and the service is affected, the system will switch to standby board automatically. The active/standby switching can implement the data backup and data smoothness. The function is especially important for the system. Quidview NMS provides active/standby switching function for core router and S8016 device to implement such switching as main control board, clock board and network board. Select [Device Management/Card Standby Switch] on function tree and "Card Standby Switch" window pops up, as shown in Figure 7-1:

Figure 7-1 Card Standby Switch

This window will display the switching date and time of main control board. According to the demand, the user can select <Switch MPU>, <Switch CLK>, and <Switch NET> on this window to perform the switchover of main control board, clock board and network board. If click <Refresh> on the window, the system will re-read latest data from the device and display the data on the window through refreshing.

7-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 7 Device Management

7.2 Card Reset
Only the core router has this function. On "Panel Monitoring" window, select the card to be reset and select [Device Management/Card Reset] on function tree, "Card Reset" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 7-2:

Figure 7-2 Card Reset

Click <Config> on this window, the user can re-upgrade the data to the device to complete card reset function. If to reset many cards at one time, the user can select many cards on "Panel Monitoring" window after opening "Card Reset" window. The list on "Card Reset" window will display many entries and the user can select multiple entries according to demand, and then click <Config> to complete the reset function of many boards. Click <Refresh> to re-read data from the device. Click <Clear> and <Clear All> to delete the selected entries or all entries in board reset list and the user does not need to perform reset operation for those cards.

7.3 Attribute Config
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) implements the translation from logic Internet address to corresponding physical hardware address to provide dynamic mapping from

7-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 7 Device Management

IP address to corresponding hardware address. When two devices need to communicate with each other, both devices must know the MAC address of one another. Each device should maintain the translation table from IP address to MAC address, which is called ARP mapping table. ARP mapping table saves a series of current used mapping of IP address and MAC address of other devices communicating with local device. When one ARP mapping entry has not been used for long time, the host will delete it from ARP mapping table to save memory space and search time of ARP mapping table. Quidview NMS can query the aging time of current ARP table of core router and S8016 device and can configure the aging time. Select [Device Management/Attribute Config] on function tree, "Attribute Config" window pops up, as shown inFigure 7-3:

Figure 7-3 Attribute Config

The aging time of ARP table can be queried and configured on this window.

7.4 L2 Forwarding Table Management
7.4.1 Querying L2 Forwarding Table Information
This function is to querry the L2 fowarding table information on Core routers and S8016 Core switch. Double click [Device Management/L2 Forwarding Table Management] node on function tree to open “L2 Forwarding Table Management” window, as shown in Figure 7-4:

7-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 7 Device Management

Figure 7-4 L2 Forwarding Table Management

Descriptions of the parameters in the window are listed in Table 7-1: Table 7-1 Parameters description of L2 Forwarding Table Management
Name MAC Address VLAN ID Forwarding Port Packet Filter Type Description Source MAC address in the data packet VLAN ID Name of the forwarding port, option differs as selected VLAN ID changes Type of packets to be filtered. For S8016, three types are available: static, permanent and blackhole; for Core routers, only two types available: staticand blackhole

Click <Refresh> in “L2 Forwarding Table Management” window and system will read the L2 forwarding table data to refresh the displayed information.

7.4.2 Creating L2 Forwarding Entry
Click <Add> button in “L2 Forwarding Table Management” and “L2 Forwarding Entry Creation” window will be displayed as shown in in Figure 7-5:

7-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 7 Device Management

Figure 7-5 L2 Forwarding Entry Creation

Input MAC address in the window and select VLAN ID. All the ports involved in the specified VLAN and all TRUNK ports will be automatically displayed in the “Forwarding Port” list. Please select necessary ports for forwarding. Select packet filter type and click <OK> to create a new L2 forwarding entry.

7.4.3 Deleting L2 Forwarding Entry
Select one or more lines in “L2 Forwarding Table Management”window and click <Delete> button to delete selected entries. If there are only part of the selected entries deleted, system will give prompt to notice that deletion was not excuted successfully.

7.4.4 Configuring L2 Forwarding Entry
Configuring L2 forwarding entry is similar to creating one. The only difference is, MAC address and VLAN ID cannot be modified here. See “Create L2 Forwarding Entry” section for details.

7.4.5 Querying and Configuring L2 Forwarding Table Aging Time
Modification of L2 forwarding table aging time is available here.When an entry keeps un-refreshed within the aging time, it will be deleted by system.

7-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 7 Device Management

Click <Aging Time…> button in “L2 Forwarding Table Management” window and “L2 Forwarding Table Aging Time Management” window will be displayed as show in Figure 7-6:

Figure 7-6 L2 Forwarding Table Aging Time Management

If “Yes” is selected in the “Aging” option, aging time can be modified between the range of 10~1000000s. And if “No” is selected, ”Aging Time” column will be disabled and no modification is available.

7-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring
8.1 Operation Description
Performance monitoring is primarily used to display the statistical information of the specified performance monitoring items in the format of a bar graph or a fold-line graph, and to refresh the display at the preset interval. This makes it convenient for the network administrator to learn about the operation status of the device and to conduct troubleshooting in urgent situations. The following details the use of the monitoring window by taking device monitoring as an example. Double click on [Performance Monitoring/Device Monitoring] node on the function tree, and the "Device Monitoring" window appears on the right information display area, as shown in Figure 8-1:

Figure 8-1 Device Monitoring

This window is separated into two parts, as follows: 1) Functional buttons

8-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

On the left of the window are functional buttons that are, from the top down, <Select Items>, <Bar>, <Plot>, <Exporting Data>, <Importing Data> and <Properties>. <Select Items> helps you to select the performance items to be monitored; <Bar> displays the monitoring results of the selected items in a bar graph; <Plot> displays the monitoring results in a fold-line graph (default display mode); <Exporting Data> and <Importing Data> export/import the monitoring results to/from a file to facilitate monitoring result access; <Properties> is used to select polling interval and set the maximum number of samples to be displayed. The polling interval should be set not too small to ensure normal functioning of the system. 2) Display area of monitoring results

It lies on the right of the window, showing the monitoring results in the format of a bar graph or a fold-line graph.

I. Usage example
1) Select the proper polling interval and maximum number samples to be displayed.

In the "Device Monitoring" window, click <Properties> button to open the "Properties" window. Here specify the proper values for "Interval(s)" and "Max Samples" items, and click <OK> to close the window. By default, the polling interval is 60s and the maximum number of samples is 500. 2) Select new items

In the "Device Monitoring" window, click <Select Items> to open the "Select Monitor Item" window, as shown in Figure 8-2:

Figure 8-2 Select Monitor Item

8-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

The device monitoring items are divided into such groups as IP Group, TCP Group, UDP Group, ICMP Group, SNMP Group, SNMP (Operation) Group and SNMP (Error) Group. You are required to select a group first, and then the monitoring items from the list. You may select several items by holding down the <Shift> (<Ctrl>) button while clicking several items. The monitoring results of these items will be displayed in the result display area in different colors. After selection, click <OK> to start polling monitoring immediately.

Caution: After new monitoring items are selected, the information displayed in the result area will be cleared and new polling monitoring will be started.

3)

Browse monitoring results

You may select to browse the monitoring results in a bar graph or a fold-line graph on demand, where different items are displayed in different colors. The system reads the values of the items from the device at certain interval and refreshes the graph accordingly. After the number of the displayed records reaches the value of "Max Samples", the whole graph will move leftward horizontally, having the new record replace the earliest record one by one. Finally, you may export or import data on demand to facilitate data access.

8.2 Device Monitoring
This function is mainly used to monitor device traffic on a real-time basis so as to show the operation trend of the device within certain interval. This will provide reference for the network administrator in troubleshooting. In the function window, double click on [Performance Monitoring /Device Monitoring] node on the function tree to access the device monitoring window. Various indexes in this window are described in Table 8-1:

8-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Table 8-1 Description of device monitoring indexes
Group Monitoring item Description The number of IP packets received during the polling interval. The number of IP packets received during the polling interval after buffer overflow. The number of IP packets forwarded during the polling interval The number of IP packets with header errors received during the polling interval. The number of IP packets with destination address errors received during the polling interval. The number of IP packets sent during the polling interval after buffer overflow. The number of IP packets without route sent during the polling interval. The number of IP packets successfully recombined during the polling interval. The number of TCP segments received during the polling interval. The number of TCP segments sent during the polling interval. The number of UDP packets received during the polling interval. The number of UDP packets sent during the polling interval. The number of packets failed being sent to valid ports during the polling interval. The number of packets with errors received during the polling interval. The number of ICMP messages received during the polling interval. The number of ICMP messages sent during the polling interval. The number of ICMP messages with errors received during the polling interval. The number of ICMP messages with errors sent during the polling interval. The number of SNMP packets received during the polling interval. The number of SNMP packets sent during the polling interval. Total number of Get/GetNext requests sent during the polling interval. Total number of Set requests sent during the polling interval. Total number of GetRequest packets sent during the polling interval. Total number of GetNextRequest packets sent during the polling interval. Total number of SetRequest packets sent during the polling interval. Total number of Trap packets sent during the polling interval.

Input IP packets Buffer overflow input IP packets Forwarded IP packets Input IP packets with error Addresses IP packets with error IP Group Addresses Buffer overflowed Output IP packets Output IP packets without route Recombined IP packets succeeded Input TCP Segments TCP Group Output TCP Segments Input UDP Messages Output UDP Messages UDP Group Sent failed UDP Messages Received failed UDP Messages Input ICMP Messages Output ICMP Messages ICMP Group Input error ICMP Messages Output error ICMP Messages Received SNMP SNMP Group Messages Sent SNMP Messages All Get/GetNext Requests All Set Requests GetRequest SNMP Messages (OPeration) GetNextRequest Group Messages SetRequest Messages Sent SNMP_Trap Messages Error of invalid version Error of invalid community Illegal SNMP operations

The number of invalid version errors occurred during the polling interval. The number of invalid community name errors occurred during the polling interval. The number of illegal SNMP operations conducted during the polling interval. The number of packet ASN1decoding errors occurred during the polling Error of ASN1 Decode interval. SNMP (Error) Too-long Messages The number of packet too-long errors occurred during the polling interval. Group Errors of Messages The number of invalid packet name errors occurred during the polling name interval. Errors of invalid The number of invalid packet value errors occurred during the polling Messages interval. Errors of Operation The number of read-only object operation errors occurred during the read-only object polling interval. Common errors The number of other common errors occurred during the polling interval.

8-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

8.3 Port Monitoring
This function is mainly used to monitor some important statistical data of the port on a real-time basis, so as to show the operation trend of the port within certain interval. This will provide reference for the network administrator in network troubleshooting. Double click on [Performance Monitoring/Port Monitoring] node on the function tree to access the port monitoring window. Various indexes in the window are described in Table 8-2. Table 8-2 Description of port monitoring items
Group Monitoring item Description The traffic of the incoming bit streams on the interface in a set time period to interface rate The traffic of the outgoing bit streams on the interface in a set time period to interface rate The traffic of the incoming bit streams on the interface in a set time period to interface rate The traffic of the outgoing bit streams on the interface in a set time period to interface rate The number of input packets with errors to total input packets The number of output packets with errors to total output packets The number of discarded input packets to total input packets The number of discarded output packets to total output packets The number of input packets of unknown protocol to total input packets Total number of packets received on the port Total number of packets sent on the port The number of discarded input packets on the port The number of discarded output packets on the port The number of packets with errors received on the port The number of packets with errors sent on the port The number of packets of unknown protocol received on the port The number of unicast packets received on the port The number of unicast packets sent on the port The number of multicast packets received on the port The number of multicast packets sent on the port The number of broadcast packets received on the port The number of broadcast packets sent on the port The number of octets received on the port The number of octets sent on the port

Highspeed interface input utilization rate(%) Highspeed interface Output utilization rate (%) Lowspeed interface input utilization rate(%) Lowspeed interface Output utilization rate (%) Interface Utilization Input error packets rate(%) Statistic Output error packets rate (%) Input discard packets rate(%) Output discard packets rate (%) Input unknown protocol rate(%) Input packets Out packets Input discard packets Output discard packets Input error packets Output error packets Lowspeed/Hi Input unknown protocol packets ghspeed Interface Input Unicast packets Flow Statistic Out Unicast packets Input Multicast packets Out Multicast packets Input Broadcast packets Out Broadcast packets Input Octets Output Octets

In the port monitoring window, you can also select one or more ports for monitoring on your demand.

8-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

8.4 System Monitoring
This function is mainly used to monitor system loading and status of low-end and mid-range devices on a real-time basis, so as to show the operation trend of the systems within certain interval. This will provide reference for the network administrators in network troubleshooting. Double click on [Performance Monitoring/System Monitoring] node on the function tree to access the system monitoring window. Various indexes in the window are described in Table 8-3: Table 8-3 Description of system monitoring indexes
Group Monitoring index CPU Load(5s)(%) CPU Load (5m)(%) Description The percentage of the mean CPU occupation ratio of the router system during the last 5 seconds. The percentage of the mean CPU occupation ratio of the router system during the last 5 minutes. Free rate of Non-Volatility Random Access Memory (NV-RAM) that is used to store configuration files on routers.

NV-RAM available System rate(%) Load VOS Memory The percentage of the free memory pool space available rate (%) Buffer allocation The number of memory allocation failures. failures Buffer create failures The number of memory application failures due to lack of memory. due to no free Current system temperature, including such status as 0 (normal), 1 (over-cold) System System temperature and 2 (overheat). Status Fan status Current status of system fan, including 0 (normal), 1 (stop) and 2 (no fan)

8.5 Card Monitoring
This function monitors the status of device cards on a real-time basis. Double click on [Performance Monitoring/Card Monitoring] node on the function tree to access the card monitoring window. Various indexes in the window are described in Table 8-4 and Table 8-5: Table 8-4 Description of card monitoring indexes of NE08 and NE16
Group Memory Monitoring Monitoring index Used Memory(kBytes) Available Memory (kBytes) Max Memory space (kBytes) Buffer error Buffer without Memory (kBytes) CPU Load (in 5 seconds) (%) Cpu Monitoring CPU Load (in 1 minute) (%) CPU Load (in 5 minutes) (%) Description Total memory in use Free memory The ration of free memory to total memory Total buffer failed being allocated The size of buffer failed being allocated due to lack of memory The percentage of mean CPU occupation ration of the router system during the last 5 seconds. The percentage of mean CPU occupation ration of the router system during the last minute. The percentage of mean CPU occupation ration of the router system during the last 5 minutes.

8-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Group Monitoring index Available Buffer Used Buffer Number of discarded memory blocks Number of error memory blocks due to border unalignment Number of re-released error memory blocks Number of collected memory blocks Free buffer Buffer in use

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Description

32/64/128/ 256/1024/ 2048/ 4096bytes Buffer Monitoring

The number of discarded memory blocks The number of error memory blocks encountered due to border unalignment The number of error memory blocks encountered due to repeated release The number of collected memory blocks

Table 8-5 Description of card monitoring indexes of high-end router S8016
Group Card Temperature Monitoring Card Load Monitoring Monitoring index Card CPU temperature Card NET temperature (oC) Card Power temperature (oC) Card CPU utilization rate (%) Card Memory utilization rate (%) (oC) Description Temperature of the CPU on the card Temperature of the network driver on the card Temperature of the power module on the card CPU utility Memory in use to total memory

8-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Chapter 9 RMON Management
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is the most important improvement to the SNMP. It is used to reduce the requirements for network bandwidth in an efficient manner, to realize value-added analysis of network data and to facilitate network management and decrease network loading. RMON management is primarily used for remote monitoring and management on host devices based on the monitoring and configuration functions of statistics, history, alarm and event groups defined in RMON-MIB of RFC1757 and extended alarm MIB defined by Huawei. In addition, it also provides graphical monitoring, browsing and configuration interfaces. The RMON management function provided in Quidview RouterManager includes:
! ! ! ! !

Configuration of real-time monitoring of statistics group Configuration and data browsing of history group Configuration and browsing of alarm group Configuration and browsing of event group Browsing of log information corresponding to event group

" Note: To enable the RMON function, you must run the rmon promiscuous command from the command line.

9.1 Configuration and Real-time Monitoring of Statistics Group
The statistics group provides related information about the loading and overall health conditions of the subnet. This information can be obtained by configuring the network management host to monitor different interfaces and to poll the statistical information periodically. The real-time monitoring function of statistical data performs real-time monitoring on the statistical variables of the specified interface on the device. Users can select the interface and statistical variables and perform real-time monitoring on the statistical data in a fold-line graph.

9-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

In the function window, double click on [Performance Monitoring/RMON] node to access the "RMON" window on the right information display area, as shown in Figure 9-1:

Figure 9-1 RMON

Meaning of various fields in statistics group is described in Table 9-1: Table 9-1 Statistics Group
Field name Index Port Packet discarding events Received bytes Received Packets Owner Status Description Index of the configuration item of the statistics group Port name The number of packet discarding events on the interface The number of bytes received on the interface The number of packets received on the interface Owner of the configuration item of the statistics group Status of the interface, including Activate and Inactivate.

In this window, you may implement such functions as adding a statistics item, deleting statistics item, real-time monitoring, etc. Various functions are detailed below.

I. Add a statistics item
In Figure 9-1, click <Add…> button to open the "Add a Statistics Item" window, as shown in Figure 9-2:

9-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-2 Add a Statistics Item

In this dialog box, enter the information of Ethernet port and owner, where "Port" refers to the source port of the data and "Owner" refers to the creator of the configuration item of the statistics group (by default, it is “monitor”, and you may also specify another name).

II. Delete statistics item
In Figure 9-1, select a statistics item or several consecutive (separate) statistics items by holding down the <Shift> (<Ctrl>) button while clicking several statistics items. Then click <Delete> button and click <OK> in the popup "Prompt" window to delete the select statistics items.

III. Real-time monitoring
The real-time monitoring function of the statistics group displays the statistical information of the specified configuration items in statistics group in the format of a table, histogram or fold-line graph and refreshes the information display periodically according to the specified interval. In Figure 9-1, click <Real-time Monitor…> button to access the "Statistics Group Real-time Monitoring" window, as shown in Figure 9-3:

9-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-3 Statistics Group Real-time Monitoring

This window is broken into two parts as follows: 1) Functional buttons

On the left of the window are the functional buttons that are, from the top down: <Select Items>, <Realtime Grid>, <Realtime Chart>, <Bar>, <Plot>, <Exporting Data>, <Importing Data> and <Properties>. 2) Display area of monitoring results

It lies on the middle of the window, displaying the results of monitoring in the format of Chart & Grid, Bar or Plot.
!

Select items button to open the "Select current monitoring item" window, as

In Figure 9-3, click shown in Figure 9-4:

9-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-4 Select current monitoring item

This window consists of such two tabs as “Same Port” and “Same Variable”, which monitors the values of several statistical variables of the same interface and monitor the same statistical variable of different interfaces respectively.
!

Chart & Grid, Bar, Plot

The system provides several information display modes such as Chart & Grid, Bar and Plot, etc. You may click the corresponding buttons to display the statistical information in different modes.
!

Importing Data/Exporting Data

You may select the functional buttons <Exporting Data> and <Importing Data> in the "Real-time Monitoring" window to export the monitoring results to a file or import the corresponding monitoring results from a file.
!

Properties

This function is used to adjust the system polling interval and the maximum number of values that can be displayed in result figure.

9.2 Configuration and Data Browsing of History Group
The history group is used to define the collection function for several interfaces, including setting history data collection task for a given device, collecting data on the specified interface and displaying collection results in the specified mode. It consists of

9-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

such two tables as history control table (detailed information about interfaces and the sampling functions) and Ethernet history table (data records, which is specific to Ethernet media).

I. Configuration of history group
1) Adding a history item

In RMON management window, click the "History Group" tab to open the data browsing and configuration interface of history group, as shown in Figure 9-5. The list on the left displays all history items defined for the device and the meaning of various fields is described in Table 9-2. Various functional buttons on the right provide configuration and browsing functions for history items.

Figure 9-5 RMON - History Group

Table 9-2 History Group
Content Index Port Hits Requested Hits Allowed Sampling Interval Owner Status Description Index of the configuration item in the history group. Port name The number of discrete sampling intervals required. By, default it is 50. The actual number of discrete sapling intervals. Data sampling interval in second. It is a value in the range of 1 to 3600 and the default value is 1800. Owner of the configuration item of the history group. The status of the interface, including Active and Inactive.

Click <Add…> button, and the "Add History Item" window pops up, as shown in Figure 9-6:

9-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-6 Add a History Item

Information to be inputted in this window is described in Table 9-3: Table 9-3 Information to be inputted in adding a history configuration item
Content Port Sampling Interval Hits Requested Owner Description The source data port of the collection task must be specified. Here a drop-down list box is provided for you to select the Ethernet interface for data collection. Data collection interval on the specified device interface in the units of second. It is a value in the range of 10 to 3600 and the default value is 1800. The maximum number of samples that can be reserved for the collection task by the device. It is a value in the range of 1 to 50 and the default value is 50. A device reserves the last N (the maximum sampling amount allowed) samples, which is decided by the storage capacity of the device and should set properly (not too large) to save system resources. Creator of the collection task and the default value is “monitor”. You may also input another name.

Caution: When adding a history item, the newly entered port and sampling interval cannot be same with those of an existent item simultaneously. Otherwise, the operation will fail and a prompt window will pop up, showing "The combination of Port and sampling interval cannot be repeated".

2)

Deleting history items

In Figure 9-5, select one or more history items and click <Delete> button. Then click <OK> button in the popup "Prompt" window to delete the selected history items.

9-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

II. Data browsing of history group
The history table contains the history statistics information collected by the host according to the monitoring items set in history control table. Data browsing of history group means to display the history table information of the specified configuration items in history group in the format of a table, histogram or fold-line graph. In Figure 9-5, click <Browse…> button to access the "Browse History" window, as shown in Figure 9-7:

Figure 9-7 Browse History

The use of the first button in this window is described below and the other functions are same with those of statistics group, which are not covered here in more detail. In Figure 9-7, click Figure 9-8: button to open the "Select history items" window, as shown in

9-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-8 Select history items

This window consists of such parts as "Data Item" and "Control Item". "Data Item" list contains the data items that can be browsed by users and "Control Item" list contains history items for users to select from. After selection, click <OK> to browse the data in history group in various modes (Grid, Chart, Bar or Plot).

Caution: 1).If you click <Browse…> button during the sampling interval of the selected history item, a prompt window will pop up, indicating reading device data failed. That is because the system failed in reading history data from the device as history data is yet to be generated. 2) The data in Browse history dialog is Static. Only when reopen the dialog, you can view the new data.

9.3 Configuration and Browsing of Alarm Group
The alarm group management is used to monitor the statistics information of the specified interface. When the value of the monitored data crosses the corresponding threshold, an alarm event will be created. Usually, alarm event is recorded into device log and a Trap is sent to the network management station simultaneously. Alarm group is composed of independent alarm configuration items, each of which specifies a special monitoring variable, a sampling interval and the related thresholds.

9-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

In RMON management window, click "Alarm Group" tab to open the data browsing and configuration window of alarm group, as shown in Figure 9-9. The list on the left displays all alarm items defined for the device and meaning of various fields is described in Table 9-4. The functional buttons on the right provide configuration and browsing functions of the alarm items.

Figure 9-9 RMON -Alarm Group

Table 9-4 Displayed information of Alarm Group
Content Index Interval Variable Sampling Type Value Startup Type Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Index Falling Event Index Owner Status Description The unique identification of the alarm item. Sampling interval of the alarm data in the range of 1 to 3600s. MIB variable to be monitored, including such two sections as statistical variable and interface name. Include absolute sampling and relative sampling. Statistical data collected during the last sampling interval. Include rising and falling alarm allowed, rising alarm allowed and falling alarm allowed. Threshold of rising alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a rising alarm will be created. Threshold of falling alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a falling alarm will be created. Index of rising event Index of falling event Name of the creator of the alarm configuration item Include Active and Inactive.

I. Adding an alarm item
Click <Add…> button in above window to open the "Add an Alarm Item" window, as shown in Figure 9-10.

9-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-10 Add an Alarm Item

This window is broken into such three parts as "SNMP Object", "Sampling Properties" and "Alarm Threshold and Related Events". Meanings of various configuration items is described in Table 9-5: Table 9-5 Meanings of various configuration items in adding an alarm item
Configuration item Variable Port Interval (second) Type Owner Meaning The variable to be monitored Description of the port that is monitored by the configuration item of the statistics group. Sampling interval in the units of second and in the range of 1 to 3600s. By default it is 10. Include absolute sampling and relative sampling. Absolute sampling refers to the accumulated value from the startup of the system to present and relative sampling refers to current absolute sampling value minus last absolute sampling value. Relative sampling is commonly adopted, whose value is related to sampling interval. Creator of the alarm item and the default value is “monitor”. Users can also input other names.

9-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Configuration item Meaning

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Alarm Threshold and Related Events

Threshold of the creation of alarms and events to be generated. It includes such two sections as alarm type control and thresholds and events input. There are three types of alarms that are Rising Alarm Allowed, Falling Alarm Allowed and Create Default Event. If only "Rising Alarm Allowed" check box is selected, the labels of the edit boxes below are "Rising Threshold", "Rising Recovery Value", "Rising Event Index" and "Recovery Event Index". By default, the rate of rising threshold to rising recovery value is 5:4 (i.e., when either of these values is inputted, the other value will be calculated based on this rate). If only "Falling Alarm Allowed" check box is selected, the labels of the edit boxes below are "Falling Threshold", "Falling Recovery Value", "Falling Event Index" and "Recovery Event Index". By default, the rate of falling threshold to falling recovery value is 4:5. When both "Rising Alarm Allowed" and "Falling Alarm Allowed" check boxes are selected, the labels of the edit boxes below are "Rising Threshold", "Falling Threshold", "Rising Event Index" and "Falling Event Index". By default, the rate of Rising threshold to falling threshold is 5:4. When "Create Default Event" check box is selected, you do not need to select event indexes by yourself, instead an event definition will be created according to the selected variables. It sets whether to enable rising alarm. When the monitored alarm item crosses (larger than) this value, an alarm will be created. If this value is specified, "Recovery Value" will be set to 4/5 of it automatically. Index of the rising event When the monitored alarm item is no larger than this value, rising alarm will no longer be created. If this value is specified, the value of "Rising Threshold" will be set to 5/4 of it automatically. It sets whether to enable falling alarm. When the monitored alarm item crosses (larger than) this value, an alarm will be created. If this value is specified, "Recovery Value" will be set to 4/5 of it automatically. Index of the falling event When the monitored alarm item is no larger than this value, falling alarm will no longer be created. If this value is specified, the value of "Falling Threshold" will be set to 5/4 of it automatically. Index of rising or falling event When the check box is selected, you do not need to select event indexes by yourself, instead an event definition will be created according to the selected variables.

Rising Alarm Allowed Rising Threshold Rising Event Index Recovered Value Falling Alarm Allowed Falling Threshold Falling Event Index Recovered Value Recovered Event Index Create Default Event

Caution: When adding an alarm configuration item, make sure that the SNMP variable, port and sampling interval of the newly inputted item are not same with those of any existent item simultaneously. Otherwise, the operation will fail.

II. Modifying an alarm item
In Figure 9-9, select an alarm item and click <Modify> button, then all the configuration items in the "Add an Alarm Item" window except "SNMP Object" are available for modifying.
9-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

III. Deleting alarm items
In Figure 9-9, select one or more alarm items and click <Delete> button. Then click <OK> button in the popup "Prompt" window to delete the selected alarm items.

IV. Displaying invalidated alarm items
The event definitions invoked by alarm configuration items may be deleted by other users, which will invalidate the corresponding alarm configuration items. In the meantime, some alarm configuration items may not be activated. Therefore, this function is provided for users to view and clear the invalidated alarm configuration items or revalidate them through modification. In the "Alarm Group" interface (as shown in Figure 9-9), click <Invalidate Configuration Entry> button to display the invalidated alarm items, as shown in Figure 9-11:

Figure 9-11 Displaying invalidated alarm items

The contents of this interface are basically the same with those of Figure 9-9 except the "Reason for Null" field that is new in this interface. Meaning of various fields is described in Table 9-6: Table 9-6 Information display in invalidated alarm items interface
Content Index Interval Variable Sampling Type Value Startup Type Description The unique identification of the alarm item. Sampling interval of alarm data in the range of 1 to 3600s. MIB variable to be monitored, including such two sections as statistical variable and interface name. Include absolute sampling and relative sampling. Statistical data collected during the last sampling interval. Include rising and falling alarm allowed, rising alarm allowed and falling alarm allowed.

9-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Index Falling Event Index Owner Status Reason for Null Description

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Threshold of rising alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a rising alarm will be created. Threshold of falling alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a falling alarm will be created. Index of rising event Index of falling event Name of the creator of the alarm configuration item Include Active and Inactive. Cause for the invalidation of the alarm configuration item.

In this interface, clicking <Restore Normal Display> button will switch to Figure 9-9.

9.4 Configuration and Log Browsing of Event Group
The event group supports definitions of events. An event can either be triggered by other conditions defined in the MIB or trigger other actions defined in the MIB. In addition, the creation of an event can have the information be recorded in the event group and have the monitor of the host send SNMP Trap message. The events defined in the event group are primarily used to define configuration items of the alarm group and extended alarm group, when the alarm thresholds and events to be created should be inputted in the "Alarm Threshold and Related Events" frame. For example, to set rising alarm, you should select the "Rising Alarm Allowed" check box and enter the rising threshold. If the "Create Default Event" check box is selected, an event will be created for the alarm automatically according to the selected parameters. To use a predefined event, you may select a predefined event of event group in the drop-down list box of "Recovery Event Index". Falling alarm can be set in the same way with rising alarm, both of which can be enabled at a time.

I. Adding an event item
In RMON management window, click the "Event Group" tab to open the data browsing and configuration window of event group, as shown in Figure 9-12. The list on the left of the window displays all event items defined for the device and meanings of various fields is described in Table 9-7. The functional buttons on the right provides configuration and browsing functions of various event items.

9-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-12 RMON - Event Group

Table 9-7 Event Group
Content Event Index Event Description Event Type Description The unique identification of the event. Descriptive information of the event, which provides the clear meaning of the event. Include the following types: Log: the event will be recorded into RMON log after creation. SNMP Trap: SNMP Trap message will be sent after the creation of the event. Log and Trap: the event will be recorded into RMON log and SNMP Trap message will be sent by the host after creation of the event. Community name used to send SNMP Trap message upon the creation of the event. It is effective only when the event type is SNMP Trap or Log and Trap. Time when the event occurred the last time, which is maintained by the system. Creator of the event. By default, it is "monitor". Include Activate and Inactivate.

Event Community Event Sent Last Time Owner Status

Click <Add…> button to open the "Add an Event Item" window, as shown in Figure 9-13. Meanings of the information to be inputted in this window is described in Table 9-8:

9-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Figure 9-13 Add an Event Item

Table 9-8 Contents to be configured in adding a configuration item of event group
Content Description Include the following types: Null: the alarm event is invalidated. Log: the event will be recorded into RMON log after creation. SNMP Trap: SNMP Trap message will be sent after the creation of the event. Log and Trap: the event will be recorded into RMON log and SNMP Trap message will be sent by the host after creation of the event. Community name used to send SNMP Trap message upon the creation of the event. It is effective only when the event type is SNMP Trap or Log and Trap. Creator of the event. By default, it is "monitor". Include the following types: Null: the alarm event is invalidated. Log: the event will be recorded into RMON log after creation. SNMP Trap: SNMP Trap message will be sent after the creation of the event. Log and Trap: the event will be recorded into RMON log and SNMP Trap message will be sent by the host after creation of the event.

Event Description

Type Community

Owner

II. Deleting event items
In the data browsing and configuration window of event group (Figure 9-12), select one or more event items and click <Delete> button. Then click <OK> in the popup "Prompt" window to delete the selected event items.

III. Displaying invalidated event items
Frequent adding, deleting and modifying operations on alarm configuration items may invalidate the definitions of some events. This function is used to display the invalidated events so as to facilitate the management (e.g. deleting) over them.

9-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

In Figure 9-12, click <Invalidate Configuration Entry> button to display the invalidated event list, as shown in Figure 9-14:

Figure 9-14 Displaying invalidated event list

The information displayed in this interface is basically the same with that in Figure 9-12 except the "Reason for Null" field that is new in this interface.

IV. Browsing log information related to the specified event
In Figure 9-12, select one or more event items and click <View Log> button to view the related log information of the specified events.

" Note: Click <View Log> button without selecting any event in Figure 9-12, and the system will display the complete log information.

9.5 Configuration and Browsing of Alarm Extended Group
RMON alarm extension is used to manage RMON alarm extended group that is the extension of RMON alarm group. The alarm group can only set one object in MIB, whereas the alarm extended group, as indicated by the name, supports alarm configuration for both single object and object expressions, and supports settings of both interfaces and all valid instance values.

9-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

The RouterManager provides configuration of alarm extended group for the device that will generate alarms according to the set conditions. Because this type of alarm is caused by threshold-crossing of the monitored performance data on the device, it is also called "performance alarm". In RMON management window, click "Alarm Extended Group" tab to open the data browsing and configuration window of alarm extended group, as shown in Figure 9-15. The list on the left of the window displays all alarm extended items defined for the device and meanings of various fields is described in Table 9-9. The functional buttons on the right provides configuration and browsing functions of various event items.

Figure 9-15 RMON - Alarm Extended Group

Table 9-9 Alarm Extended Group
Content Index Interval Sampling Object Expression Object Expression Description Alarm Sampling Type Alarm Value Alarm Startup Type Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Index Falling Event Index Description The unique identification of the alarm item. Sampling interval of the alarm data in the range of 1 to 3600s. The formula composed of OIDs and arithmetic operation expressions, whose result generates an alarm. Meanings of sampling object expression Include absolute sampling, relative sampling and rate sampling. Statistical data collected during the last sampling interval. Include rising and falling alarm allowed, rising alarm allowed and falling alarm allowed. Threshold of rising alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a rising alarm will be created. Threshold of falling alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a falling alarm will be created. Index of rising event Index of falling event

9-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Statistics Period Statistics Type Owner Status

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Description It is effective only when the sampling type is specified to periodical sampling. It specifies the duration from the creation of an alarm to expiration in the units of hour. Include periodical sampling and permanent sampling. If periodical sampling is specified, the period must be specified in above edit box. If permanent sampling is specified, the sampling period edit box becomes ineffective. Name of the creator of the alarm configuration item Include Active and Inactive.

I. Adding an alarm extended item
Click <Add…> button in above window to open the "Add an Alarm Extended Item" window, as shown in Figure 9-16:

Figure 9-16 Add an Alarm Extended Item

This window is broken into such three parts as "Object Expression", "Sampling Properties" and "Alarm Threshold and Related Events". Meanings of various configuration items is described in Table 9-10.

9-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Table 9-10 Meanings of various configuration items in "Add Alarm Extended Item" window
Configuration item Expression Name Expression Formula Meaning Meanings of sampling object expression The formula composed of OIDs and arithmetic operation expressions, whose result generates an alarm. It may correspond to any of the following logical entities: whole device, interface number and other valid OID indexes. For different expression formulas, the available instance values are different. Therefore it is recommended that the instance value be selected from the drop-down list to ensure its validity. For users familiar with the expression formula, this value can be input directly to accelerate the configuration, as it takes time to get data from the device if there are many instance values. Sampling interval in the units of second and in the range of 1 to 3600s. By default it is 10. Include absolute sampling and relative sampling. Absolute sampling refers to the accumulated value from the startup of the system to present and relative sampling refers to current absolute sampling value minus last absolute sampling value. Relative sampling is commonly adopted, whose value is related to sampling interval. Include periodical sampling and permanent sampling. If periodical sampling is specified, the period must be specified in above edit box. If permanent sampling is specified, the sampling period edit box becomes ineffective. It is effective only when the sampling type is specified to periodical sampling. It specifies the duration from the creation of an alarm to expiration in the units of hour. Creator of the alarm extended item and the default value is “monitor”. You may also input another name. Thresholds of the creation of alarms and events to be generated. It includes such two sections as alarm type control and thresholds and events input. There are three types of alarms that are Rising Alarm Allowed, Falling Alarm Allowed and Create Default Event. If only "Rising Alarm Allowed" check box is selected, the labels of the edit boxes below are "Rising Threshold", "Rising Recovery Value", "Rising Event Index" and "Recovery Event Index". By default, the rate of rising threshold to rising recovery value is 5:4 (i.e., when either of these values is inputted, the other value will be calculated based on this rate). If only "Falling Alarm Allowed" check box is selected, the labels of the edit boxes below are "Falling Threshold", "Falling Recovery Value", "Falling Event Index" and "Recovery Event Index". By default, the rate of falling threshold to falling recovery value is 4:5. When both "Rising Alarm Allowed" and "Falling Alarm Allowed" check boxes are selected, the labels of the edit boxes below are "Rising Threshold", "Falling Threshold", "Rising Event Index" and "Falling Event Index". By default, the rate of Rising threshold to falling threshold is 5:4. When "Create Default Event" check box is selected, you do not need to select event indexes by yourself, instead an event definition will be created according to the selected variables. It sets whether to enable rising alarm. When the monitored alarm item is larger than this value, rising alarm will be created. If this value is specified, "Recovered Value" will be set to 4/5 of it automatically. Index of the rising event When the monitored alarm item is no larger than this value, rising alarm will no longer be created. If this value is specified, the value of "Rising Threshold" will be set to 5/4 of it automatically. It sets whether to enable falling alarm. When the monitored alarm item crosses (larger than) this value, an alarm will be created. If this value is specified, "Recovery Value" will be set to 4/5 of it automatically. Index of the falling event When the monitored alarm item is no larger than this value, falling alarm will no longer be created. If this value is specified, the value of "Falling Threshold" will be set to 5/4 of it automatically. Index of rising or falling event When the check box is selected, you do not need to select event indexes by yourself, instead an event definition will be created according to the selected variables.

Instance Value

Interval (second) Type

Period Type Sampling Period Owner

Alarm Threshold and Related Events

Rising Alarm Allowed Rising Threshold Rising Event Index Recovered Value Falling Alarm Allowed Falling Threshold Falling Event Index Recovered Value Recovered Event Index Create Default Event

9-20

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Caution: When adding an alarm extended configuration item, make sure that the expression, instance value and sampling interval of the newly inputted item are not same with those of any existent item simultaneously. Otherwise, the operation will fail.

II. Modifying an alarm extended item
In Figure 9-15, select an alarm extended item and click <Modify> button, then all the configuration items in the "Add an Alarm Extended Item" window except object expression are available for modifying.

III. Deleting alarm extended items
In Figure 9-15, select one or more alarm extended items and click <Delete> button. Then click <OK> button in the popup confirmation dialog box to delete the selected alarm extended items.

IV. Displaying invalidated alarm extended items
The event definitions invoked by alarm extended configuration items may be deleted by other users, which will invalidate the corresponding alarm extended configuration items. In the meantime, some alarm extended configuration items may not be activated. Therefore, this function is provided to view and clear the invalidated alarm extended configuration items or revalidate them through modification. In Figure 9-15, click <Invalidate Configuration Entry> button to display the invalidated alarm items. The contents of this interface are basically the same with those of Figure 9-15 except the "Reason for Null" field that is new in this interface. Meanings of various fields is described in Table 9-11: Table 9-11 Information display in invalidated alarm extended items interface
Content Index Interval Sampling Object Expression Object Expression Description Alarm Sampling Type Alarm Value Alarm Startup Type Description The unique identification of the alarm item. Sampling interval of alarm data in the range of 1 to 3600s. The formula composed of OIDs and arithmetic operation expressions, whose result generates an alarm. Meanings of object expression Include absolute sampling, relative sampling and rate sampling. Statistical data collected during the last sampling interval. Include rising and falling alarm allowed, rising alarm allowed and falling alarm allowed.

9-21

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Index Falling Event Index Statistics Period Statistics Type Owner Status Reason for Null

Chapter 9 RMON Management

Description Threshold of rising alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a rising alarm will be created. Threshold of falling alarms. If the monitored data crosses this value, a falling alarm will be created. Index of rising event Index of falling event It is effective only when the sampling type is specified to periodical sampling. It specifies the duration from the creation of an alarm to expiration in the units of hour. Include periodical sampling and permanent sampling. If periodical sampling is specified, the period must be specified in above edit box. If permanent sampling is specified, the sampling period edit box becomes ineffective. Name of the creator of the alarm extended configuration item Include Activate and Inactivate. Cause for the invalidation of the alarm extended configuration item.

In this interface, clicking <Restore Normal Display> button will switch to Figure 9-15.

9.6 Browsing of Log Information
In RMON management window, click the "Log" tab to open the log information interface, where all the current log information of the system is displayed. Meanings of various fields is described in Table 9-12. Table 9-12 Log Information
Field Event Index Log Index Log Time Log Description Meaning Index of the event that triggers the alarm or log The unique integral identification of the log record, which is maintained by the system. Time when the log is created Descriptive information of the log

9-22

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Chapter 10 VLAN Management
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a protocol brought forward to resolve the Ethernet broadcast and security. It adds a four-byte 802.1Q frame header after the source address of Ethernet. VLAN ID divides the user into less work group and each work group is just a virtual LAN. The virtual LAN can limit the broadcast range and form virtual work group to manage network dynamically. Before VLAN appeared, the administrator improved Ethernet performance or limit the inter-access right of the computers over the Internet network through dividing network segments. At that time, every network segment must own one set of network hardware independently and the same set of network device cannot be shared between various network segments. When a computer transfers from one network segment to another network segment, the administrator should perform more alteration relatively to the network. After VLAN appears, the administrator divides network into segments through VLAN. Every network segment can share one set of network device, which saves the overhead of network hardware. At the same time, the work done in computer transfer is reduced greatly and the internetworking cost is also reduced. VLAN management fits into core routers and S8016 device.

10.1 VLAN Management
10.1.1 Querying VLAN Information
Double click [VLAN Management/VLAN Management] on function tree to open "VLAN Management" window, shown as Figure 10-1:

10-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-1 VLAN Management

The queried information includes all VLAN list of device, VLAN ID, VLAN type, contained access VLAN information, information of aggregate VLAN where the VLAN belongs to, whether to broadcast unknown packet, whether there is layer-3 interface, whether to permit MAC to be learned. If click a VLAN in the list, the port list contained in this VLAN can be queried.

10.1.2 Creating Common VLAN
On "VLAN Management" window, click <Add…> and "VLAN Creation" window pops up, shown as Figure 10-2:

10-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-2 VLAN Creation

Input related parameters and select related ports on the window, click <OK>, one new VLAN can be created. The parameters and meanings involved in VLAN creation go as follows: VLAN ID: an integer identifying VLAN uniquely, ranging from 2 to 4094. McastUnknown: select whether to broadcast unknown packet. MAC Learn: select whether to permit MAC to be learned. The VLAN's Ports: when VLAN is created, the user can specify port list contained in VLAN. The method goes as follows: select ports to be contained in the VLAN from the "Available Ports" list box at the left, and then click ">>".

10-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Caution: 1) The ports listed in selectable port list do not include aggregation-branch port, observing port and port belonging to other VLAN. 2) The selectable port list supports Shift and Ctrl multi-option operation.

10.1.3 Deleting VLAN
Select one or more VLANs to be deleted from VLAN list on "VLAN Management" window, and click <Delete> to delete the corresponding VLANs. After a VLAN is deleted, the port contained in it will change to a default VLAN automatically, i.e., VLAN 1. If the deleted VLAN is an aggregate VLAN, the access VLAN contained in it will automatically become a common VLAN.

Caution: 1) VLAN1 cannot be deleted. 2) The VLAN configured with layer-3 interface cannot be deleted.

10.1.4 Configuring Common VLAN
The operation of configuring VLAN is similar to that of creating VLAN. Please refer to the section "Creating Common VLAN".

10.1.5 Configuring Aggregate VLAN
Select one line in VLAN list on "VLAN Management" window and then click <Config…>. If the selected VLAN is aggregate VLAN, the "Aggregate VLAN Configuration" window pops up. Set VLAN parameter and access VLAN contained in this aggregate VLAN on the window, and then click <OK>, the configuration can be just completed.

10-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Caution: The existing aggregate VLAN, existing access VLAN and VLAN configured with layer-3 interface or VLAN1 cannot be set as the access VLAN of other aggregate VLAN.

10.1.6 Setting Common VLAN as Aggregate VLAN
Select one VLAN from the VLAN list on "VLAN Management" window, click <Change Type> and then you can set common VLAN as aggregate VLAN. If the selected VLAN contains physical port, the VLAN cannot be set as aggregate VLAN.

" Note: "Change Type" function can both set common VLAN as aggregate VLAN and set aggregate VLAN as common VLAN, which depends on the type of current selected VLAN.

10.2 VLAN Interface Management
To implement network layer function on VLAN interface, the user can specify interface for VLAN, i.e., configure IP address and mask for VLAN.

10.2.1 Querying VLAN Interface Information
Double click [VLAN Management/VLAN Interface Management] on function tree to open "VLAN Interface Management" window, show as Figure 10-3:

10-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-3 VLAN Interface Management

The following information can be queried: all VLAN interfaces on this device, including VLAN ID, layer-3 interface IP address, mask of VLAN interface, Route Property, Administration Status, Operation Status, etc.

Caution: Figure 10-3 shows the case of single-port VLAN. When the device supports multi-port VLAN, there is not routing property bar on the window. The single-port VLAN refers to that the routing attribute of a VLAN layer-3 interface must be configured as routing when the VLAN layer-3 interface is connected to the layer-3 interface of other router. Here, the VLAN can only contain one port. In the figure, the routing attribute of VLANs whose ID are 2, 4 and 80 are routing and they can only contains one port. At present, core router only supports single-port VLAN.

10.2.2 Creating VLAN Interface
Click <Add…> on "VLAN Interface Management" window and “Layer-3 VLAN Interface Creation” window pops up, shown as Figure 10-4:

10-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-4 Layer-3 VLAN Interface Creation

On this window, select VLAN ID, input IP address and Mask, click <OK>, one new VLAN interface can be created.

10.2.3 Deleting VLAN Interface
Select one or more VLAN to be deleted from VLAN list on "VLAN Interface Management" window, and then click <Delete>, the corresponding VLAN interface will be deleted.

Caution: If the layer-3 interface used currently is deleted, the management device will not be connected.

10.2.4 Configuring VLAN Interface
Select a line of data on "VLAN Interface Management" window, click <Config…> and "Layer-3 VLAN Interface Configuration" window pops up, shown as Figure 10-5:

10-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-5 Layer-3 VLAN Interface Configuration

Caution: Figure 10-5 shows the case of single-port VLAN. When the device supports multi-port VLAN, there is not routing property on the window.

Select or modify related attribute on this window. Click <OK> to complete configuration operation.

10.3 VLAN Trunk Management
After a port is set as Trunk port and the VLAN that is allowed to pass is specified for this port, this port will permit the packets of one or more different VLANs to pass so as to implement the interconnection between the VLAN on local device and the VLAN on opposite device.

10-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

10.3.1 Querying Trunk Port Information
Double click [VLAN Management/VLAN Trunk Management] on function tree to open "VLAN Trunk Management" window, shown as Figure 10-6:

Figure 10-6 VLAN Trunk Management

The following informaiton is available: VLAN Trunk port description, VLAN Passed and VLAN Allowed to Pass on the port. VLAN Allowed to Pass refers to the VLAN IDs, configured through the NMS, that can pass the device port. They may be the existent VLAN IDs (those actually pass through the device port) configured on the device or new ones.

10.3.2 Creating Trunk Port
Click <Add…> on "VLAN Trunk Management" window and "VLAN Trunk Creation" window pops up, shows as Figure 10-7:

10-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-7 VLAN Trunk Creation

The list at the left of the window lists all device interfaces that can act as Trunk port but this list does not include aggregation branch port and observing port. Select one or more ports from optional ports and click ">>" to add the port into the list of port to be set as Trunk. Just click <OK>. If the creation does not succeed, the "Prompt" on main interface will prompt the failure reason to the user.

10.3.3 Deleting Trunk Port
Select one or more lines from port list on "VLAN Trunk Management" window. Click <Delete> and the selected Trunk port can be deleted.

10.3.4 Configuring Trunk Port
Select one Trunk port on "VLAN Trunk Management" window, click <Config…> and "VLAN Trunk Port Configuration" window pops up, shows as Figure 10-8:

10-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 10 VLAN Management

Figure 10-8 VLAN Trunk Port Configuration

In this window, the input example is given and the user can set VLAN for this Trunk port according to the example. After input, click <OK> or <Add> or <Delete> to execute corresponding operation. Click <OK>, the VLAN list input by the user this time will completely overwrite the VLAN list that is allowed to pass formerly on this Trunk port. Click <Add>, the VLAN input by the user this time will add to the list of former VLAN that is allowed to pass. Click <Delete>, the VLAN input by the user this time will be deleted from the list of VLAN that is allowed to pass formerly. On matter which case is selected from <OK>, <Add> or <Delete>, the system will open the confirm window to ask the user to confirm this if the user inputs more VLAN than 1000 at one time.

10-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

Chapter 11 RSTP Management
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is applied to loopback networks. It blocks some redundant paths through some specific algorithms and tailors the loopback network into the tree-shape loopless network, consequently avoiding the packet flooding and infinite cycling. The basic principle of STP is that it determines the topology structure of the network by transmitting the specific protocol packet between switches (IEEE 802.1D protocol calls such packet as “Configuration Message”). The configuration message contains sufficient information to guarantee the switch to complete the calculation of the spanning tree. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol implemented by core router and S8016 device is the optimized version of STP. The “Rapidness” is incarnated in the shortened delay in a certain condition when entering the Forwarding state from the root port and the specified port, and it also shortens the required time to stabilize of the network topology. The device applying the RSTP is also compatible with the device applying STP. STP and RSTP protocol packets can both be identified and applied in the STP calculation. RSTP management functions implemented by Quidview NMS mainly include device RSTP configuration and port RSTP management. The following details the two sections by taking S8016 as an example.

11.1 Device RSTP Configuration
The function can be used to browse and partially configure RSTP and STP information of S8016 device. Double-click [RSTP Management/Device RSTP Configuration] in the function tree of the function window as shown in Figure 11-1:

11-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

Figure 11-1 Device RSTP Configuration window

The meaning of each parameter is shown below: RSTP Status: enable and disable RSTP. Some network resources will be occupied after RSTP is enabled on the device. RSTP Operation Mode: Two kinds of operation modes are available for RSTP: RSTP Mode and STP Mode. RSTP can operate in STP Mode, and it is interconnected to STP. If there is the network bridge operating STP in the switching network, the current RSTP can be configured to operate in STP Mode. RSTP Diameter: Network diameter refers to the maximum number of switches between any two terminal devices in the switching network. The parameter can be configured as required, ranging 1 to 7 while 7 by default. RSTP Priority: the size of the network bridge determines whether the network bridge can be selected as the root of the whole spanning tree. Specifying smaller priority sets a certain network bridge as the root of the spanning tree, ranging 0 to 61440. RSTP ForwardDelay: The ForwardDelay feature of the network bridge refers to the delay entering the port from Discarding state to Forwarding state, and its parameter is related to the network diameter of the switching network. If FowardDelay is configured too short, the temporary redundant path may be redistributed; if ForwardDelay is configured too long, the network topology cannot restore the connection in a long time after it is changed. The user is recommended to use the default value for the configuration, 15 seconds by default.

11-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

RSTP Bridge Hello Time: Bridge HelloTime refers to the duration for RSTP to periodically send the configuration message. Proper Hello Time can not only guarantee the bridge to discover the link fault in the network in time, but also occupy less network resources. Longer HelloTime may cause the bridge to wrongly assume the protocol packet loss to be link fault and recalculate the tree, while shorter HelloTime may cause the bridge to repeatedly send the configuration message-resulting in added network load and CPU load. The user is recommended to use the default value to configure the HelloTime of the bridge, 2 seconds by default. RSTP Bridge MaxAge: Maxage feature of the bridge refers to the maximum lifetime of the configuration message. The parameter is used to judge whether the configuration message gets expired and discarded. The user can configure it according to the actual situation. If it is configured too short, the calculation of the spanning tree will be repeated. Network congestion may be wrongly regarded as the link fault. If the parameter is configured too long, it cannot timely discover the link fault and lower the network auto-sensing. The user is recommended to use the default value to configure the MaxAge of the bridge, 20 seconds by default. RSTP RootBridgeAddress: it cannot be configured according to MAC address of the root bridge. The user can modify some parameters based on his requirement. Then, click <Configure>. If <Refresh> is clicked, the system will re-read RSTP information from the device and update the display in the window.

11.2 Port RSTP Management
The function can be used to browse and partially configure RSTP and STP information of S8016 device port. Double-click [RSTP Management/Port RSTP Management] in the function tree of the function window, and enable “Port RSTP Management” window as shown in Figure 11-2:

11-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

Figure 11-2 Port RSTP Management window

To configure a certain port, select one port in the port list and click <Config…>. The window "Port RSTP Configuration" pops up as shown in Figure 11-3:

11-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

Figure 11-3 Port RSTP Configuration window

Each parameter is described as follows: Port Description: port name. Port Priority: Setting Ethernet port priority specifies the specific Ethernet port in the spanning tree. Generally, the smaller the configured value is, the higher the port priority is, and the more possible is the Ethernet port in the spanning tree. If all Ethernet ports of the bridge adopt the same priority parameter, the priority level of the Ethernet port is determined by the index of the Ethernet port. It ranges 0 to 255, and by default it is 128. Port RSTP Status: Port RSTP status, including disabled, blocking, listening, learning, forwarding, broken, discarding. Port RSTP Spanning Tree: Whether to enable the port RSTP. Port PathCost: The path cost of Ethernet port is related to the link rate of the port. The higher the link rate is, the smaller the parameter is configured. When the parameter is configured to the default value, RSTP can automatically detect the link rate of the current Ethernet port and converge it into the corresponding path cost. The user is recommended to use the default value so that RSTP can calculate the path cost of the current Ethernet port by itself.

11-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

Port Designated Root: Root bridge ID, the first 16 bits are the priority of the root, while the last 48 bits are MAC address of the root bridge. Port Designated Cost: path designated cost to root bridge. Port Trans Limit: Ethernet port Trans limit refers to the maximum number of configuration messages in HelloTime interval. The parameter is related to the physical state and network structure of the port. If the parameter is configured too large, it occupies more network resources. The user is recommended to adopt the default value to configure the parameter. By default, it is 3. Port EdgePort: Ethernet port EdgePort attribute shows whether the port is directly or indirectly connected to other bridge. If the port is not connected to any Ethernet port of the bridge, the port shall be configured as edge port. In this way, the network bridge operates in RSTP mode, and the port can directly switch to Forwarding state and reduces the unnecessary migrating time. If a certain port is configured as the edge port and it is connected to other port of the network bridge, RSTP can automatically detect and reset it as the non-edge port. Port Point to Point: If the network bridge operates in RSTP mode, the two ports connected by point-to-point link can switch to Forwarding state by transmitting the synchronous packet, which reduces the unnecessary forwarding delay. If the parameter is configured to auto, RSTP can automatically detect whether Ethernet port is connected to point-to-point link. The user can manually configure whether Ethernet port is connected to point-to-point link, but it is recommended that the user set it to auto mode. Port mCheck: Port mCheck attribute is used to detect whether the port in STP compatible mode can be switched to RSTP mode. Setting mCheck checks whether there are other bridges running STP in the network segment connected to the current Ethernet port. If so, RSTP will switch the protocol operation mode to STP compatible mode. In the case of relatively stable network, RSTP will also operate in STP compatible mode although the bridge operating STP in the network segment is disconnected. Setting mCheck variable may force it to switch to RSTP mode. When the command is enabled on the port, if the port still operates in STP compatible mode, it means that STP bridge exist in the network segment connected to the port. Otherwise, the port returns to RSTP mode, which means that no STP bridge exists on the network segment connected to the port. It must be noted that the configuration mode of mCheck variable is somehow special; when mCheck variable is set to “True”, the command is validated in the process of the configuration, but the variable resumes to “False” after configuration; when mCheck variable is set to “False”, it is not validated. Besides, only when mCheck command operates in RSTP mode, detecting STP bridge function can be implemented.

11-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 11 RSTP Management

The user can modify some parameters based on his requirement. Then, click <Ok> for the configuration. If <Refresh> is clicked, the system will re-read RSTP information from the device and update the display in the window.

11-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management
12.1 Overview
Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) are three kinds of dynamic routing protocol widely applied to routers. The user can learn the configuration condition of routing protocol through browsing and viewing routing protocol information. The routing protocol management mainly includes RIP information browsing, OSPF information browsing and BGP information browsing and route protocol enable configuration.

" Note: S8016 does not support OSPF/BGP information browsing, but provide routing table browsing function.

!

Query of RIP information

Including interface configuration information, interface statistic information, peer router information, etc.
!

Query of OSPF protocol information

Including OSPF attribute, area information, connection state database information, OSPF interface information, peer information, virtual connection information, etc.
!

Query of BGP information

Including BGP attribute, peer information, path information, etc.
!

Routing table browsing

Including the browsing of static routing table and dynamic routing table. Such function is provided by S8016 device. Routing protocol management can be done through the following two methods: 1) Function tree

The function menu of routing protocol management is shown in following figure:

12-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-1 Function tree of routing protocol management (not including S8016 device)

Figure 12-2 Function tree of routing protocol management (S8016 device)

Double click related nodes on function tree to browse related routing protocol. 2) Device menu

Right click on device panel and the device menu shown as following figure will pop up. So the user can browse related routing protocol.

12-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-3 Device menu (not including S8016 device)

Figure 12-4 Device menu (S8016)

The functions of two methods are same. The function tree is described as an example in this chapter.

12.2 Browsing of RIP Information
RIP is a relatively simple dynamic routing protocol but is widely used in actual applications. RIP is based on Distance-Vector algorithm and it switches routing information through User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet. It sends out update packet once every 30 seconds. If the router has not received routing update packet from the opposite for 180 seconds, all the routing information from this router will be identified as unreachable. If the router has not received update packet yet for 120 seconds after this, the above routing will be deleted from the routing table. If RIP is configured on the device, double click [Route Protocol Management/RIP Browsing] on function tree, the right display area will show the RIP related information, including interface configuration information, interface statistic information, peer router information, etc.

12-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

12.2.1 Interface Config
Click "Interface Config" tab on "RIP Browsing" window, the content in interface configuration table of RIP can be browsed, shown as the following figure:

Figure 12-5 RIP Browsing- Interface Config

The description of various parameters in interface configuration information browsing is shown in following table: Table 12-1 Description of RIP interface configuration information
Content Interface Address Authentication Type Key Description Interface address of specified sub-network Interface authentication type: noAuthentication: none authentication simplePassword: plain text authentication is needed. md5: MD5 authentication is needed Authentication password when the authentication type is simplePassword or md5 RIP sends the following kinds of versions: doNotSend: forbid the interface to send RIP packet outside. ripVersion1: default value. The interface RIP version is RIP-1 and only RIP-1 broadcast packet is sent. rip1Compatible: the interface runs in RIP-2 broadcast mode and only RIP-1 and RIP-2 broadcast packets are sent. ripVersion2: specify the interface to run in RIP-2 multicast mode and only RIP-2 multicast packet is sent. Version of received RIP packet: rip1: default value. The interface RIP version is RIP-1 and only RIP-1 and RIP-2 broadcast packets are received. RIP-2 multicast packet is not received. rip2: specify interface to run in RIP-2 multicast mode and only RIP-2 multicast packet is received. RIP-1 and RIP-2 broadcast packets are not received. rip1OrRip2: the interface runs in RIP-2 broadcast mode and only RIP-1 and RIP-2 broadcast packets are received. RIP-2 multicast packet is not received. doNotRecieve: any RIP packet is not received.

Version of Sent

Version of Received

12-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Default Metric Description

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Default metric is used in route import. If no Metric is specified in route import, the value of default-metric is used by default.

12.2.2 Interface Statistics
Click "Interface Statistics" tab on "RIP Browsing" window, the content in interface statistic table of RIP can be browsed, shown as the following figure:

Figure 12-6 RIP Browsing- Interface Statistics

The description of various parameters in interface statistic information browsing is shown in following table: Table 12-2 Parameter description of RIP statistic information table
Name Interface Address Received Bad Response Packets Discarded Routes Triggered RIP Updates Description Interface address of specified sub-network Received bad response packets on this interface Discarded routes in received valid RIP packets Triggered RIP update packets sent out on this interface, not including the update packets sent at interval

12.2.3 Peer Information
Click "Peer Information" tab on "RIP Browsing" window, the content in peer router information table of RIP can be browsed, shown as the following figure:

12-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-7 RIP browsing-Peer Information

The description of various parameters in peer router information browsing is shown in following table: Table 12-3 Parameter description of RIP peer router interface table
Name Peer Address Domain Last Update RIP Version Received Invalid Response Packets Discarded Routes Description Interface address of peer router (Peer) RIP2 does not Routing Domain, and this domain must be 0x0000h. The system operation time when the update packet from peer router is received last time. Version of RIP packet received last time Received invalid response packets from the peer router Discarded routes for wrong route information format in the received valid packets from peer router

12.3 OSPF Protocol Information
OSPF is an interior GW protocol developed by IETF on the basis of link state. At present, version 2 (RFC2328) is applied. In OSPF protocol, the whole network can be regarded as multiple autonomous systems (AS). The information synchronization from route to AS is dynamically discovered and broadcasted through collecting and transmitting AS link state. Each AS can be divided into different areas. If a port of router is distributed to multiple areas, the router is just called Area Border Router (ABR). It lies in the area border and connects with multiple areas. All ABRs and routers between ABRs constitute backbone area that is identified with 0.0.0.0. Because all areas must keep logical connection with backbone area and

12-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

virtual concept is introduced, the areas divided physically can keep logical connection. The router connecting with AS is called autonomous system boundary router (ASBR). If OSPF protocol is configured on device, double click [Route Procotol

Management/OSPF Browsing] on function tree, the right display area will display OSPF protocol related information, including OSPF Attribute, OSPF Area Information, LSDB Information, OSPF Interface, Peer Information, Virtual Link Information, etc.

12.3.1 Query of OSPF Protocol Attribute
Click "OSPF Attribute" tab on "OSPF Browsing" window, and the OSPF protocol attribute can be browsed, shown as following figure:

Figure 12-8 OSPF Browsing-OSPF Attribute

Various parameters in OSPF protocol attribute information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-4 OSPF protocol attribute
Name Router ID OSPF Status Description Unique ID of router in AS OSPF protocol management status

12-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name OSPF Version Is Area Border Router Is AS Border Router ASE-LSA Count Sum of The ASE-LSA Checksums TOS Support New LSA Originated New LSA Received

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management Description

Version of current OSPF protocol Is this router area border router Is this router AS border router Amount of ASE-LSA in LSDB Sum of ASE-LSA checksums in LSDB Does the router support TOS route Amount of new LSA originated by this router Amount of received new LSA

" Note: LSDB: Link State Database ASE-LSA: AS-external-LSA, type 5 LSA, the routing that is generated by ASBR and reaches to other AS. It will be broadcasted to the whole AS (not including Stub area).

12.3.2 OSPF Protocol Area Information Browsing
Click "OSPF Area Information" tab on "OSPF Browsing" window, the OSPF protocol area information can be browsed. The information includes area information and Stub area information.
!

Area information

Click "Area Information" tab on "OSPF Area Information - Area Information" window, the content of area information can be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-9 OSPF Browsing- Area Information

Various parameters in information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-5 OSPF Browsing-Area Information
Name Area Auth Type Import As Extern LSA Spf Number of ABR Number of ASBR Number of LSA sum of LSA Checksum Description 32-byte integer identifying area uniquely Specify authentication type of area: None(0): none authentication Simple(1): plain text authentication MD5(2): MD5 authentication Does the area support the import of connection status broadcast outside of AS Times that the area link status is used to calculate routing table in area Number of reachable ABR in this area Number of reachable ASBR in this area Number of reachable LSA in link status database of this area Sum of LSA checksum in link status database in this area

!

Stub Area Information

Click "Stub Area Information" on "OSPF Browsing-Stub Area Information" window, and the content of Stub area information will be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-10 OSPF Browsing-Stub Area Information

Various parameters in information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-6 OSPF Browsing-Stub Area Information
Name Area TOS Type Metric Status Description Area number of Stub area Which TOS does the next metric belong to Default metric of imported Stub area Status of this line

12.3.3 OSPF Protocol Connection Status Database Information
Click "LSDB Information" on "OSPF Browsing" window, the information of OSPF protocol connection status database can be browsed, shown as following figure:

12-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-11 OSPF Browsing- LSDB Information

Various parameters in OSPF protocol connection status database information are described in following table: Table 12-7 OSPF Browsing-LSDB Information
Name Area Type LS ID Originating Router Sequence Number Age(s) Checksum Description Number of Area to which LSA belongs LSA type: routerLink, networkLink, summaryLink, asSummaryLink, asExternalLink. LS_ID of LSA ID of router originating LSA LSA serial number Time generating LSA Checksum of LSA

12.3.4 OSPF Protocol Interface Information Browsing
Click "OSPF Interface" tab on "OSPF Browsing" window, the content of OSPF protocol interface information can be browsed. The information includes Interface Information and Interface TOS Metric.
!

Interface Information

Click "Interface Information" tab on "OSPF Browsing-Interface Information" window, the content of interface information can be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-12 OSPF Browsing-Interface Information

Various parameters of interface information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-8 OSPF Browsing-Interface Information
Name Interface Address Area Description IP address of OSPF interface Area where the interface lies Interface network type: broadcast: when link layer protocol is Ethernet,FDDI, OSPF regard the network type as Broadcast by default. nbma: when link layer protocol is ATM, frame-relay, HDLC or X.25, OSPF regards the network type as NBMA (Non Broadcast MultiAccess) by default. pointToPoint: when link layer protocol is PPP, LAPB or POS, OSPF regards the network type as Point-to-Point by default. pointToMultiPoint: no link layer protocol will be regarded as Point-to-Multipoint by default. It is formed through manual modifying NBMA, If NBMA network is not connected completely. Indicate whether the interface is available Priority of router Link status transit delay Link status retransmit interval Sending interval of interface hello packet Dead time interval of interface peer Polling interval of dead peer Interface status: down, loopback, waiting, pointToPoint, designatedRouter, backupDesignatedRouter, otherDesignatedRouter. IP address of specified router IP address of backup specified router Times of interface status change or error occurrence Plain text authentication key of interface

Type

Admin Status Priority Transit Delay Retrans Interval Hello Interval Dead Time Interval Poll Interval Status DR BDR Events Authentication Key

!

Interface TOS Metric
12-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Click "Interface TOS Metric" tab on "OSPF Browsing-OSPF Interface" window, and the related content of interface TOS metric can be displayed, shown as following figure:

Figure 12-13 OSPF Browsing-Interface TOS Metric

Various parameters in interface TOS metric information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-9 OSPF Browsing-Interface TOS Metric
Name Interface Metric TOS Metric Value Description IP address of OSPF interface (interface index when OSPF interface has no IP address) TOS type of OSPF interface Route metric value of OSPF interface

12.3.5 OSPF Protocol Peer Information Browsing
Click "Peer Information" tab on "OSPF Browsing" window, and the content OSPF protocol peer can be browsed, shown as following figure:

12-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-14 OSPF Browsing-Peer Information

Various parameters in peer information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-10 OSPF Browsing-Peer Information
Name Peer Address Router ID Priority Status Events Length of The Retransmission Queue Description IP address of peer (index of interface without IP address) Router ID of peer Priority of peer Status of relationship with peer: down, attempt, init, twoWay, exchangeStart, exchange, loading, full Times of status change of relationship with peer or error occurrence Length of current retransmission queue

12.3.6 OSPF Protocol Virtual Link Information Browsing
Click "Virtual Link Information" tab on "OSPF Browsing" window, the content of OSPF protocol virtual link can be browsed. The information includes Virtual Link Interface and Virtual Link Peer.
!

Virtual Link Interface

Click "Virtual Link Interface" on "OSPF Browsing-Virtual Link Information" window, and the information of virtual link interface can be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-15 OSPF Browsing- Virtual Link Interface

Various parameters in virtual link interface browsing are described in following table: Table 12-11 OSPF Browsing-Virtual Link Interface
Name Transit Area Peer Router ID Transit Delay Retrans Interval Hello Interval Dead Time Interval Status Events Authenticaion Key Description Transit area of virtual link Router ID of virtual link peer Link status transit delay Link status retransmit interval Sending interval of interface hello packet Dead time interval of interface peer Interface status of virtual link Times of interface status change of virtual link or error occurrence Plain text authentication key of virtual link interface

!

Virtual Link Peer

Click "Virtual Link Peer" on "OSPF Browsing-Virtual Link Information" window, and the information of virtual link peer can be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-16 OSPF Browsing-Virtual Link Peer

Various parameters in virtual link peer browsing are described in following table: Table 12-12 OSPF Browsing-Virtual Link Peer
Name Transit Area Peer Router ID Peer Address Status Events Authentication Key Description Transit area number ID of virtual link peer router IP address of virtual link peer Status of virtual link peer: Down, Attempt, Init, TwoWay, ExchangeStart, Exchange, Loading, full Times of status change of relationship with peer or error occurrence Plain text authentication key

12.4 BGP Information
For the convenience of management, the Internet is divided into some autonomous systems (AS). One AS refers to one group of routers running under the management of the same technical management department. These routers run the same routing protocols generally and use the same routing strategies. Each AS has one unique ID represented with integer (1 to 65535). The ID of AS is distributed by InterNIC uniformly. The routing protocols running in the same AS are called interior gateway protocol (IGP). And the protocols running between AS are called exterior gateway protocol (EGP). Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is a kind of EGP. The basic function of BGP is to switch routing information without loop. The information switched by BGP carry abundant attribute that can be used to construct topology of AS and execute routing strategy

12-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

based on AS level. T path reachable information with sequence attribute of AS number can cancel routing loop. BGP is often used between ISP. BGP was started to use from 1989. Its three earliest released versions are RFC1105 (BGP-1), RFC1163 (BGP-2) and RFC1267 (BGP-3) respectively. At present, RFC1771 (BGP-4) is applied. It is applicable to distributed structure and supports Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR). BGP-4 has been the actual Internet EGP standard. If BDP is configured on the device, double click [Route Protocol Management/BGP Browsing] on function tree, and the right display area will display BGP related information.

12.4.1 Query of BGP Attribute
Click "BGP Attribute" tab on "BGP Browsing" window, and the basic attribute of BGP can be browsed, shown as following figure:

Figure 12-17 BGP Browsing-BGP Attribute

Various parameters in information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-13 BGP Browsing-BGP Attribute
Name The BGP Local ID The Local AS Number BGP ID of local system Local AS number Description

12-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

12.4.2 BGP Peer Information Browsing
Click "Peer Information" tab on "BGP Browsing" window, and the BGP peer information can be browsed. The information includes Basic Information, Statistic Information and Time Attribute.
!

Basic Information

Click Basic Information" tab on "BGP Browsing-Peer Information" window, and the Basic Information of BGP peer can be displayed, shown as following figure:

Figure 12-18 BGP Browsing-Peer Information

Various parameters in peer information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-14 BGP Browsing-Peer Information
Name Peer ID Status Negotiated Version Local IP Address Local Port Remote IP Address Remote Port Remote AS Description BGP peer ID Connection status of BGP peer: idle, connect, active, opensent, openconfirm, established. BGP negotiation version run between two peers Local IP address of BGP connection Local port of TCP connection between BGP peers Remote IP address of BGP peer Remote port of TCP connection between BGP peer Remote AS number

!

Statistic Information

Click "Statistic Information" tab on "BGP Browsing-Peer Information" window, and the statistic information of BGP peer can be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-19 BGP Browsing-Peer Statistic Information

Various parameters in peer statistic information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-15 BGP Browsing-Peer Statistic Information
Name Peer IP Address Updates Received Updates Transmitted Total Messages Received Total Messages Transmitted Last Error FSM Established Transitions FSM Established Time(s) Description BGP peer IP address Received BGP update messages in this connection Transmitted BGP update packets in this connection Total messages received from remote peer in this connection Total messages transmitted to remote peer in this connection Last error code and sub-code seen by peer in this connection Times of BGP FSM transiting to “Established” status Duration when the peer is in “Established” status

!

Time Attribute

Click "Time Attribute" tab on "BGP Browsing-Peer Information", and the content of BGP time parameters can be displayed, shown as following figure:

12-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-20 BGP Browsing-Peer Time Attribute

Various parameters in peer time parameter browsing are described in following table: Table 12-16 BGP Browsing-Peer Time Parameter
Name Peer IP Address Connect Retry Interval(S) Hold Time(S) KeepAlive(S) Hold Time Configured(S) KeepAlive Configured(S) Route Advertisement Interval(S) Update Elapsed Time(S) Description BGP peer IP address Interval (s) of establishing connection timer Same as the interval (s) of holding timer established by peer Same as the interval (s) of KeepAlive timer established by peer Holding timer interval (s) configured for BGP addresser and peer KeepAlive timer interval (s) configured for BGP addresser and peer Interval of transmitting routing information Interval from the last time of receiving update packet to now

12.4.3 BGP4 Path Information Browsing
Click "BGP4 Path Information" tab on "BGP Browsing" window, and the content of BGP4 path information can be browsed, shown as following figure:

12-20

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-21 BGP Browsing-BGP4 Path Information

Various parameters in BGP4 path information browsing are described in following table: Table 12-17 BGP4 Path Information
Name Peer IP Address IP Address Prefix Len IP Address Prefix Origin AS Path Segment Next Hop Multi Exit Metric Priority Atomic Aggregate Route Aggregator AS Aggregator IP Address Local Priority Calculated IsBest Unknown Attributes Description Peer IP address IP address prefix length of NLRI domain IP address prefix of NLRI domain Path information origin: igp, egp, incomplete AS path segment sequence Next hop address of destination network The value is used to distinguish multiple exits of adjacent AS Priority of origin BGP4 addresser advertisement route Does local system selects non-specific route or the specific route: LessSpecificRouteNotSelected: non-specific route lessSpecificRouteSelected: specific route AS number of BGP4 addresser executing route aggregation IP address of BGP4 addresser executing route aggregation Priority calculated by BGP4 addresser receiving route for advertisement route Is the local route selected as best route? One or more attributes unknown for BGP4 addresser. If it is 0, it indicates that there is no this attribute.

12.5 Routing Protocol Enable Configuration
This function is used to enable or disable some protocols. Double click on the [Route Protocol Management/Route Protocol Enable Configuration] node on the function tree to open the "Route Protocol Enable Configuration" interface, as shown in Figure 12-22:

12-21

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Figure 12-22 Route Protocol Enable Configuration

Click the "enable" or "disable" radio buttons corresponding to various protocols and click <Config> to finish the configuration. If you enable the BGP, you must further specify the local AS number in the range of 1 to 65535.

" Notes: If you fail to enable the routing protocol, the Telnet parameters of the device may have not been configured properly.

12.6 Routing Table Browsing
S8016 device provides browsing for device routing table including Static Routing and Dynamic Routing. The key function of device forwarding packet is to route through routing table. The routing table demonstrates which physical port of the router is used to send the packet to a sub-network or a host. And then, the packet can be sent to next router of this path, or be sent to the directly connected destination host in network not passing through other routers. The user can both manually configure static routing to a specific destination and configure dynamic routing protocol to interact with other routers in network and to find routing through routing calculation.

12-22

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

The routing table includes the following key items: destination address, network mask, output interface, next hop IP address, priority of local routing joining in IP route table. Double click [Route Protocol Management/Route Table Browsing] on S8016 function tree and the right information display area will display the content of device routing table, including static routing table and dynamic routing table.

12.6.1 Static Routing Information
The static routing table reflects the information not converted when static routing is configured, i.e., only when the egress is configured, can the valid interface index be seen in device MIB. If the next hop is configured, the egress index cannot be seen in MIB yet even this route takes effect, which is different from dynamic routing. Click "Static Routing" tab on "Route Table Browsing" window, and the content of static routing can be browsed, shown in following figure:

Figure 12-23 Routing Table Browsing-Static Routing

The static routing includes the following contents: Table 12-18 Static Routing table
Content Serial Destination IP Destination Mask Next Hop Interface Description Description Index number of this route Destination address or destination network identifying IP packet Identifying, together with destination address, the address of network segment where the destination host or router is located. Perform “AND” operation to destination address and network mask to obtain the address of network segment where the destination host or router is located. For example, the address of network segment where the host or router whose destination address is 129.102.8.10 and mask is 255.255.0.0 is 129.102.0.0. Next router that IP packet passes through Which interface of this router is the IP packet forwarded from?

12-23

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Priority Description

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Tag

Priority of this static routing. The priority of each static routing can be different, ranging from 0 to 255. And the default priority of static routing is 60. There are following route tags: reject: destination unreachable route. When the static routing to a destination has "reject" attribute, any IP packet to this destination will be discarded and the source host is notified that the destination is unreachable. blackhole: route whose destination is blackhole. When the static routing to a destination has "blackhole" attribute, any IP packet to this destination will be discarded and the source host is not notified. noflag: reachable route. The normal routes are such routes, i.e., IP packet is sent to the next hop according to the route identified by destination, which is the common use of static routing.

12.6.2 Dynamic Routing Information
The dynamic routing table reflects the routes that are valid and can be forwarded. The information, such as next hop and egress, are the converted information, which is different from the static routing table. Click "Dynamic Routing" tab on "Route Table Browsing" window, and the content of dynamic routing can be browsed, shown in following figure:

Figure 12-24 Routing Table Browsing-Dynamic Routing

The dynamic routing includes the following contents:

12-24

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 12 Routing Protocol Management

Table 12-19 Dynamic Routing Table
Content Serial Destination IP Destination Mask Next Hop Interface Description Highest Priority Protocol Metric Description Index number of this route Destination address or destination network identifying IP packet Identifying, together with destination address, the address of network segment where the destination host or router is located. Perform “AND” operation to destination address and network mask to obtain the address of network segment where the destination host or router is located. For example, the address of network segment where the host or router whose destination address is 129.102.8.10 and mask is 255.255.0.0 is 129.102.0.0. Next router that IP packet passes through Which interface of this router is the IP packet forwarded from? The highest priority indicates that, actually, a dynamic route may be a result after the routes learned by multiple different protocols are integrated. These protocols have different priority and the highest one of them is the highest priority. Indicate which protocol generates this route: RIP, ISIS, IGRP, OSPF, BGP and DIRECT (direct route),--other cases (static route or other routes learned by other routing protocol) Metric generated by various protocols. Different protocols have different meanings. For example, the metric is just the hops for RIP and the metric is the cost sum of all paths for OSPF protocol. Protocol related data filled by various protocols. For example, the route tag field is the User ID when configuring command for configured static route and the route tag field is 0 for the command input from COM command line. The route tag field is 99 for the command restored from configuration file.

Tag

There may be some routes for different next hop. These different routes may be discovered by different route protocols or may be static route configured manually. The route with highest priority (the value is small) will be the best route currently. The user can configure many routes to the same destination but with different priority and the system selects a unique route to forward IP packet according to priority sequence.

12-25

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management
With the fast development of the Internet, data traffic on it doubles every 100 days and the number of online users soars. The theoretic space for IP addresses is 4.2 billion, considering wasting and spending however, the number of Internet users tends to break through this limit. The IPv6 is one of the ideal solutions to the address resource problem but, for some reasons, there is still a long way to go before it becomes developed and is put into real application. Currently, the NAT (Network Address Translation) technology is the unique applicable solution that can ease the network address resource problem. NAT implements conversion between private and public network addresses. Private addresses are used on a private network, and a NAT device is used at the network egress to implement address conversion. Similar to a proxy server, only the NAT device needs a private address, which drives down the need for public addresses to a great extent. According to the Internet Assigned Number Authority, the following network address segments are reserved for private addresses: 10.0.0.0 172.16.0.0 192.168.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 - 172.31.255.255 - 192.168.255.255

This is to say, these address segments will not be assigned on the Internet, but can be used on Intranets or MANs. Based on the estimate to the number of hosts in the predictable future, you can select a proper private network segment for an Intranet or a MAN. Different Intranets or MANs can share the same private address segment. If an enterprise selects a public network segment as its internal network address segment, routing table confusion may occur on the Internet. Address conversion falls into two types, basic address conversion and network address-port conversion. In the former case, certain number of public addresses (may be less than the number of internal hosts) are allocated to a private network. The internal network adopts private addresses, and a NAT device is engaged in dynamically mapping an internal address to a valid public IP address when a host needs to communicate externally. The number of hosts that have external access depends on the number of public IP addresses. The later case implements mapping from the mix of a private address and port to the mix of a public address and port. As a TCP/UDP port is 16bit long and occupies 64K coding space, the number of simultaneous ports used on a computer is usually small and hence the combination of a public address and port

13-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

can be mapped to several combinations of private address and port. This expands the number of addresses. NAT management function applies to S8016. S8016 routing switch supports network address-port conversion and mixed networking of public and private addresses (that is, you can configure either private addresses or public addresses on the private network). NAT processing provides conversion from any address to any address, that is, supports conversion from private addresses to public addresses, public addresses to public addresses and public addresses to private addresses.

" Note: Not any application can pass through a NAT device smoothly. For example, the FTP negotiates data channel IP address and port through the control channel, and attaches the IP address and port to packets for transmission over the channel. Therefore, it is necessary to track the packets through the control channel and convert the attached IP address and port. This function is implemented by the application layer gateway (ALG).

13.1 NAT Board Attribute and Monitor
13.1.1 Querying NAT Board Attribute
In the function window, double click [NAT/NAT Board Attribute And Monitor] node on the function tree to open the "NAT Board Attribute And Monitor" interface, as shown in Figure 13-1:

Figure 13-1 NAT Board Attribute And Monitor

13-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Here you can query the attributes of all the NAT boards on the device. These attributes include status (usable/unusable), blacklist function (stopped/started), packet fragment function (enable/disable) and available ports. This interface provides attribute configuration, flow monitor and dynamic information clearance operations for NAT boards.

13.1.2 Configuring NAT Board Attribute
In the "NAT Board Attribute And Monitor" window, select a line and click <Config…> to open the "NAT Board Attribute" dialog box, as shown in Figure 13-2:

Figure 13-2 NAT Board Attribute

Here you can modify the attributes of a NAT board, such as enabling/disabling the blacklist and packet fragment functions on the board. After modification, click <OK> to finish the attribute configuration. Blacklist: To prevent a NAT board from been affected by such attacks as DOS attack, the board supports to control the maximum number of user connections and the maximum speed at which links are established. You can enable/disable the blacklist function and control over connection speed and total connections on each NAT board. When the blacklist function is enabled, a user will be blacklisted and its connection be disabled or the packet sending speed of the newly established links be limited if the total connections or connection speed exceed the preset thresholds. When the threshold-crossing recovers, the user will be cleared from the blacklist for reestablishing connections. If you enable the blacklist function on a NAT board without selecting any blacklist attribute, the device will not conduct any control but send an alarm when a user is appropriate to be blacklisted.

13-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

" Note: The initiator of DOS (Denial Of Service) attack aims to deny legal users from accessing certain resource, for instance, by sending a large amount of packets to use up network bandwidth resource.

13.1.3 NAT Board Flow Monitor
In the "NAT Board Attribute And Monitor" window, select a line and click <Flow Monitor…> to open the "NAT Board Flow Monitor" window. The monitor items are listed in Table 13-1: Table 13-1 Traffic monitor items for NAT boards
Group name Packets Monitor item Packets Received Packets Discarded Connects NAT Connection Sum Tcp Connections Udp Connections Ftp ALG Connections Icmp ALG Connections NAT Insert Fails NAT Delete Fails ACL Insert Fails ACL Delete Fails Speed Port Number NAT Connect Speed Every Second Port Used Description Number of packets received on the NAT board in a polling interval Number of packets discarded on the NAT board in a polling interval Total connections involved in the NAT board Common TCP connections involved in the NAT board Common UDP connections involved in the NAT board Common FTP ALG connections involved in the NAT board ICMP ALG connections involved in the NAT board Number of failed NAT table inserting operations on the NAT board in a polling interval Number of failed NAT table deletion operations on the NAT board in a polling interval Number of failed ACL table inserting operations on the NAT board in a polling interval Number of failed ACL table deletion operations on the NAT board in a polling interval Speed (per second) at which NAT connections are established on the NAT board Number of ports in use on the NAT board

Operation Fails

13.1.4 Clearing Dynamic Entries on a NAT Board
In the "NAT Board Attribute And Monitor" window, select a line (with the status as USABLE) and click <Clear Dynamic Information> to clear the dynamically generated NAT entries on the selected NAT board.

13.2 Address Group and ACL Management
To use NAT on a board, you need to configure a public address group (a collection of public addresses for NAT processing) on the board and a NAT ACL (Access Control List) including the IP addresses for NAT processing.

13-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

After defining NAT address group and ACL, you can correlate them by configuring the bind between them. This correlation specifies to perform NAT processing on "the IP packets matching certain ACL" using "the addresses in the specified public address group". This correlation serves as the basis for address conversion. For example, when sending a packet externally from a private network, the system checks the packet against the NAT ACL. If match, the system will find the corresponding address group according to the correlation and then convert the source address to a certain one in the address group.

13.2.1 Querying NAT Address Group Information
In the function window, double click on [NAT/Address Group and ACL Management] node on the function tree to open the "Address Group and ACL Management" window. Click the "Address Group" tab, and the interface as shown in Figure 13-3 appears:

Figure 13-3 NAT Address Group Management

Here you can view the information of all the NAT address groups on the device, including the NAT Board Number, Address Group Name, Active NAT Board Number, Start IP and End IP of each address group.

13.2.2 Creating a NAT Address Group
In above interface, click <Add…> to open the "NAT Address Group Creation" window, as shown in Figure 13-4:

13-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Figure 13-4 NAT Address Group Creation

Here select a NAT board, type the group name, start IP and end IP, and click <OK> to create an address group.

13.2.3 Deleting a NAT Address Group
In the NAT address group management interface, select one or more NAT address groups from the address group list and click <Delete> to delete them.

13.2.4 Querying NAT ACL Information
In the function window, double click on [NAT/Address Group and ACL Management] node on the function tree to open the "Address Group and ACL Management" window. Click the "NAT ACL" tab, and the interface as shown in Figure 13-5 appears:

13-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Figure 13-5 NAT ACL Management

Here you can view the information of all the NAT ACLs on the device, including ACL number, source IP and wildcard of source IP.

13.2.5 Creating a NAT ACL
In the NAT ACL management interface, click <Add…> to open the "NAT ACL Creation" window, as shown in Figure 13-6:

Figure 13-6 NAT ACL Creation

13-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Here select an ACL number, type the source IP and wildcard, and click <OK> to create a NAT ACL.

Caution: Source IP address and wildcard are the reverses of the mask. For example, the mask is 255.255.255.0 and hence the wildcard should be 0.0.0.255.

13.2.6 Deleting a NAT ACL
In the NAT ACL management interface, select one or more ACLs from the ACL list and click <Delete> to delete them.

13.2.7 Querying NAT Bind Information
NAT bind refers to the correlation between NAT ACL and address group. In the function window, double click on [NAT/Address Group and ACL Management] node on the function tree to open the "Address Group and ACL Management" window. Click the "NAT Bind" tab, and the interface as shown in Figure 13-7 appears:

Figure 13-7 NAT bind management

13-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Here you can view the information of all the NAT binds on the device, including the interface description, NAT ACL and NAT address group of each bind.

13.2.8 Creating a NAT Bind
In the NAT bind management interface, click <Add…> to open the "NAT Bind Creation" window, as shown in Figure 13-8:

Figure 13-8 NAT Bind Creation

Here select a port description (since NAT bind is configured on a VLAN interface or a POS interface), an ACL number and an address group (bracketed are the start address and the number of addresses included in the address group), and click <OK> to create a NAT bind.

13.2.9 Deleting a NAT Bind
In the NAT bind management interface, select one or more binds from the bind list, and click <Delete> to delete them.

13.3 Server Management
Internal server is the one residing on a private network and providing access for both public and private network users. Since public network users can only access the public address of an internal server (hereinafter referred to as server), S8016 publicizes the public address of the server and maps it to a private address so as to provide access for both public and private network users. A NAT board can support 256 servers.

13-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

13.3.1 Querying NAT Server Information
Select [NAT/Server Management] to open the "Server Management" window, as shown in Figure 13-9:

Figure 13-9 NAT Server Management

The information shown in the interface is described in Table 13-2: Table 13-2 Parameters for NAT Server Management
Name Port Protocol Global IP Global Port Description Interface of the server Type of IP packets used to access the server, including tcp and udp. Public IP address used by the server Destination port used by public network users to access the server. It ranges from 1 to 65535. For some special services (currently including FTP, Telnet, www, DNS and TFTP) provided by the server, you can directly enter the keywords of their English descriptions. Private IP address of the server Port on which the server provides services. It ranges from 1 to 65535. For some special services (currently including FTP, Telnet, www, DNS and TFTP) provided by the server, you can directly enter the keywords of their English descriptions. NAT board number of the server NAT board in use

Inside IP Inside Port NAT Board Using NAT Board

This interface provides service adding and deletion operations.

13-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

13.3.2 Creating a NAT Server
In the "NAT Server Management" window, click <Add…> to open the "Add NAT Server" dialog box, as shown in Figure 13-10:

Figure 13-10 Add NAT Server

The meaning of various parameters in the interface is described in Table 13-2. Set the parameters properly and click <OK> to finish the configuration. Error information will be prompted under the following conditions:
!

The mix of public address and port of the new server is identical with that of an existent one. The public address of the new server is same as that of an existent one, but their NAT board numbers are different. The mix of private address and port of the new server is identical with that of an existent one. The private address of the new server is same (the port is different) as that of a server configured on the same interface, but their NAT board numbers are different.

!

!

!

There may be two reasons that cause failure information to be returned: The public address is included in a NAT address group with the NAT board number different from that of the server, or a NAT ACL including a single private address exists, which is exactly the one you have input.

13-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

13.3.3 Deleting a NAT Server
In the "NAT Server Management" window, select one or more lines and click <Delete> to delete the corresponding servers.

13.4 Aging Time Management
The aging time here refers to that of the connection entries of various protocols. In the function window, double click on [NAT/Aging Time Management] node on the function tree to open the "Aging Time Management" interface, as shown in Figure 13-11:

Figure 13-11 Aging Time Management

Here you can browse and configure the aging time of the connection entries of the TCP, UDP, ICMP and FTP. By default, the valid time for the TCP, UDP, ICMP and FTP are 300 seconds, 120 seconds, 60 seconds and 3600 seconds respectively.

13.5 NAT Enable Attribute Management
When both public and private addresses are used for networking, you must configure the NAT enable attribute on the interface connecting to the public network addresses. Configuring the NAT enable attribute on an interface will enable NAT processing on the interface for the outgoing packets. If a packet through the interface matches the conversion condition, it will be allowed to access the public network after NAT processing. If you configure the NAT enable attribute on an interface, you can further specify not to process the packets heading for some public network addresses. An interface not configured with this attribute will not perform NAT processing on the passing packets. This attribute is available only for the interfaces that can be configured with an IP address, such as VLAN and POS interfaces.

13-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

13.5.1 Querying the NAT Enable Attribute of an Interface
In the function window, double click on [NAT/NAT Enable Attribute Management] node on the function tree to open the "NAT Enable Attribute Management" interface, as shown in Figure 13-12:

Figure 13-12 NAT Enable Attribute Management

Here you can browse the NAT enable status of various interfaces on the device. Click on an interface with the status as enable in the left list, you can also view the destination segments configured on the interface with the NAT function disabled.

13.5.2 Changing the NAT Enable Status of an Interface
In the "NAT Enable Attribute Management" window, select an interface from the left list and click <Change Status> to change the NAT enable status of the interface.

13.5.3 Creating a NAT-enabled Destination Segment
In the "NAT Enable Attribute Management" window, select an interface with the status as enable from the left list and click <Add Segment…> to open the "Denied Segment Creation" window, as shown in Figure 13-13:

13-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Figure 13-13 Creating a denied segment

Here type an IP address and a mask and click <OK> to create a destination segment with the NAT function disabled.

13.5.4 Deleting a NAT-enabled Destination Segment
In the "NAT Enable Attribute Management" window, select an interface with the status as enable from the left list and select a segment from the right list, and then click <Delete Segment> to delete the segment.

13.6 Blacklist Management
The upper and lower thresholds of total connections and link establishing speed define the ranges of the related attributes of a user. If you enable the control function for total connections, a user will be blacklisted once its total number of connections exceeds the upper threshold. The user will then be prohibited from creating any connection until the number of connections reduces to under the lower threshold and hence the user is removed from the blacklist. If you enable the control function for link establishing speed, a user will be blacklisted when the speed crosses the related upper threshold. The user will then be restricted in its establishing of new connections until its connection establishing speed returns to under the related lower threshold and hence the user is removed from the blacklist. The blacklist management function is used to management blacklist information and connection limitation parameters. For the enabling/disabling of the blacklist function on a NAT board, refer to section 13.1.

13-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

13.6.1 Querying Blacklist Information
In the function window, double click on [NAT/Blacklist Management] node on the function tree to open the "Blacklist Management" window. Click the "Blacklist Information" tab and the interface as shown in Figure 13-14 appears:

Figure 13-14 NAT Blacklist Information

Here you can view the blacklist information on the device, including the IP address, NAT board, total number of connections, connection establishing speed and reason for being blacklisted (such as "Too large connection number", "Too fast connection-establishing speed" and "Unknown") of each blacklist user.

13.6.2 Deleting Blacklist Information
In the NAT blacklist information interface, select one or more lines and click <Delete> to delete the related blacklist information.

Caution: Some versions of the S8016 device do not support blacklist information deletion and hence the <Delete> button defaults in the related NAT blacklist information interfaces.

13-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

13.6.3 Querying and Configuring Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters
In the function window, double click on [NAT/Blacklist Management] node on the function tree to open the "Blacklist Management" window. Click the "Connection Limitation" tab and the interface as shown in Figure 13-15 appears:

Figure 13-15 NAT blacklist - Connection limitation

Here you can view and configure the status of the limitation function for total connections, upper threshold and lower threshold. If the limitation function is disabled, the device will not conduct any control but send an alarm when the total number of connections of a user exceeds the preset threshold. In this interface, you can also browse and configure the status of the limitation function for link establishing speed, upper threshold and lower threshold. If the limitation function is disabled, the device will not conduct any control but send an alarm when the speed of a user exceeds the preset threshold. Theoretically, the link establishing speed set in the NMS limits the number of connections established per second, but in practice this parameter is something different from the actual link establishing speed of a user and the two values are not in linear relation. The reason is that this value is related to the number of packets sent consecutively by a user. Figure 13-16 shows the specific relation between the speed

13-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

set in the NMS (represented by Y-axis) and the actual speed (represented by X-axis). Various fold-lines show the cases of different number of packets sent consecutively.

Figure 13-16 Relation between the speed set in the NMS and the actual speed

13.6.4 Querying Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs
In the function window, double click on [NAT/Blacklist Management] node on the function tree to open the "Blacklist Management" window. Click the "Connection Limitation on Special IPs" tab and the interface as shown in Figure 13-17 appears:

13-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Figure 13-17 NAT blacklist - Connection limitation on special IPs

Here you can view the all the connection limitations configured for special IPs, including the corresponding IP address, upper threshold of total connection number, lower threshold of total connection number, upper threshold of connection-establishing speed and lower threshold of connection-establishing speed of each limitation.

Caution: After you configure the upper and lower thresholds of total connection number for a special IP, the general thresholds set in the "Connection Limitation" page become ineffective for the address.

13.6.5 Creating Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs
In the connection limitation interface for special IPs, click <Add…> to open the "Special IP’s Parameters Creation" window, as shown in Figure 13-18:

13-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 13 S8016 NAT Management

Figure 13-18 NAT blacklist - Creating parameters for a special IP

Here type the IP address, upper threshold of total connection number, lower threshold of total connection number, upper threshold of connection-establishing speed and lower threshold of connection-establishing speed, and click <OK> to create the connection limitation for a special IP.

13.6.6 Deleting Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs
In the connection limitation interface for special IPs, select one or more lines and click <Delete> to delete the related connection limitations.

13.6.7 Configuring Blacklist Connection Limitation Parameters on Special IPs
This operation is similar to the creation operation, see section 13.6.5 for more detail.

13-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration
14.1 Overview
The router supports two types of Ethernet interfaces: Fast Ethernet interface (FE) and Gigabit Ethernet interface (GE). FE and GE supports the following frame formats:
! ! !

Ethernet_II(ARPA) Ethernet_SNAP Ethernet_SAP

Ethernet_II and Ethernet_SNAP are used to support IP protocol. FE and GE can identify the received frame format, but they can only send one format of frame at one time. Ethernet interface configuration includes: interface parameter configuration, interface information query, real-time flow statistics, real-time collision statistics, and real-time error statistics. In addition, NE80 and NE40 also provide the sub-interface configuration management function. Ethernet interface can be configured via the following methods: Function tree The function menu of the Ethernet interface configuration is shown in the following figure:

14-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Figure 14-1 Ethernet Interface function tree (NE80 and NE40)

Figure 14-2 Ethernet interface function tree (S8016)

14-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Double-click relevant nodes in the function tree, and configure the related parameters on the Ethernet interface. 2) Device menu

Select a certain Ethernet interface on the device panel, and right-click the mouse. The device menu shown in the following figure pops up. Select and configure the related parameters on the menu.

Figure 14-3 Device menu(NE80 and NE40)

Figure 14-4 Device menu (S8016)

The two kinds of operation methods have the same function. The chapter is described with the example of the function tree.

14-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

14.2 Ethernet Interface Configuration
Double-click [ETH Interface Management/Interface Parameter Configuration] on the function tree. The information display area in the right side shows the main port of Ethernet interface parameter configuration, including: Interface Status Configuration, Interface Parameter Configuration, and Reset Counter. With "Interface Configuration" function, you may select different Ethernet interfaces from the device panel to browse their parameter information.

14.2.1 Ethernet Port Status Configuration
Click "Interface Status Configuration" attribute tab on the interface parameter configuration window, and configure the Administration Status of the selected interface, while Operation Status is not configurable. See the following figure.

Figure 14-5 Interface status configuration

The user select "up" or "down" administration status from the pull-down list. Click <Config>. The user configures the management status of the Ethernet interface according to the setting of the user device. If it is configured successfully, the interface status configuration window is refreshed and the interface status has changed. Refreshing the panel can see the change of the interface color.

14-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

If the configuration fails or SNMP operation expires, the system prompts the user of the failed configuration or expired SNMP operation.

14.2.2 Interface Parameter Configuration
Click "Interface Parameter Configuration" attribute tab on the main interface of Ethernet interface parameter configuration, and configure the parameter for the selected interface. See the following figure:

Figure 14-6 Interface parameter configuration

The parameter description of the configured interface parameter is shown in the following table: Table 14-1 Interface parameter configuration description
Contents Interface Description Frame Type Negotiation Mode Interface Operating Mode Interface Transmission Speed Loopback Mode Max Transport Unit Description Interface name, not configurable Three kinds of link layer frame formats: Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, Ethernet_SNAP Two kinds of negotiation modes: Self-Negotiation, No Self-Negotiation Two kinds of interface operation modes: full duplex, half duplex Three kinds of interface transmission rate: 10M, 100M, 1000M Three kinds of loopback modes: none, interior, exterior Ranges from 328 to 1500 bytes (The maximum value of the GE interface of NE80 and NE40 routers is 8000 bytes and that for S8016 is 1548.)

14-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Frame format: Three kinds of frame formats are available for Ethernet: Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SNAP, and Ethernet_SAP. Both Ethernet interface and subinterface can receive the frame of any format at the same time, but they can only send one kind of frame format at one time. Negotiation mode: For FE electrical interface, if the two parties are connected in auto negotiation mode, they will determine the operating speed and mode by negotiation. If one party is not in auto negotiation mode, the negotiated result can not be guaranteed. By default, FE electrical interface is in auto negotiation mode, while FE optical interface and GE interface are not in auto negotiation modes, because the operating speed and mode of the optical interface are fixedly configured. Interface Operating Mode: Full duplex and half duplex are available for FE electrical interface, while GE and GE optical interface can only operate in full duplex mode and cannot be configured. Interface Transmission Speed: FE electrical interface supports 10Mbit/s and 100Mbit/s, while FE optical interface only supports 100Mbit/s and GE optical interface only supports 1000Mbit/s and cannot be configured. By default, the speed of Ethernet FE electrical interface is 10Mbit/s. If the auto negotiation state is enabled, it will determine the operating speed with the peer interface by negotiation (10Mbit/s or 100Mbit/s). Upon configuration, the peer device must be configured to the same speed. Loopback mode: In Ethernet interface configuration mode, the loopback test can be configured. Loopback is mainly applied in some special cases. Normally, the loopback shall be disabled. By default, loopback of any form shall be disabled. When the loopback function is configured, the interface must be configured to full duplex mode. Maximum Transmission Unit: The maximum transmission unit MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) affects the fragment and restructure of IP packet. By default, it is 1500. The following must be configured upon configuration:
!

When the interface is the electrical interface, "Interface Transmission Speed" can only be configured as 10M and 100M. When "Interface Operating Mode" is "Half Duplex", "Loopback Mode" can only be "None". Maximum transmission unit can only be 328 to 1500 bytes; otherwise, it prompts error upon configuration. If the interface is the optical interface, "Interface Operating Mode" and "Interface Transmission Speed" cannot be compiled. If the interface is the electrical interface and the negotiation mode is configured as "Self-Negotiation", "Interface Operating Mode" and "Interface Transmission Speed" are not compiled.

!

!

!

!

14-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Click <Config>. The system configures the various parameters of Ethernet interface according to the user setting. If it is configured successfully, the interface status configuration window is refreshed. The interface parameter has changed. If the configuration fails or SNMP operation expires, the system prompts the user of the failed configuration or expired SNMP operation.

14.2.3 Reset Counter
Click "Reset Counter" in the main port of Ethernet interface parameter configuration, and reset the selected Ethernet interface counter. See the following figure:

Figure 14-7 Reset Counter

The user can select whether to reset the interface counter in the pull-down list. When the status of the reset counter is "YES", click <Config>. Click <Ok> in the pop-up window, and the system resets the counter of the interface. If it is operated successfully, the system prompts the user that resetting counter succeeded. If the operation fails or SNMP operation expires, the system prompts the user that resetting counter failed.

14-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

14.3 Ethernet Interface Information Query
In the function window, double click [ETH Interface Management /Interface Information Query] on the function tree, you will see the main interface of Ethernet interface information query on the right, in which you can find Browse Basic Information, Browse Received Information, Browse Sent Information, Browse Invalid VLAN ID and Browse E4GC Information. Select "Interface Information Query" and then you can select an Ethernet interface to view.

14.3.1 Browse Basic Information
In the Interface Information Query interface, select the "Browse Basic Information" tab to view the basic information about the Ethernet interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-8 Browse Basic Information

The following table describes the available common interface information:

14-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Table 14-2 Browse basic information description
Contents Interface Description AlignmentErrors FCSErrors SingleCollisionFrames MultipleCollisionFrames DeferredTransmissions LateCollisions InternalMacTransmitErrors FrameTooLongs InternalMacReceiveErrors DuplexStatus Description Name of the interface Number of the processed frames with intact octet and checksum error Number of the processed frames with tact octet but checksum error Number of the processed frames successfully transmitted by the single collision interface. Number of the processed frames successfully transmitted by the multiple collision interface. Number of the deferred frames due to lack of free medium Number of the processed late frames Number of transmission errors on the MAC sub-layer Number of the processed too-long frames Number of receiving errors on the MAC sub-layer Operation modes include: 1.Unknown, 2.Half Duplex, 3.Full Duplex

14.3.2 Browse Received Information
In the Interface Information Query interface, select the "Browse Received Information View" tab to view the information about data receiving via a specified Ethernet interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-9 Browse Received Information

The following table describes the Browse Received Information View:

14-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Table 14-3 Browse received information view description
Contents Interface Description Received Short Frames Received Frames (64Bytes) Received Frames (65~127Bytes) Received Frames (128~255Bytes) Received Frames (256~511Bytes) Received Frames (512~1023Bytes) Received Frames (1024~1518Bytes) Received Frames (1519~9018Bytes) Received Too-Long Frames of Correct Check Received Too-Long Frames of Check Errors Received Non-Too-Long Frames (Check Errors) Successfully Received Broadcast Frames Successfully Received Multicast Frames Received Total Frames(Check Error/Correctness) Received Frames of Physical Layer Errors Frames Failed in Receiving due to Full Queue Received Deferred Frames Total Receive-Delay Description Name of the interface Number of short frames (less than 64 bytes) received via the interface Number of 64-byte frames received via the interface Number of 65~127-byte frames received via the interface Number of 128~255-byte frames received via the interface Number of 256~511-byte frames received via the interface Number of 512~1023-byte frames received via the interface Number of 1024~1518-byte frames received via the interface Number of 1519~9018-byte frames received via the interface Number of long frames with correct checksum received via the interface Number of long frames with checksum error received via the interface Number of common frames with checksum error received via the interface Number of broadcast frames successfully received via the interface Number of multicast frames successfully received via the interface All frames (with correct/wrong checksum) received via the interface Number of frames with physical layer error received via the interface Number of failed frames due to lack of queue space on the interface Number of pausing frames received via the interface Total pause time on the interface

14.3.3 Browse Sent Information
In the Interface Information Query interface select "Browse Sent Information" tab to view the information about data transmission from the specified Ethernet interface, shown as the following figure:

14-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Figure 14-10 Browse Sent Information

The following table describes the Browse Sent Information: Table 14-4 Browse sent information description
Contents Interface Description Sent Short Frames(Correct Check) Sent Short Frames(Check Errors) Sent Frames (64Bytes) Sent Frames (65~127Bytes) Sent Frames (128~255Bytes) Sent Frames (256~511Bytes) Sent Frames (512~1023Bytes) Sent Frames (1024~1518Bytes) Sent Frames (1519~9018Bytes) Sent Too-Long Frames of Correct Check Sent Too-Long Frames of Check Errors Total Sent Conflicted Frames Abnormally Sent Frames Aborted by PMM Out-Interface All Check Error Frames Successfully Sent Broadcast Frames Successfully Sent Multicast Frames Description Name of the interface Number of short frames (of less than 64 bytes) sent from the interface Number of short frames with checksum error sent from the interface Number of 64-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 65~127-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 128~255-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 256~511-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 512~1023-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 1024~1518-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 1519~9018-byte frames sent from the interface Number of long frames with correct checksum sent from the interface Number of long frames with checksum error sent from the interface Number of collision frames sent from the interface Number of abnormal frames aborted by PMM egress Number of frames with checksum error sent from the interface Number of frames successfully broadcast from the interface Number of frames successfully multicast from the interface

14-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

14.3.4 Browse Invalid VLAN ID

" Note: S8016 does not provide the "Invalid VLAN ID View" tab.

In the Interface Information Query interface select "Browse Invalid VLAN ID" tab to view the information with invalid VLAN ID received/sent by/from a specified Ethernet interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-11 Browse Invalid VLAN ID

The following table describes the Browse Invalid VLAN ID: Table 14-5 Browse invalid VLAN ID description
Contents Interface Description Sent Invalid Frames Received Invalid Frames Sent Invalid Octets Received Invalid Octets Description Name of the interface Number of frames with invalid VLAN ID sent by the master port Number of frames with invalid VLAN ID received via the master port Number of octets with invalid VLAN ID sent by the master port Number of octets with invalid VLAN ID received via the master port

14-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

14.3.5 Browse E4GC Information
In the Interface Information Query interface select "Browse E4GC Information" tab to view the information about E4GC optical module, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-12 Browse E4GC Information

The following table describes Browse E4GC Information: Table 14-6 Browse E4GC information description
Contents Interface Description Status Vendor Name Compliance Part Number Length9u (Km/n) Length50u (Km/n) Length62u (Km/n) WaveLength Description Name of the interface Online or Offline Vendor name of the optical module Attributes of the optical module Model of the optical module The maximum transmission distance supported by the 9u optical fiber (Km/n) The maximum transmission distance supported by the 50u optical fiber (Km/n) The maximum transmission distance supported by the 62u optical fiber (Km/n) Wavelength

Caution: If you select a interface other than E4GC, the information window prompts “The selected port doesn’t support this function."; if the E4GC port is not online, it prompts "E4GC module isn't online".

14-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

14.4 Real-time Statistics of Ethernet Interface
14.4.1 Real-Time Flow Statistics
Double click [ETH Interface Management/Real-Time Flow Statistics] node on the function tree in the function window. The system will read and show the real-time flow information about the selected interface in the information display box with a diagram or table. This real-time statistics interface has similar layouts as those previously introduced in this manual. For the functional operations, refer to the proceeding text. Here we just focus on the objects to be monitored in this interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-13 Real-time flow statistics monitor items

The following table describes the traffic statistics items: Table 14-7 Real-time flow statistics monitor items
Contents Sent Frame(64Bytes) Sent Frame(65~127Bytes) Sent Frame (128~255Bytes) Sent Frame (256~511Bytes) Sent Frame (512~1023Bytes) Sent Frame (1024~1518Bytes) Received Frame (64Bytes) Received Frame (65~127Bytes) Received Frame (128~255Bytes) Description Number of 64-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 65~127-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 128~255-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 256~511-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 512~1023-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 1024~1518-byte frames sent from the interface Number of 64-byte frames received via the interface Number of 65~127-byte frames received via the interface Number of 128~255-byte received via the interface 1

14-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Contents Received Frame (256~511Bytes) Received Frame (512~1023Bytes) Received Frame (1024~1518Bytes)

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration Description

Number of 256~511-byte received via the interface Number of 512~1023-byte frames received via the interface Number of 1024~1518-byte frames received via the interface 1024~1518

In the "Real-Time Flow Statistics" interface, you can select and view an Ethernet interface.

14.4.2 Real-Time Collision Statistics
Double click [ETH Interface Management/Real-Time Collision Statistics] node on the function tree in the function window. The system will read and show the real-time collision information about the selected interface in the information display box with a diagram or table. This real-time statistics interface has similar layouts as those previously introduced in this manual. For the functional operations, refer to the proceeding text. Here we just focus on the objects to be monitored in this interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-14 Real-time collision statistics monitor items

The following table describes the real-time collision statistics items: Table 14-8 Real-time collision statistics monitor items
Contents Single Collision Frames (frames/s) Multiple Collision Frames (frames/s) Excessive Collisions (frames/s) Sent Total Collisions (frames/s) Description Number of single collision frames successfully sent per second Number of multiple collision frames successfully sent per second Number of cancelled frames per second due to excessive collisions Total collision frames sent per second

14-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

In the "Real-time Collision Statistics" interface, you can select and view an Ethernet interface.

14.4.3 Real-Time Error Statistics
Double click [ETH Interface Management/Real-Time Error Statistics] node on the function tree in the function window. The system will read and show the real-time error information about the selected port in the information display box with a diagram or table. This real-time statistics interface has similar layouts as those previously introduced in this manual. For the functional operations, refer to the proceeding text. Here we just focus on the objects to be monitored in this interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-15 Real-time error statistics monitor items

The following table describes the real-time error statistics items: Table 14-9 Real-time error statistics monitor items
Contents AlignmentErrors (frames/s) FCSErrors (frames/s) Deferred Transmissions (frames/s) Description Number of received frames with intact octet and FCS error per second Number of received frames with tact octet and FCS error per second Number of deferred frames to be transmitted due to lack of medium

In the "Real-Time Error Statistics" interface, you can select and view an Ethernet interface.

14.5 Subinterface Management
A physical port is logically divided into several subinterfaces, which share the physical configuration parameters of the interface yet have respective link layer and network layer configuration parameters.

14-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

The Ethernet interface of NE80 core router supports the subinterface concept. A physical interface allows you to configure multiple subinterfaces, which makes the networking much more flexible. Both the FE and GE port LPUs provide subinterfaces. An FE/GE interface supports up to 4095 subinterfaces, numbered as 1 to 4095. Note that a subinterface can be configured with the parameters such as IP address only if it has been encapsulated with VLAN. Besides, a sub port will always stay administratively down and turn up only after the interface is physically up.

14.5.1 Subinterface Management
In the NE80 core router function window, double click the [ETH Interface Management/Subinterface Management/Subinterfacet Management] node on the function tree, and the Ethernet subinterface management interface will display and list all the subinterfaces of the interface, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-16 Subinterface Management

You can perform the following operations of sub port in the above interface: Add, Delete, Config, and Refresh. They will be introduced respectively in the following sections. In the "Subinterface Management" interface, you can select and view an Ethernet interface.

14-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

I. Adding a subinterface
Click <Add> on the Subinterface Management interface and the Add Subinterface will pop up, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-17 Add SubInterface

You need input the subinterface ID, which ranges from 1 to 4095. Click <OK> and add a subinterface. If successful, the system will refresh the Subinterface Management interface and you will see the new subinterface on the list. The VLAN ID of the new subinterface is 0 and the encapsulation format is dot1q(1). You can use the "Config" function to set the VLAN ID of the subinterface. For details, refer to the contents in the later part of this chapter. If the system fails to add a subinterface or SNMP operation timeouts, the system will prompt accordingly.

II. Configuring subinterface
Select an entry from the Subinterface Management and click <Config>. Set the "Encapsulation Type" and "VLAN ID" in the Config Sub Interface window, shown as the following figure:

14-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Figure 14-18 Config SubInterface

The following table describes the subinterface configuration parameters. Table 14-10 Configuring subinterface parameters
Contents Sub Interface ID Encapsulation Type VLAN ID Description Composed by and fixed as "Ethernet interface name""+"."+ "Subinterface ID input by a user". dot1q, while NE80 only supports 802.1Q encapsulation only. The VLAN ID with the value range of 0~4094. 0 means to cancel the VLAN ID.

A subinterface can be configured with a VLAN ID. The VLAN of NE80 core router does not support L2 switching, but support L3 switching.

" Note: In an NE80 core router, a VLAN domain is identified with physical interfaces and VLAN ID together. The subinterfaces of a physical interface should have different VLAN IDs. The subinterfaces of different interfaces may have the same VLAN ID, yet they belong to different VLAN domains.

A subinterface can be configured with such parameters as IP address and MTU only after it have been configured with VLAN encapsulation.

III. Deleting a subinterface
In the Subinterface Management interface, select one or more subinterfaces to be deleted, click <Delete> and click <Ok> in the confirmation window. The system will delete the selected interface(s). If successfully, the system will refresh the Subinterface

14-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Management and you can find the selected interface(s) has/have been removed from the list. If the system fails to delete the interface(s) or SNMP operation timeouts, the system will prompt accordingly.

14.5.2 Subinterface MultiCast Query
In the function window, double click the [ETH Interface Management/Subinterface Management/Subinterface MultiCast Query] node, you will see the multicast information about the Ethernet subinterfaces, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-19 Subinterface MultiCast Query

The following table describes the Subinterface MultiCast Query. Table 14-11 Subinterface multicast query parameters
Contents Subinterface Description Sent Multicast Packets Received Multicast Packets Sent Multicast Bytes Received Multicast Bytes Description Subinterface ID, composed by "Ethernet interface name"+"."+"Subinterface ID input by a user". Number of multicast packets sent from a subinterface. Number of multicast packets received by a subinterface Number of multicast bytes sent from a subinterface. Number of multicast bytes received by a subinterface.

In the "Subinterface MultiCast Query" interface, you can select and view the specified Ethernet interface.

14-20

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 14 Ethernet Interface Configuration

14.5.3 Subinterface Flow Query
In the function window, double click the [ETH Interface Management/Subinterface Management/Subinterface Flow Query] node and you will find the flow information about the Ethernet subinterfaces, shown as the following figure:

Figure 14-20 Subinterface Flow Query

The following table describers the Subinterface Flow Query. Table 14-12 Subinterface flow query parameters
Contents Subinterface Description Input Octets Input Unicast Frames Input Non-Unicast Frames Discarded input Frames Output Octets Output Unicast Frames Output Non-Unicast Frames Discarded Output Frames Description Subinterface ID, composed by "Ethernet interface name"+"."+"Subinterface ID input by a user". Number of octets received by a subinterface. Number of unicast frames received by a subinterface. Number of non-unicast frames received by a subinterface. Number of the discarded frames received by a subinterface Number of octets sent from a subinterface. Number of unicast frames sent from a subinterface. Number of non-unicast frames sent from a subinterface. Number of the discarded frames sent from a subinterface

In the "Subinterface Flow Query" window, you can select and view the specified Ethernet interface.

14-21

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management
15.1 Overview
Interface trunking (Link Aggregation or Port Trunking) is a technology capable of bundling multiple physical interfaces as one independent logic link, using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The Ethernet trunk employs the interface trunking technology to bundle multiple Ethernet physical interfaces as one Eth-Trunk interface to provide greater bandwidths. The NE80/NE40 series router subinterfaces the Eth-Trunk feature, bundling up to 16 Ethernet physical interfaces. Same as an ordinary Ethernet interface, the bundling-formed Eth-trunk interface subinterfaces various services, most of which can be directly configured on this bundling-formed Eth-trunk interface. The Ethernet trunk can be configured with the following two methods: Function tree The function menus for the Ethernet trunk configuration are shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-1 Ethernet Trunk Function Tree

Double click the relevant node on the function tree to configure the Ethernet trunk. Device menu

15-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Right click the device panel to pop up the device menu, as shown in the following figure, where you can configure relevant parameters of the Ethernet trunk.

Figure 15-2 Device menu

The two operation methods have the same functions. This chapter takes the function tree operations as an example. Double click the function node [ETH Trunk Management/ETH Trunk Management] on the function tree in the function window, and the Eth Trunk Management window will display in the information display area at the right, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-3 Eth Trunk Management window

Operations of Add, Delete, Config, View, Monitor and Refresh, etc. can be performed for the Eth Trunk in this window, and they are respectively described as follows.

15-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

15.2 Adding an Eth Trunk
Click <Add> in the Eth Trunk Management window and the system will pop up the Add Trunk window, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-4 Add Trunk window

The user is required to input the ID of the Trunk to be added in the Add Trunk window, and the Trunk ID is an integer within 0 ~ 15. Click <OK> and the system will add an Eth Trunk interface. If the interface is added successfully, the system will refresh the main Eth Trunk Management interface, where the user can find the added Eth Trunk. The parameters of the Eth Trunk employ the default values, as shown in the following table: Table 15-1 Default Eth Trunk parameters
Content Trunk Description Trunk ID Trunk Name MTU Encapsulation Type Reset Counter Administration Status Operation Status Description Description of the Trunk, consisting of "Eth-Trunk" and "Trunk ID" input by the user. This parameter can not be modified. ID of the corresponding Eth Trunk interface, input by the user. Name of the corresponding Eth Trunk, automatically generated by the system, consisting of "HUAWEI, Quidway Series, Eth-Trunk", "Trunk ID" and " Interface". This parameter can be modified.. MTU value of the corresponding Eth Trunk, "1500" by default. This parameter can be modified. Link encapsulation type of the corresponding Eth Trunk, "Ethernet_II" by default. This parameter can be modified. The flag indicating whether to clear the statistical data, "YES" by default. This parameter can be modified. Administration status, "up" by default. This parameter can be modified. Operation status, "down" by default. This parameter can not be modified.

The user can set the Trunk Name, MTU, Encapsulation Type, Reset Counter and Administration Status, etc. of the Eth Trunk via the "Config" function. For details, see the following relevant contents of this chapter.
15-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

If the Add operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

15.3 Deleting an Eth Trunk
Select one or multiple lines of the contents to be deleted on the main Eth Trunk Management interface, then click <Delete> on this interface, and the system will pop up a deletion confirmation window. Click <OK> in this window, and the system will delete the selected contents. If the contents are deleted successfully, the system will refresh and display the main Eth Trunk Management interface, where the user can find that the Eth Trunk has been deleted as expected. If the Delete operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

15.4 Eth Trunk Configuration
Select a line on the main Eth Trunk Management interface, then click <Config> to configure relevant attributes of the Eth Trunk in the Eth Trunk configuration window, including Status Configuration, Parameter Configuration, Counter Configuration and Port Configuration, as described below.

15.4.1 Eth Trunk Status Configuration
Click the attribute tab "Status Configuration" in the Eth Trunk configuration interface to configure the administration status of this interface, as shown in the following figure:

15-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-5 Eth Trunk Status Configuration window

The description of the Eth Trunk Status Configuration window is shown in the following table: Table 15-2 Eth Trunk status configuration
Content Trunk ID Trunk Name Trunk Description Administration Status Operation Status Description ID of the corresponding Eth Trunk interface, which can not be configured. Name of the corresponding Eth Trunk, which can not be configured. Trunk description information, which can not be configured. Administration status, including "up" and "down". Operation status, which can not be configured.

Click <Config> and the system will configure the administration status of the Eth Trunk as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, the system will refresh and display the result after configuration. If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

15-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

15.4.2 Eth Trunk Parameter Configuration
Click the attribute tab "Parameter Configuration" in the Eth Trunk configuration interface to configure the Trunk Name, MTU and Encapsulation Type of this interface, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-6 Eth Trunk Parameter Configuration window

The description of the Eth Trunk Parameter Configuration window is shown in the following table: Table 15-3 Eth Trunk Parameter Configuration
Content Trunk ID Trunk Name Trunk Description MTU Encapsulation Type Description ID of the corresponding Eth Trunk interface, which can not be configured. Name of the corresponding Eth Trunk, with the value range of 1~ 47 characters. Trunk description information, which cannot be configured.. MTU value of the corresponding Eth Trunk, with the value range of 328~1500. Link encapsulation type of the corresponding Eth Trunk. Three types are available: Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and ethernet_SNAP.

Click <Config> and the system will configure the parameters of the Eth Trunk as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, the system will refresh and display the result after the configuration.

15-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

15.4.3 Eth Trunk Counter Reset
Click the attribute tab "Counter Reset" in the Eth Trunk configuration interface to configure whether to reset the statistics counter of this interface, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-7 Eth Trunk Counter Reset window

Select "yes", and the system will clear the statistical data flag. Otherwise, it will not clear this flag. Click <Config>, and the system will configure the reset status of the operation statistic counter as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, the system will refresh and display the result after the configuration. If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

15.4.4 Port Configuration
Click the attribute tab "Port Configuration" in the Eth Trunk configuration interface to configure the ports included in this Eth Trunk, as shown in the following figure:

15-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-8 Eth Trunk Port Configuration window

This interface includes two lists: "Available Ports" and "This Trunk's Ports". "Available Ports" lists all the fast Ethernet interfaces (FE) and gigabit Ethernet interfaces (GE) included in this device, but it does not include the sub-interfaces. "This Trunk's Ports" lists the Ethernet interfaces included in the currently selected Eth Trunk. Select one or more interfaces in "Available Ports", then click ">>" in the figure, and the selected interface(s) will be added to "This Trunk's Ports". Similarly, select one or more interfaces in "This Trunk's Ports", then click "<<" in the figure, and the selected interface(s) will be deleted from "This Trunk's Ports ". To configure the Eth Trunk member interface, the following conditions must be available:
! !

The administration status of the interface is "UP". The physical port added to the Trunk must be in the full duplex mode, and no other configurations can be made before it is added (For FE, the interface can only be configured as "negotiation auto" and "no shutdown". For GE, the interface can only be configured as "no negotiation auto" and "no shutdown".)

!

There should be not any sub-interface.

15-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System
!

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

One Eth Trunk interface can be configured with up to 16 member interfaces, which must be of the same type. That is, all of them must be FE or GE, with the same bandwidth, and moreover, FE and GE can not be bound together.

Click <Config> and the system will configure the member interfaces of this Eth Trunk as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, the system will refresh and display the result after the configuration. If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

15.5 Eth Trunk Information Query
Select a line in the main Eth Trunk Management interface, and click <View> to query relevant information of the Eth Trunk, including "Trunk Information" and "Trunk Port Information", as described below.

15.5.1 Trunk Information
Click the attribute tab "Trunk Information" in the Eth Trunk View interface to display relevant parameters of the Trunk interface, as shown in the following figure:

15-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-9 Eth Trunk Information query window

The description of query information is shown in the table below: Table 15-4 Default Eth Trunk parameters
Content Trunk ID Trunk Name Trunk Description Administration Status Operation Status MTU Encapsulation Type Reset Counter Description ID of the corresponding Eth Trunk interface. Name of the corresponding Eth Trunk Description information of this Trunk Administration status of this Trunk Operation status of this Eth Trunk MTU value of the corresponding Eth Trunk. Link encapsulation type of the corresponding Eth Trunk. The flag indicating whether to clear the statistical data.

15.5.2 Trunk Port Information
Click the attribute tab "Trunk Port Information" in the Eth Trunk View interface to display relevant parameters of the Trunk member interfaces, as shown in the following figure:

15-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-10 Eth Trunk Port Information query window

The description of query information is shown in the table below: Table 15-5 Eth Trunk Port Information query
Content Trunk ID Port Description Lacp Success Description ID of the corresponding Eth Trunk interface Description information of the Eth Trunk member interface Whether the Trunk member starts the LACP protocol successfully

15.6 Eth Trunk Statistic Information Query
Select a line in the main Eth Trunk Management interface, and then click <Monitor> to view the flow statistic information of the selected Eth Trunk, as shown in the following figure:

15-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-11 Eth Trunk real-time statistics interface

See the previous chapters for operations of different functions in this real-time statistics interface. This chapter will focus on the data items that can be monitored in this real-time statistics interface. The data items that can be monitored in the Eth Trunk real-time statistics interface fall into four groups. The user can select Receive Monitor, Send Monitor, Error Monitor or LACP Monitor for the selected Eth Trunk. The detailed description can be found in the following table: Table 15-6 Eth Trunk statistic information query
Statistics category Statistics item Received Short Frames (less than 64 bytes) Received Frames (64 bytes) Received Frames (65 ~ 127 bytes) Received Frames (128 ~ 255 bytes) Received Frames (256 ~ 511 bytes) Received Frames (512 ~ 1023 bytes) Received Frames (1024 ~ 1518 bytes) Received Frames (1519 ~ 9018 bytes, or 1519 ~ 9022 bytes when VLAN is supported). Long Frames Received Broadcast Frames Multicast Frames Total Number of Frames (including check errors, multicast, broadcast and ultra long frames)

Receive Monitor

15-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Statistics category Statistics item

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Send Monitor

Error Monitor

Sent Short Frames (less than 64 bytes) Sent Run Frames Sent Frames (64 bytes) Sent Frames (65~127 bytes) Sent Frames (128~255 bytes) Sent Frames (256~511 bytes) Sent Frames (512~1023 bytes) Sent Frames (1024~1518 bytes) Sent Frames (1519~9018 bytes, or 1519~9022 bytes when vlan is supported) Sent Long Frames Received Broadcast Frames Multicast Frames RevJabber RevNumberofFrameswithBadCRC RevReceiveErrors RevOverrun RevNumberofPause SentJabber SentTotalCollisions SentAbort SentCRCError

15.7 Eth Trunk Subinterface Management
Similar to an Ethernet interface, VLAN configuration is not available right after the creation of a Trunk interface until a Trunk subinterface is created. An Ethernet Trunk supports up to 255 subinterfaces with the sequence number ranging from 1 to 255.

15.7.1 Eth Trunk Subinterface Management
In the function window of an NE80 core router, double click on [ETH Trunk Management/Trunk Subinterface Management/Trunk Subinterface Management] node on the function tree to open the "Trunk Subinterface Management" interface. Select a Trunk interface from the left Trunk interface list, and all the subinterfaces of the interface are displayed in the right list, as shown in the following figure:

15-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-12 ETH Trunk Subinterface Management

Here you can add, delete, configure, refresh and browse Trunk subinterfaces. The specific operation procedures are as follows:

I. Adding a Trunk subinterface
In the Trunk subinterface management interface, click <Add…>to open the "Add Subinterface" interface, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-13 Adding a Trunk subinterface

Type the subinterface ID in the range of 1 to 255.

15-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Click <OK> to add a Trunk subinterface. If succeed, the system will refresh the Trunk subinterface management interface where you can browse the new Trunk subinterface with the VLAN ID as 0 and encapsulation format as dot1q(1). Here can set the VLAN ID of the subinterface with the "Config" function (see the subsequent sections for more detail). If adding subinterface fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

II. Configuring a Trunk subinterface
In the Trunk subinterface management interface, select a line and click <Config…> to open the "Config Subinterface" interface. Here configure the "Encapsulation Type" and "VLAN ID" of the subinterface, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 15-14 Configuring a Trunk subinterface

Various parameters in the interface are described in the following table: Table 15-7 Subinterface configuration parameters
Content Subinterface ID Encapsulation Type VLAN ID Description Name of the Ethernet Trunk interface plus the subinterface ID specified by the user. This parameter is not configurable. Currently NE80 only supports dot1q (802.1Q) encapsulation. The value range varies according to different Ethernet interfaces, where 0 refers to canceling VLAN ID.

A Trunk subinterface can only be configured with a single VLAN ID ranging from 1 to 4094. A Trunk supports up to 255 subinterfaces connecting to 255 VLANs. The VLANs of an NE80 core router support not L2 switching but L3 switching.

15-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

" Note: On an NE80 core router, a VLAN domain is jointly identified by a physical port and a VLAN ID. On a physical port, the VLAN IDs of various subinterfaces should be different, while the subinterfaces of different physical ports may have the same VLAN ID through they belong to different VLAN domains.

You must configure VLAN encapsulation for a Trunk subinterface, and then the IP address, MTU and other parameters.

III. Deleting a Trunk subinterface
In the Trunk subinterface management interface, select one or more Trunk subinterfaces to be deleted and click <Delete>. In the popup confirmation dialog box, click <OK> to delete the selected subinterfaces. If the deletion succeeds, the system will refresh the Trunk subinterface management interface to remove the deleted Trunk subinterfaces. If the deletion fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

15.7.2 Trunk Subinterface MultiCast Query
In the function window, double click on [ETH Trunk Management/Trunk Subinterface Management/Trunk Subinterface MultiCast Query] node on the function tree to open the "Trunk Subinterface MultiCast Query" interface. Select a Trunk interface from the left Trunk list and the multicast information of all the subinterfaces will be displayed in the right Trunk subinterface list, as shown in the following figure:

15-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-15 Trunk subinterface multicast query

The multicast parameters of a Trunk subinterface are described in the following table: Table 15-8 Multicast parameters of a Trunk subinterface
Content Subinterface Description Sent Multicast Packets Received Multicast Packets Sent Multicast Bytes Received Multicast Bytes Description ID of the subinterface, that is, the Ethernet Trunk interface name plus the subinterface ID entered by the user Number of multicast packets sent by the subinterface Number of multicast packets receive by the subinterface Number of multicast octets sent by the subinterface Number of multicast octets received by the subinterface

In above interface, you can select a Trunk interface from the left Trunk interface list to access the Ethernet Trunk interface you want to manage.

15.7.3 Trunk Subinterface Flow Query
In the function window, double click on [ETH Trunk Management/Trunk Subinterface Management/Trunk Subinterface Flow Query] node on the function tree to open the "Trunk Subinterface Flow Query" interface. Select a Trunk interface from the left Trunk interface list and the flow information of all the subinterfaces is displayed in the right Trunk subinterface list, as shown in the following figure:

15-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 15 Ethernet Trunk Management

Figure 15-16 Trunk Subinterface Flow Query

The flow parameters of a Trunk subinterface are described in the following table: Table 15-9 Flow parameters of a subinterface
Content Subinterface Description Input Octets Input Unicast Frames Input Non-Unicast Frames Discarded Input Frames Output Octets Output Unicast Frames Output Non-Unicast Frames Discarded Output Frames Description ID of the subinterface, that is, the Ethernet Trunk interface name plus the subinterface ID entered by the user Number of input octets of the subinterface Number of input unicast frames of the subinterface Number of input non-unicast frames of the subinterface Number of discarded input frames of the subinterface Number of output octets of the subinterface Number of output unicast frames of the subinterface Number of output non-unicast frames of the subinterface Number of discarded output frames of the subinterface

In above interface, you can select a Trunk interface from the left Trunk interface list to access the Ethernet Trunk interface you want to manage.

15-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management
16.1 Brief Introduction to the IP Trunk
IP Trunk technology is to bundle multiple POS physical ports and provide the total bandwidths of the bound POS interfaces for one IP Trunk interface. For one IP Trunk interface, up to 16 POS interfaces can be bound, and 16 IP Trunk interfaces are supported in the whole device. If the POS interface is added to the IP Trunk, neither the interface administration status nor the link encapsulation protocol can be configured, instead, they are configured via the IP Trunk. If it is necessary to assign the bandwidths more flexibly in some special networking, employ the IP Trunk technology to bundle multiple POS physical ports and provide the total bandwidths of the bound ports for one Trunk interface. The NE80/NE40 series router supports the IP Trunk feature, bundling multiple POS physical ports as one IP Trunk interface to provide greater bandwidth. One device supports 16 IP Trunk interfaces. The IP Trunk can be configured with the following two methods: Function tree The function menus for the IP Trunk configuration are shown in the following figure:

Figure 16-1 IP Trunk Function Tree

Double click the relevant node on the function tree to configure the IP Trunk. 2) Device menu
16-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

Right click the device panel to pop up the device menu shown in the following figure, where you can configure relevant parameters of the IP Trunk.

Figure 16-2 IP Trunk device menu

The two operation methods have the same functions. This chapter takes the function tree operations as an example. Double click the function node [IP Trunk Management/IP Trunk Management] on the function tree in the function window, and the IP Trunk Management window will display in the information display area at the right, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 16-3 IP Trunk Management window

Operations of Add, Delete, Config, View and Refresh, etc. can be performed in this window for the IP Trunk, as described below.

16-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

16.2 Adding an IP Trunk
Click <Add> in the IP Trunk Management window and the system will pop up the Add IP Trunk window, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 16-4 Add IP Trunk window

The user is required to input the ID of the Trunk to be added in the Add IP Trunk window. The value range of the Trunk ID is an integer within 0~15. Click <OK> and the system will add an IP Trunk interface. If it is added successfully, the system will refresh the main IP Trunk Management interface, and the user can find the added IP Trunk, whose parameters use the default values, as shown in the following table: Table 16-1 Default IP Trunk parameters
Content IP Trunk ID IP Trunk Description Administration Status Operation Status MTU Encapsulation Type Description ID of the corresponding IP Trunk interface, input by the user. IP Trunk description, consisting of "Ip-Trunk" and "IP Trunk ID" input by the user, read-only. Administration status, "up" by default, readable and writable. Operation status, "down" by default, read-only. MTU value of the corresponding IP Trunk, "1500" by default, read-only. Link encapsulation type of the corresponding IP Trunk, "PPP" by default, readable and writable.

The user can set the Encapsulation Type, Administration Status, and Member Ports, etc. of the IP Trunk via the "Config" function. For details, see the following contents of this chapter. If the adding operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

16-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

16.3 Deleting an IP Trunk Interface
Select one or more IP Trunks to be deleted in the interface, and click <Delete> in the main IP Trunk Management interface to pop up a deletion confirmation window, then click <OK>, and the system will delete the selected content. If the deletion operation is successful, the system will refresh and display the main IP Trunk Management interface, where the user can find that the IP Trunk interface has been deleted as expected. If the deletion operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

16.4 Configuring the IP Trunk
Select a line in the main IP Trunk Management interface, and click <Config> to configure relevant attributes of the IP Trunk in the IP Trunk configuration window, including status configuration, link encapsulation protocol configuration and member interface configuration, as described below.

16.4.1 IP Trunk Status Configuration
Click the attribute tab "Trunk Status Configuration" in the Eth Trunk configuration window to configure the administration status of this interface, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 16-5 IP Trunk Status Configuration

16-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

The description of the IP Trunk Status Configuration tab is shown in the following table: Table 16-2 IPTrunk Status Configuration
Content Trunk ID Trunk Description Administration Status Operation Status Description ID of the corresponding IP Trunk interface, read-only. Trunk description, read-only. Administration status, including "up" and "down", which can be configured by the user. Operation status, including "up" and "down", read-only.

The user can select an IP Trunk in this interface and configure the administration status as "up" or "down". Click <Config> and the system will configure the administration status of the IP Trunk as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, the system will refresh and display the result after the configuration. If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

16.4.2 IP Trunk Parameter Configuration
Click the attribute tab "Parameter Configuration" in the Eth Trunk configuration interface to configure the Encapsulation Type of this interface, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 16-6 IP Trunk Parameter Configuration

16-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

The link encapsulation protocol of IP Trunk supports PPP and HDLC, "PPP" by default. When the user clicks <Config> after configuring the link encapsulation protocol, the system will configure the link encapsulation protocol as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, the system will refresh and display the result after the configuration. If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

16.4.3 Add/Delete IP Trunk Member Port
Click the attribute tab "Trunk Member Configuration" in the Eth Trunk configuration interface to configure the POS interfaces included in this IP Trunk, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 16-7 IP Trunk Member Configuration

Up to 16 POS interfaces can be bound for the IP Trunk, and one POS interface can be added to one IP Trunk at most.

16-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

Before the POS interface is added to IP Trunk, neither the interface administration status nor the link encapsulation status can be configured. Instead, they are configured via the IP Trunk. See the contents of the previous chapters. If the user selects an IP Trunk to be configured in the IP Trunk interface, the member interfaces of this IP Trunk will be listed in the list box "Ports to be configured" of the interface shown above, and the POS interfaces available on the device (the non-channelized POS interfaces, not including those added to the APS group) will be listed in the list box "Available Ports". Select one or more POS interfaces in the list box "Available Ports", then click ">>" to add the selected interface(s) to the list box "Ports to be configured". Select one or more POS interfaces in the list box "Ports to be configured", then click "<<" to delete the selected interface(s) from the list box "Ports to be configured" and move it to the list box "Available Ports". Click <Config> and the system will configure the member interface of this IP Trunk as set by the user. If the configuration is successful, it can be found on this interface that the member interfaces of this IP Trunk has been set as required by the user. If the configuration operation fails or the SNMP operation times out, the system will prompt the user accordingly.

16.5 IP Trunk View
Select a line in the main interface of IP Trunk Management, then click <View> to query relevant information of the IP Trunk, including "Member Port Information" and "Flow Information", as described below.

16.5.1 IP Trunk Member Port Information
Click the attribute tab "Member Port Information" in the IP Trunk View interface to query the member ports of the IP Trunk as well as the running status of the member interface, as shown in the following figure:

16-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

Figure 16-8 IP Trunk Member Port query

The query information is shown in the following table: Table 16-3 IP Trunk member interface query
Content IP Trunk ID Member Port Description Running Status Description ID of the corresponding IP Trunk interface. Name of the corresponding member interface. Status of the corresponding member interface, including "up" and "down".

16.5.2 IP Trunk Flow Statistics Query
Click the attribute tab "Flow Information" in the IP Trunk View interface, where the user can query the flow statistics information of the IP Trunk, as shown in the following figure:

16-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 16 IP Trunk Management

Figure 16-9 IP Trunk Flow Information query

The statistics information that can be queried includes: number of the received bytes, number of the received unicast packets, number of the multicast packets, number of the received broadcast packets, number of the received error packets, number of the received packets discarded, number of the sent bytes, number of the sent unicast packets, number of the sent multicast packets, number of the sent broadcast packets, number of the sent error packets and number of the sent packets discarded, etc. Click <Refresh> and the system will refresh the flow statistics information of this interface.

16-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management
17.1 Overview
The TDM technology of SDH was once deemed mainly for optimization of the voice transmission. However, SDH and optical fiber have become the important technology for construction of the IP-based large-scale and high-speed networks. This is because in the Internet and large enterprise data networks, the POS interface can effectively transmit data via SDH and provide great bandwidths for data transmission, thus playing an important role in the rapidly increasing Internet. The NE80 product intends to provide the ISPs or the value-added networks with a cost-effective POS solution. The POS interface is very common in GSR, with flexible solutions for different transmission applications. The known applications include the network backbone application and the data aggregation and distribution application for the network edge. The POS interface of the router is usually connected to ADM, point-to-point SDH link, or directly connected via the optical fiber and DWDM. With the SDH network as the physical transmission network of the IP data network, IP over SDH encapsulates the IP data packets via link adaptation and framing protocol, then maps the encapsulated IP data packets to the synchronous payload encapsulation SPE of SDH in the byte synchronization mode. The PPP protocol that is being extensively used encapsulates the IP data packets, and employs the HDLC frame format, i.e. IP/PPP/HDLC/SDH. The PPP protocol provides such functions as multi-protocol encapsulation, error control and link initialization control, while the HDLC frame format delimitates the encapsulated IP data frame of PPP on the synchronous transmission link. This chapter mainly describes the management functions of the POS interface such as interface configuration, path configuration, link configuration and query of relevant parameters. The following two methods are available for POS interface management: 1) Function tree

The function menus of POS interface management are shown in the following figure:

17-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Figure 17-1 POS Interface Management Function Tree

Select a POS interface in the panel and double click the relevant node on the function tree to configure relevant functions of the POS interface. 2) Device menu

Select a POS interface in the panel, and right click to pop up the interface-level menu as shown in Figure 17-2, then select the lower-level menu in <POS Interface Management> to configure relevant functions of the POS interface.

Figure 17-2 Device menu of the POS interface

The two operation methods have the same functions. This chapter takes the function tree operations as an example.

Caution: Only after a POS interface is selected in the panel, can operations related with POS interface management be performed.

17-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

17.2 POS Interface Configuration
Select a POS interface in the device panel and double click the function node [POS Interface Management/Interface Configuration] on the function tree, and the system will pop up the Interface Configuration window shown in Figure 17-3:

Figure 17-3 POS Interface Management (Status) window

There are two attribute tabs in the figure: "Status Configuration" and "Parameter Configuration". When switching to the attribute tab "Parameter Configuration", the configuration window is shown in Figure 17-4:

17-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Figure 17-4 POS Interface Management (Parameter) window

The meanings of interface configuration parameters are shown in Table 17-1 Table 17-2: Table 17-1 Description of the Interface Status Configuration parameters
Name Interface Description Administration Status Operation Status Description Description of the selected interface, read-only. Administration status of the interface, including the values of "up" and "down", readable and writable. Operation status of the interface, including the values of "up" and "down", read-only.

Table 17-2 Description of the Interface Parameter Configuration parameters
Name Interface Description Medium Type Transfer Model J0 loopback Clock Source Description Description of the selected interface, read-only. For setting the medium type, including the optional values of "Sonet" and "SDH", readable and writable. For setting the interconnected device type, including the optional values of "Sonet" and "SDH", readable and writable. For the receiving end to set continuity with the transmitting end. The value range is the number within 0~255 when the transmission mode is "Sonet", and it is a string of 1~15 characters when the transmission mode is "SDH"; read-only. For the loopback test, including the optional values of "NoLoop", "FacilityLoop" and "TerminalLoop", readable and writable. For configuration of the synchronous timing parameters, including the optional values of "Inside" (internal clock) and "Line" (line recovery clock), readable and writable.

17-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Modify relevant parameters and click <Config> to complete the interface configuration operation.

17.3 Path Configuration
Select a POS interface in the device panel and double click the function node [POS Interface Management/Path Configuration] on the function tree, and the system will pop up the Path Configuration window shown in Figure 17-5:

Figure 17-5 POS Path Configuration (Path Parameter) window

There are two attribute tabs in the figure: "Path Parameter Configuration" and "Link Configuration". When switching to the attribute tab "Link Configuration", the configuration window is shown in Figure 17-6:

17-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Figure 17-6 POS Path Configuration (Link Configuration) window

The meanings of path configuration parameters are shown in Table 17-3 Table 17-4: Table 17-3 Description of the POS path configuration parameters
Name Interface Description Scramble C2 J1 Description Description of the selected interface; read-only. Setting whether to scramble, including the optional values of "Scramble" (enable scrambling) and "UnScramble" (disable scrambling). Setting the multiplex structure of the VC frame and the nature of the information payload, with the value range of 0~255. Setting continuity of the transmitting/receiving end of the path layer, with the value range being a string of 1~15 characters.

17-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

" Note: If the “Scramble” of the POS interface is configured as "enable", the “C2” should be configured as 22 (0x16). Otherwise (if the “Scramble” is configured as "disable"), the “C2” should be configured as 207 (0xCF).

Table 17-4 Description of the POS link configuration parameters
Name Interface Description Description

Description of the selected interface. Setting the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer, including the optional values of Encapsulation "ppp" and "hdlc". KeepAlive Timeout Setting the timeout interval of the KeepAlive message, with the value range of 0~32767s. Setting the PPP authentication protocol, including the optional values of "pap", "chap", PPP Authentication "chappap", and "noauthentication". The parameter is effective only when the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer is set as "PPP". Setting the timeout interval of the PPP protocol negotiation, with the value range of PPP Negotiate Timeout 1~10s. This parameter is effective only when the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer is set as "PPP". Setting the host name of the Chap authentication protocol, with the value range being a Chap Host string of 1~32 characters. This parameter is effective only when the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer is set as "PPP". Set the user name of the Pap authentication protocol, with the value range being a string Pap Username of 1~32 characters. This parameter is effective only when the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer is set as "ppp". Setting the password display mode of the Pap authentication protocol: "noEncrypt" or Pap PasswdEncrypt "Encrypt". This parameter is effective only when the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer is set as "PPP". Setting the password of the Pap authentication protocol, with the value range being a Pap Password string of 1~16 characters. This parameter is effective only when the encapsulation protocol type of the link layer is set as "PPP".

The following corresponding relationships are available for the parameters in the PPP protocol parameter configuration: When the PPP authentication protocol is "pap", the timeout interval of the ppp protocol negotiation, the user name, the password display mode and the password of the pap authentication protocol are effective. 2) When the PPP authentication protocol is "chap", the timeout interval of the ppp protocol negotiation and the host name of the chap authentication protocol are effective. 3) When the PPP authentication protocol is "chappap", all parameters will be effective, and they are verified in sequence from chap to pap. Modify the relevant parameters and click <Config> to complete the path configuration operation.

17-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

17.4 SDH Interface Query
I. Current Status
Select a POS interface in the device panel and double click the function node [POS Interface Management/SDH Interface Query/Current Status] on the function tree, and the system will pop up the query window shown in Figure 17-7:

Figure 17-7 SDH Interface Current Status (Physical Medium Layer) query window

There are four attribute tabs in the figure: "Physical Medium Layer", "Section Layer", "Line Layer", and "Farend Line Layer". The other attribute tabs are similar to the above figure. For the specific parameter description, see the following tables: Table 17-5 Description of the SDH Interface Current Status (Physical Medium Layer) query parameters
Name Interface Description Medium Type Line Coding Line Type Transfer Model Description Description of the selected interface. Sonet, SDH sonetMediumOther, sonetMediumB3ZS, sonetMediumCMI, sonetMediumNRZ, sonetMediumRZ singleMode1300of15km, multiMode1300of200mOr2km, singleMode1300of2km, singleMode1300ofOver40km, singleMode1550, coaxOrUTP, other Sonet or SDH

17-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name J0 loopback Clock Source Time Elapsed Valid Intervals Invalid Intervals Description

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

The value is a number within 0~255 when the transmission mode is Sonet. The value is a character string within 1~15 when the transmission mode is SDH. NoLoop (no loopback), FacilityLoop (internal loopback), TerminalLoop (remote loopback) Inside, Line 1 ~ 900 s 0 ~ 96 0 ~ 96

Table 17-6 Description of the SDH Interface Current Status (Section Layer) query parameters
Name Interface Description CurrentStatus CurrentESs CurrentSESs CurrentSEFSs CurrentCVs Description Description of the selected interface. NoDefect; LOS; LOF; LOS, LOF. Errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes). Severely errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes). Severely errored frame seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes). Code violations of the current statistic interval (15 minutes).

Table 17-7 Description of the SDH Interface Current Status (Line Layer) query parameters
Name Interface Description CurrentStatus CurrentESs CurrentSESs CurrentCVs CurrentUASs Description Description of the selected interface. NoDefect; AIS; RDI; AIS, RDI. Errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Severely errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Code violations of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~232-1. Unavailable seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900.

Table 17-8 Description of the SDH Interface Current Status (Farend Line Layer) query parameters
Name Interface Description CurrentESs CurrentSESs CurrentCVs CurrentUASs Description Description of the selected interface. Errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Severely errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Code violations of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~232-1. Unavailable seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900.

II. Interval Status
Select a POS interface in the device panel and double click the function node [POS Interface Management/SDH Interface Query/Interval Status] on the function tree, and the system will pop up the query window shown in Figure 17-8:

17-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Figure 17-8 SDH Interface Interval Status (Section Layer) query window

The relevant history data are listed via the history status query. There are three attribute tabs in the figure: "Section Layer", "Line Layer", and "Farend Line Layer". Other attribute tabs are similar to the above figure. For the specific parameter description, see the following tables: Table 17-9 Description of the SDH Interface Interval Status (Section Layer) query parameters
Name Interval Number ES SESs SEFSs CVs ValidData Description Sequence number of the reported statistic data, with the value range of 1~32. Errored seconds of the interval . Severely errored seconds of the interval . Severely errored frame seconds of the interval. Code violations of the interval. Indicating if the data at this time interval is valid.

Table 17-10 Description of the SDH Interface Interval Status (Line Layer, Farend Line Layer) query parameters
Name Interval Number ES SESs CVs UASs ValidData Description Sequence number of the statistic data, with the value range of 1 ~ 32. Errored seconds of the interval. Severely errored seconds of the interval. Code violations of the interval. Unavailable seconds of the interval. Indicating if the data at this time interval is valid.

17-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

17.5 SDH Path Query
I. Current Status
Select a POS interface in the device panel and double click the function node [POS Interface Management/SDH Path Query/Current Status] on the function tree to pop up the query window, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 17-9 SDH Path Current Status (Path Layer) query window

The attribute tab "Farend Path Layer" in this figure is similar to the above one. For the specific parameter description, see the two tables as follows:

17-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Table 17-11 Description of SDH Path Current Status (Path Layer) query parameters
Name Interface Description CRC C2 S1 Scramble J1 CurrentWidth CurrentStatus CurrentESs CurrentSESs CurrentCVs CurrentUASs Description Description of the selected interface. crc16 (16-bit check), crc32 (32-bit check) Setting the multiplex structure of the VC frame and the nature of the information payload, with the value range of 0~255. unknown, prc, tnc, lnc, sets, dnu Scramble (enable scrambling), UnScramble (disable scrambling) A string of les than 16 characters sts1, sts3cSTM1, sts12cSTM4, sts24c, sts48cSTM16 NoDefect, LOP, PAIS, PRDI, PUNEQ, PSLM Errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Severely errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Code violations of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~232-1. Unavailable seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900.

Table 17-12 Description of the SDH Path Current Status (Farend Path Layer) query parameters
Name Interface Description CurrentESs CurrentSESs CurrentCVs CurrentUASs Description Description of the selected interface. Errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Severely errored seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900. Code violations of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~232-1. Unavailable seconds of the current statistic interval (15 minutes), 0~900.

II. Interval Status
Select a POS interface in the device panel and double click the function node [POS Interface Management/SDH Path Query/Interval Status] on the function tree, and the system will pop up the query window, as shown in Figure 17-10:

17-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 17 POS Interface Management

Figure 17-10 SDH Path Interval Status (Path Layer) query window

The relevant history data are listed via the history status query. The attribute tab "Farend Path Layer" in this figure is similar to the above one. For the specific parameter description, see the contents in Table 17-10.

17-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management
In the current Metropolitan Area Network (MAN), the Sonet/SDH equipment is widely used. However, this technology is tailored for voice transmission, and cannot meet very well the requirements of the data network. The Resilient Packet Ring (RPR) technology is a new technology optimized specifically for the special requirements of the MAN. It adopts the packet-based optical transport technology, defines the Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol for the MAN, Local Area Network (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN), and provides multi-service access capability. Meanwhile, this technology can provide low-cost, high-speed, secure and reliable data links based on the existing optical fiber infrastructures of the operators. RPR interface management function applies to high-end routers, which can be implemented in the following two ways: 1) Function tree

The RPR function menus are shown in the figure below:

Figure 18-1 Function tree of RPR interface management

After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the related node in the function tree to configure the related functions of the RPR interface. 2) Device menu

Select the RPR interface in the panel, and then right click to pop up an interface-level right-click menu, as shown in Figure 18-2. To configure the related functions of the RPR interface, select the menu items of <RPR Interface Management>.

18-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-2 Device menu

The functions of these two operations are completely the same. This chapter takes the function tree operations as an example.

Caution: Only after a RPR interface is selected from the panel, can you implemented the relevant operations of RPR interface management.

18.1 Logical and Physical Interfaces of RPR
On the NE80 router, two RPR physical interfaces form one logical interface. Figure 18-3 shows the RPR physical interfaces in the NE80 equipment panel. Of them, the RPR service board on the slot with an odd No. is called side A of the RPR logical interface and the RPR service board on the slot with an even No. is called side B of the RPR logical interface. Meanwhile, the interface description of the side A physical interface is taken as the interface description of the logical interface.

18-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-3 RPR physical interfaces

Caution: When the NE80 router only has two physical interfaces, no matter which interface the customer selects, the current logical interface will not change. This is because they belong to the same logical interface. As shown in Figure 18-3, no matter whether Rpr7/0/0 or Rpr8/0/0 is selected, the function interface later opened always shows the logical interface description is Rpr7/0/0.

18.2 Interface Management
The interface management function can help us query and configure the information like the interface state, parameters, etc. After selecting a RPR interface from the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Interface Management] function node in the function tree. Then, an Interface Management window will appear in the right information display area, as shown in Figure 18-4:

18-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-4 The interface management window

The interface management window contains three tabs: MAC Parameter, Interface Status, and Interface Parameter.

18.2.1 MAC Parameter
This tab is used to config/query the related parameters of the MAC layer of interface sides A and B. As shown in Figure 18-4, the MAC Parameter tab includes three parts below:
!

Interface Description: Displays the interface description of the currently selected logical interface. Interface Side: Used to select a side. Side Parameters: Displays the MAC layer parameters of side A or B.

! !

I. Side selection
To query the MAC layer parameters of side A or B, you can check the radio button in the "Interface Side" area. To query the MAC layer parameters of side A, check "Side A". To query the MAC layer parameters of side B, check "Side B".

18-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

II. Parameter configuration
To modify the parameters of "Side A" or "Side B", click <Config> in Figure 18-4. The meanings of parameters are given in the table below: Table 18-1 MAC layer parameter description
Name Topology Timer WTR Timer IPS Timer Operator Request Clock Source HighPriority Rate LowPriority Rate Neighbour MAC Address Neighbour IP Address Automatic Request Request Path Indicator Wrap Counter Last Wrap Time Description Readable and writable, used to set the interval of sending the topology discovery request, ranging between 1~600s. Readable and writable, used to set the duration of being in the wrap state, ranging between 10~600s. Readable and writable, used to set the frequency at which the IPS messages are sent, ranging between 10~600s. Readable and writable, used to set the switching request, value range: NoRequest, NoManualSwitch, ManualSwitch, NoForceSwitch, ForcedSwitch Readable and writable, acting as the source of the interface board clock, value range: Internal, Line Readable and writable, used to set the rate limit of the high priority queue, ranging between 0~1000M Readable and writable, used to set the rate limit of the low priority queue, ranging between 0~2500M Read-only, the MAC address of the neighbor node over the RPR ring Read-only, the IP address of the neighbor node over the RPR ring Read-only, the auto IPS protection request type of the current interface, value range: nonStatus, waitToRestore, signalDegrade, signalFail Read-only, the identifier of the path used by the interface to send the IPS requests, value range: shortPath, longPath, localRequest, mateSourced, mateForwarded, mateUpdateNeighbor, mateSourcedBySelf Read-only, the Wrap times after the interface board is started Read-only, the system time of the last Wrap

" Note: When configuring the operation request parameters, if the operation request is ManualSwitch, you can cancel it by configuring NoManualSwitch. Similarly, to cancel the ForcedSwitch request, configure the NoForceSwitch operation request.

18.2.2 Interface Status
This tab is used to configure and query the logical interface status, as shown in Figure 18-5.

18-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-5 The Interface Status tab

To modify the value of the interface administration status, click <Config> in Figure 18-5. The parameters are described in Table 18-2: Table 18-2 Description of the interface state parameters
Name Description

Interface Description Read-only, the interface description of the logical interface Interface Administration status Readable and writable, the current administration state of the interface, value range: up, down Interface Operation status Readable and writable, the current running state of the interface, value range: up, down

18.2.3 Interface Parameter
This tab is used to query the parameters of the RPR logical interface, as shown in Figure 18-6.

18-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-6 The Interface Parameter tab

The parameters are described in Table 18-3: Table 18-3 Description of interface parameters
Name Interface Description IP Address Priority Threshold Nodes On Ring IPS status Time Elapsed Valid Intervals Description Description of a logical interface The IP address of an interface The priority threshold; used to determine what type of a queue (two types, i.e. high priority, and low priority) the packets will be placed in according to the packet type. E.g. if the priority is 5, then 0~5 indicates the low priority while 6~7 indicates the high priority. Number of nodes on the RPR The IPS state of a node, value range: idle, passthrough, wrapped Time from the last statistics report in seconds. Number of intervals during which the statistical data is reported effectively; each interval is 15 minutes.

18.3 Counter Configuration
The counter configuration implements the configuration of the RPR statistical counter and the traffic monitoring function for the statistical data. After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Counter Configuration] function node in the function tree. Then, in the
18-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

information display area on the right, the Counter Configuration window will pop up, as shown in Figure 18-7:

Figure 18-7 The Counter Configuration window

The Counter Configuration window includes three tabs: Source Counter Configuration, Destination Counter Configuration, and Source Reject Counter Configuration.

18.3.1 Source Counter Configuration
The source address counter of the RPR interface can take statistics according to the source MAC address of the packets received by the node, so as to monitor the traffic from a node over the RPR network. The Source Counter Configuration tab can implement the functions of add/delete/reset the source address match counter and the function of monitoring the traffic of statistical data, as shown in Figure 18-7. The parameters are described in Table 18-4:

18-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Table 18-4 Description of the source counter parameters
Name Description

Source MAC address The MAC address of the source address counter Time Stamp-D,H:M:S.00th The time interval from the last counting Source Packet Count Number of packets counted by the source address counter The counter clear flag, value range: true, false. The value of this flag bit is True at the Clear Count Flag moment when the counter is restarted and becomes False immediately after counting.

I. Adding a source counter
Click <Add…> in Figure 18-7. Then, the "Add Source Counter" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 1-8:

Figure 18-8 The window for adding a source counter

The "Add Source Counter" window includes two list boxes. The "Available Node" list on the left lists the nodes that can be added. You can select one line or more according to actual needs and then click ">>" to add the selected nodes to the "Selected Node" list, as shown in Figure 18-9:

18-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-9 The window for adding a source counter

Also, you can select one line or more from the "Selected Node" list on the right, and then click "<<" to remove the nodes from the "Selected Node" list. Click <Ok> to add the nodes from the "Selected Node" list to the source counter.

" Note: The same node cannot be added to the source address counter repeatedly. That is, the nodes added to the source address counter will be filtered out in the "Available Node" list.

II. Deleting a source counter
In Figure 18-7, select one or more lines of data according to the actual needs and then click <Delete> to delete the selected source counter.

III. Reset the source counter
In Figure 18-7, select one or more lines of data according to the actual needs and then click <Reset> to restart the selected source counter.

18-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

IV. Traffic monitoring
In Figure 18-7, select one or more lines of data according to the actual needs and click <Monitor…>. Then, the "Source Counter Statistics" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 18-10, which can help you monitor the variation trend of values in a graphical way. For details about using the "Source Counter Statistics" window, see the part of Performance Monitoring.

Figure 18-10 The window for the source counter monitor

18.3.2 Destination Counter Configuration
The destination counter of the RPR interface can take statistics based on the destination MAC address of the packets received by the node, so as to monitor the traffic sent from the local node of the RPR network to a specified node. The Destination Counter Configuration tab can implement the functions of add/delete/reset the destination address match counter and the function of monitoring the statistical data in real time, as shown in Figure 18-11:

18-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-11 The window for configuring the destination counter

The operations of add/delete/reset the destination counter and the operation of taking statistics are completely the same as those of the source address counter. Please refer to the contents of section 18.3.1 .

18.3.3 Source Reject Counter Configuration
The refusing source address counter of the RPR interface can refuse the packets from a MAC address, so as to filter the traffic toward the local node. The Source Reject Counter Configuration implements the functions of add/delete the source reject counter, as shown in Figure 18-12:

18-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-12 The window for configuring the source reject counter

The operations of add/delete the source reject counter are completely the same as those of the source counter. Please refer to the contents of section 17.4.2.

" Note: One node cannot be added to different counters simultaneously. That is, the nodes already added to the source address counter will be filtered out of the “Available Node” list of the destination address counter or refusing source address counter.

18.4 Topology Management
The topology management implements the management on the RPR static ring selection, topology information, etc. After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Topology Management] function node in the function tree. Then, the Topology Management window will pop up in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 18-13:

18-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-13 The window for topology management

The topology management window includes two tabs: Static Ring Selection, and Topology Info.

18.4.1 Static Ring Selection
The static ring selection configuration can designate the packet direction toward a node inside the ring as inloop or outloop. The Static Ring Selection implements the functions of add/delete the static ring selection. As shown in Figure 18-13, the parameters are described in Table 18-5: Table 18-5 Description of the parameters of static ring selection
Name Remote IP Address Ring Identifier Description The IP address of the node for which ring selection shall be configured. Identifying the inloop or outloop

I. Adding the static ring selection
Click <Add…> in Figure 18-13. Then the "Add Static Ring Selection" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 18-14:

18-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-14 The window for adding the static ring selection

The "Add Static Ring Selection" window includes two list boxes. The "Available Node" list on the left lists the nodes that can be added. You can select one or more lines according to needs and then click ">>" to add the selected nodes to the "Selected Node" list, as shown in Figure 18-15:

18-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-15 The window for adding the static ring selection

Select one or more lines in "Selected Node" on the right, and then click "<<" to remove the nodes from the "Selected Node" list. After selecting "Ring Identifier" from the "Selected Node" list, click <Ok> to finish the operation of adding the static ring selection.

II. Deleting the static ring selection
In, Figure 18-13, select one or more lines of data. Then, click <Delete> to delete the selected RPR static ring.

" Note: The parameters of a configured RPR static ring cannot be modified. If it is necessary to do so, you must first delete it and then add it anew.

18.4.2 Querying the Topology Information
The topology information query interface can query and display the RPR topology information, as shown in Figure 18-16:

18-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-16 The window for querying the topology information

The parameters are described in Table 18-6: Table 18-6 Description of the topology information parameters
Name Node Hops Number Node MAC Address Node IP Address Node Name Node Wrap Status Description The hop count between the ring node and the current node The MAC address of the ring node The IP address of the ring node The name of the ring node The Wrap status of the ring node

18.5 Querying the SDH Interface
For the use description of this part, please see SDH Interface Query of POS Interface Management. Taking "Query SDH Interface Current State" for example, the only difference from SDH Interface Query in POS Interface Management is shown in Figure 18-17:

18-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-17 The window for querying the SDH interface current status

In this window, you can select "Side A" or "Side B" from the "Side" area to switch between the display of the SDH interface information of different physical interfaces.

18.6 SDH Path Query
For the use description of this part, please refer to SDH Path Query of POS Interface Management. Taking "Query SDH Path Current State" for example, the only difference from SDH Path Query in POS Interface Management is shown in Figure 18-18:

18-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-18 The window for querying the SDH path current status

In this window, you can select "Side A" or "Side B" from the "Side" area to switch between the display of the SDH path information of different physical interfaces.

18.7 Ring Monitoring
The ring monitoring implements the traffic monitoring for the RPR topology ring statistic items. After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Ring Monitoring] function node in the function tree. Then, the window for the ring monitoring will pop up in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 18-19:

18-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-19 The window for the ring monitoring

In this window, click <Select Items>. Then, the "Select Monitor Item" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 18-20:

Figure 18-20 The window for select monitor item

18-20

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

The "Select Monitor Item" window includes two parts:
! !

Group of monitored items: divided into two groups, side A and side B. Monitor item: available statistical items, which are the same for side A and side B. Description of each statistical item can be found in Table 18-7:

Table 18-7 Description of the statistical items of ring monitoring
Name RingCurrentUcastLowPriPktsIn/s RingCurrentUcastLowPriOctetsIn/s RingCurrentMcastLowPriPktsIn/s RingCurrentUcastLowPriOctetsIn/s RingCurrentUcastHighPriPktsIn/s RingCurrentUcastHighPriOctetsIn/s RingCurrentMcastHighPriPktsIn/s RingCurrentUcastHighPriOctetsIn/s RingCurrentUcastLowPriPktsOut/s RingCurrentUcastLowPriOctetsOut/s RingCurrentMcastLowPriPktsOut/s RingCurrentUcastLowPriOctetsOut/s RingCurrentUcastHighPriPktsOut/s RingCurrentUcastHighPriOctetsOut/s RingCurrentMcastHighPriPktsOut/s RingCurrentUcastHighPriOctetsOut/s Description The number of received low priority unicast packets within unit time The number of received low priority unicast bytes within unit time The number of received low priority multicast packets within unit time The number of received low priority multicast bytes within unit time The number of received high priority unicast packets within unit time The number of received high priority unicast bytes within unit time The number of received high priority multicast packets within unit time The number of received high priority multicast bytes within unit time The number of transmitted low priority unicast packets within unit time The number of transmitted low priority unicast bytes within unit time The number of transmitted low priority multicast packets within unit time The number of transmitted low priority multicast bytes within unit time The number of transmitted high priority unicast packets within unit time The number of transmitted high priority unicast bytes within unit time The number of transmitted high priority multicast packets within unit time The number of transmitted high priority multicast bytes within unit time

Select the group of monitored items. Then, according to actual needs, select one or more statistical items from the "Monitor Item" list. After that, click <Ok> to finish the selection of statistical items. For detailed use of the window for the ring monitoring, see "Performance Monitoring".

18.8 Host Monitoring
The Host Monitoring window implements the traffic monitoring for the RPR host statistical items. After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Host Monitoring] function node in the function tree. Then, the window for the host monitoring will pop up in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 18-21:

18-21

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Figure 18-21 The window for the host monitoring

Here, the operations of selecting statistical items are totally the same as those for the statistics of topology ring counting. For details, see section 17.8.The description of each statistical item is shown in Table 18-8: Table 18-8 Description of the statistical items of host monitoring
Name HostCurrentUcastLowPriPktsIn/s HostCurrentUcastLowPriOctetsIn/s HostCurrentMcastLowPriPktsIn/s HostCurrentMcastLowPriOctetsIn/s HostCurrentUcastHighPriPktsIn/s HostCurrentUcastHighPriOctetsIn/s HostCurrentMcastHighPriPktsIn/s HostCurrentMcastHighPriOctetsIn/s HostCurrentUcastLowPriPktsOut/s HostCurrentUcastLowPriOctetsOut/s HostCurrentMcastLowPriPktsOut/s HostCurrentMcastLowPriOctetsOut/s Description The number of low priority unicast packets received by the host within unit time The number of low priority unicast bytes received by the host within unit time The number of low priority multicast packets received by the host within unit time The number of low priority multicast bytes received by the host within unit time The number of high priority unicast packets received by the host within unit time The number of high priority unicast bytes received by the host within unit time The number of high priority multicast packets received by the host within unit time The number of high priority multicast bytes received by the host within unit time The number of low priority unicast packets transmitted by the host within unit time The number of low priority unicast bytes transmitted by the host within unit time The number of low priority multicast packets transmitted by the host within unit time The number of low priority multicast bytes transmitted by the host within unit time

18-22

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name HostCurrentUcastHighPriPktsOut/s HostCurrentUcastHighPriOctetsOut/s HostCurrentMcastHighPriPktsOut/s HostCurrentMcastHighPriOctetsOut/s

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management Description

The number of high priority unicast packets transmitted by the host within unit time The number of high priority unicast bytes transmitted by the host within unit time The number of high priority multicast packets transmitted by the host within unit time The number of high priority multicast bytes transmitted by the host within unit time

For detailed use of the window for the host monitoring, see "Performance Monitoring".

18.9 Error Monitoring
The Error Monitoring window implements the traffic monitoring for the RPR error statistical items. After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Error Monitoring] function node in the function tree. Then, the window for the error monitoring will pop up in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 18-22:

Figure 18-22 The window for the error monitoring

Here, the operations of selecting statistical items are totally the same as those for the statistics of topology ring counting. For details, see section 17.8. The description of each statistical item is shown in Table 18-9:

18-23

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Table 18-9 Description of the statistical items of error monitoring
Name RingCurrentRxErrorsDataParity/s RingCurrentRxErrorsShortPackets/s RingCurrentRxErrorsGiantPackets/s RingCurrentRxErrorsSideBadPackets/s RingCurrentRxErrorsCRC/s RingCurrentTxErrorsDataParity/s RingCurrentTxErrorsShortPackets/s RingCurrentTxErrorsGiantPackets/s RingCurrentTxErrorsSideBadPackets/s RingCurrentTxErrorsCRC/s Description The number of packets with the parity check error received by the topology ring within unit time The number of packets with less than 16 bytes received by the topology ring within unit time The number of packets with more than 9216 bytes received by the topology ring within unit time The number of bad packets received by the topology ring within unit time The number of packets with the CRC check error received by the topology ring within unit time The number of packets with the parity check error transmitted by the host within unit time The number of packets with less than 16 bytes transmitted by the host within unit time The number of packets with more than 9216 bytes transmitted by the host within unit time The number of bad packets transmitted by the host within unit time The number of first in first out packets transmitted by the host within unit time

For detailed use of the window for the error monitoring, see "Performance Monitoring".

18.10 Display Topology Ring
The Display Topology window implements the function of browsing the topology information of the RPR where the current node lies. After selecting a RPR interface in the panel, double click the [RPR Interface Management/Display Topology] function node in the function tree. Then, the Display Topology window will pop up in the information display area on the right, as shown in Figure 18-23:

Figure 18-23 The display topology window

18-24

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

The Topology Ring Display window is divided into two parts: 2) Functional buttons

These buttons are located on the left of the window. From the top downward they are:
! ! ! ! ! ! !

<Pan>: used to drag the topology ring; <Select>: used to select a node inside the ring and drag the node freely; <Zoom in rect>: used to magnify part of the topology ring; <Zoom in>: used to magnify the topology ring; <Zoom out>: used to reduce the topology ring; <Fit to view>: used to adjust the size of the topology ring to fit the current view; <Layout>: used to arrange the view again. Topology ring display area

3)

This area is on the right of the window, used to display the RPR topology ring where the current node lies. The viewable information includes:
! !

IP address of the node: displayed below the node icon. Node name: once the cursor is placed in the node area, the prompt information of the node name will be displayed. Wrap or not: for the node where Wrap occurs, the topological view will disconnect the connection among nodes. As shown in Figure 18-24, Wrap occurs on node 201.1.1.1 and node 201.1.1.2:

!

Figure 18-24 The display topology window

" Note: The topology ring view polls and refreshes the topology view display based on the time interval set by the parameter of "Browse polling interval".

18-25

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 18 RPR Interface Management

Select any other node except this node in the topology ring. Then right click and select the [Open Device…] menu, to open this node device.

18-26

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management
19.1 Overview
This chapter introduces CPOS interface management function, including Port Configuration, Higher-Order Path Management, Lower-Order Path Management, Multilink Management and query of related parameters. CPOS interface management can be performed by the following means: 1) Function tree

The function menu of CPOS interface management is shown in the following figure:

Figure 19-1 Function tree for CPOS interface management

Select a CPOS interface from the panel and double click on different nodes on the function tree to configure the related functions of the CPOS interface. 2) Device menu

Select a CPOS interface from the panel and right click on it to access the short-cut menu of interface level, as shown in Figure 19-2. Select the sub-items of [CPOS Port Management] to perform the related configuration on the CPOS interface.

19-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-2 Device menu for CPOS interface

Figure 19-3 Device menu for CPOS interface board

The two operations function the same, and this chapter takes the function tree operation as an example.

Caution: Only when you select a CPOS interface from the panel, can you perform the related operations of CPOS interface management. Multilink management addresses CPOS interface boards.

19.2 CPOS Interface Configuration
Select a CPOS interface from the panel and double click on [CPOS Port Management/Port Config] node on the function tree to open the "Port Config" interface, as shown in Figure 19-4:

19-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-4 CPOS Port Config (Status)

This interface includes two tabbed pages, "Port Status Configuration" and "Port Parameter Configuration". The "Port Parameter Configuration" page is shown in Figure 19-5:

Figure 19-5 CPOS Port Config (Parameter)

Parameters in the interface are described in Table 19-1 and Table 19-2:

19-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Table 19-1 Configuration parameters of interface status
Name Interface Description Admin Status Oper Status Description Description of the interface, read-only Administration status of the interface, including up and down, read-write Operation status of the interface, including up and down, read-write

Table 19-2 Interface configuration parameters
Name Interface Description Transfer Mode J0 Clock Source Loopback Description Description of the interface, read-only Type the remote device, including byte-1 and byte-16, read-write It is a string including 1 to 15 characters, which is used by the receiving end to check the connectivity with the sending end. Read-write Synchronous timing parameter, including Inside (internal clock) and Line (line recovery clock), read-write For loopback test, including SonetNoLoop (no loopback), SonetFacilityLoop (internal loopbakc) and SonetTerminalLoop (remote loopback), read-write

Modify the parameters on your demand and then click <Config> to finish the configuration operation.

19.3 Higher-Order Path Management
Select a CPOS interface from the device panel and double click on [CPOS Port Management/Higher-Order Path Management] node from the function tree to open the "Higher-Order Path Management" interface, as shown in Figure 19-6:

Figure 19-6 CPOS Higher-Order Path Management

19-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

19.3.1 Higher-Order Path Configuration
In the higher-order path management interface, select a line and click <Config> to open the configuration window, as shown in Figure 19-7:

Figure 19-7 CPOS Higher-Order Path Parameter Configuration

The configuration parameters of a higher-order path are described in Table 19-3: Table 19-3 Configuration parameters of a CPOS higher-order path
Name Higher-Order Path Description J1 C2 S1S0 Description Description of the path, real-only It is a string including 1 to 15 characters, which is used to check the connectivity between the receiving and sending ends over the path. It ranges from 0 to 255, which sets the property of VC frame multiplexing structure and information payload. Load pointer byte, ranging from 0 to 3

19.3.2 Higher-Order Path Current View
In the higher-order path management interface, select a line and click <Current View> to open the current view interface, as shown in Figure 19-8 and Figure 19-9:

19-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-8 Current view of CPOS higher-order path

Figure 19-9 Current view of CPOS farend higher-order path

19-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Parameters of higher-order path current view are described in Table 19-4 and Table 19-5: Table 19-4 Parameters of higher-order path current view
Name Interface Description C2 J1 Current Width Current Status Current ESs Current SESs Current CVs Current UASs Description Description of the path, read-only Sets the property of VC frame multiplexing structure and information payload Checks the connectivity between the receiving and sending ends over the path Includes sts1, sts3cSTM1, sts12cSTM4, sts24c and sts48cSTM16 Includes NoDefect, LOS, LOF, LOS and LOF. The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes) The number of invalid seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900

Table 19-5 Parameters of farend higher-order path current view
Name Interface Description Current ESs Current SESs Current CVs Current UASs Description of the path The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 232-1 The number of invalid seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 Description

19.3.3 Higher-Order Path History View
In the higher-order path management interface, select a line and click <History View> to open the history view interface, as shown in Figure 19-10 and Figure 19-11:

19-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-10 History view of CPOS higher-order path

Figure 19-11 History view of CPOS farend higher-order path

19-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Parameters of higher-order path history view are described in Table 19-6: Table 19-6 Parameters of higher-order path/farend higher-order path history view
Name Interval Number ESs SESs CVs UASs Valid Data Description Serial number for statistics report, ranging from 1 to 32 The number of errored seconds in the interval The number of severely errored seconds in the interval Times of code violation in the interval The number of invalid seconds in the interval Specifies whether the data collected in the interval is valid

19.4 Lower-Order Path Management
In the device panel, select a CPOS interface and double click on [CPOS Port Management/Lower-Order Path Management] node on the function tree to open the "Lower-Order Path Management" window, as shown in Figure 19-12:

Figure 19-12 CPOS lower-order path management

19.4.1 Adding a Lower-Order Path
In the lower-order path management interface, click <Add> to open the "Create Lower-Order Path" window, as shown in Figure 19-13:

19-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-13 Creating a lower-order path

Here you need to type the path number in the range of 1 to 63 (for an E1 path) or 1 to 84 (for a T1 path). Click <OK> to add a lower-order path. If succeed, the system will refresh the lower-order path management interface, where you can browse the new lower-order path. Various parameters of the lower-order path use the default values, as described in the following table: Table 19-7 Default parameters of a lower-order path
Content Lower-Order Path Number Lower-Order Path Description Admin Status Oper Status MTU(byte) Description The number of the lower-order path Description of the lower-order path By default, the administration status is up. This parameter can be modified. By default, the operation status is down. This parameter cannot be modified. MTU of the lower-order path. It is defaulted to 1500 and is configurable.

You can configure the MTU and administration status of the lower-order path with the "Config" function (see the subsequent sections of this chapter). If the adding fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

19.4.2 Deleting a Lower-Order Path
In the lower-order path management interface, select one or more lines to be deleted and click <Delete> to open the confirmation dialog box. Click <OK> in the dialog box to delete the selected contents. If succeed, the system will refresh the lower-order path management interface to remove the deleted lower-order paths.

19-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

If the deletion fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

19.4.3 Lower-Order Path Configuration
In the lower-order path management interface, select a line and click <Config> to open the configuration window where to configure the attributes of lower-order path. The configuration includes status configuration, parameter configuration and link configuration, whose interfaces are shown in Figure 19-14, Figure 19-15 and Figure 19-16:

Figure 19-14 Status configuration for a CPOS lower-order path

19-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-15 Parameter configuration for a CPOS lower-order path

19-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-16 Link configuration for a CPOS lower-order path

Various configuration parameters are described in Table 19-8, Table 19-9 and Table 19-10: Table 19-8 Status configuration parameters of a lower-order path
Name Lower-Order Path Description Admin Status Oper Status Description Description of the lower-order path, read-only Administration status of the lower-order path, including up and down, read-write Operation status of the lower-order path, including up and down, read-only

19-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Table 19-9 Parameter configuration parameters of a lower-order path
Name Path Description LC2 Clock Source Loopback Description Description of the lower-order path, read-only Signal label byte of the lower-order path, ranging from 0 to 7 Synchronous timing parameter, including Inside (internal clock) and Line (line recovery clock), read-write For loopback test, including noloopback (no loopback), internal (internal loopback) and line (remote loopback), read-write

Table 19-10 Link configuration parameters of a lower-order path
Name Path Description Encapsulation KeepAlive Timeout PPP Authentication PPP Negotiate Timeout Chap Host Pap User Name Pap Password Encrypt Pap Password Description Description of the lower-order path, read-only Link layer encapsulation type, including ppp and hdlc Timeout of the KeepAlive packets, ranging from 0 to 32767 seconds PPP authentication, including pap, chap, chappap and noauthentication. This parameter is effective only when link layer encapsulation type is set to PPP. Timeout for PPP negotiation, ranging from 1 to 10 seconds. This parameter is effective only when link layer encapsulation type is set to PPP. It is a string including 1 to 32 characters, setting the host name for chap authentication. This parameter is effective only when link layer encapsulation type is set to PPP. It is a string including 1 to 32 characters, setting the user name for pap authentication. This parameter is effective only when link layer encapsulation type is set to PPP. Password display mode for pap authentication, including noEncrypt and Encrypt. This parameter is effective only when link layer encapsulation type is set to PPP. It is a string including 1 to 16 characters, setting the password for pap authentication. This parameter is effective only when link layer encapsulation type is set to PPP.

The corresponding relations between the authentication protocols and parameters are as follows: 2) 3) 4) For pap authentication, PPP Negotiate Timeout, Pap User Name, Pap Password Encrypt and Pap Password are effective. For chap authentication, PPP Negotiate Timeout and Chap Host are effective. For Chappap authentication, all the parameters are effective, and the authentication proceeds chap authentication to pap authentication. Modify the parameters on your demand and click <Config> to finish the configuration operation.

19.4.4 Lower-Order Path Traffic Monitor
In the lower-order path management interface, select a line and click <Monitor> to open the "Flow Monitor" window, as shown in Figure 19-17:

19-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-17 Traffic monitor for a lower-order path

Click <Select Items> to open the "Select Monitor Item" window, as shown in Figure 19-18:

Figure 19-18 Selecting monitor items

19-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Various items are described in the following table: Table 19-11 Traffic monitor items
Monitor item ifHCInOctets/s ifHCInUcastPkts/s ifHCInMulticastPkts/s ifHCInBroadcastPkts/s ifInErrors/s ifInDiscards/s ifHCOutOctets/s ifHCOutUcastPkts/s ifHCOutMulticastPkts/s ifHCOutBroadcastPkts/s ifOutErrors/s ifOutDiscards/s Description The number of octets received on the port The number of unicast packets received on the port The number of multicast packets received on the port The number of broadcast packets received on the port The number of error packets received on the port The number of discarded input packets sent on the port The number of octets sent on the port The number of unicast packets sent on the port The number of multicast packets sent on the port The number of broadcast packets sent on the port The number of error packets sent on the port The number of discarded output packets sent on the port

19.4.5 Lower-Order Path Current View
In the lower-order path management interface, select a line and click <Current View> to open the current view window, as shown in Figure 19-19 and Figure 19-20:

Figure 19-19 Current view of CPOS lower-order path

19-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-20 Current view of CPOS farend lower-order path

Parameters of lower-order path current view are described in Table 19-12 and Table 19-13: Table 19-12 Parameters of CPOS lower-order path current view
Name Interface Description Current Width Current Status Current ESs Current SESs Current CVs Current UASs Description Description of the path, read-only Includes sts1, sts3cSTM1, sts12cSTM4, sts24c and sts48cSTM16 Includes NoDefect, LOS, LOF, LOS and LOF The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes) The number of invalid seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900

19-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Table 19-13 Parameters of CPOS farend lower-order path current view
Name Interface Description Current ESs Current SESs Current CVs Current UASs Description of the interface The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 232-1 The number of invalid seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 Description

19.4.6 Lower-Order Path History View
In the lower-order path management interface, select a line and click <History View> to open the history view window, as shown in Figure 19-21 and Figure 19-22:

Figure 19-21 History view of CPOS lower-order path

19-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-22 History view of CPOS farend lower-order path

Parameters of lower-order path history view are described in Table 19-14: Table 19-14 Parameters of lower-order path/farend lower-order path history view
Name Interval Number ESs SESs CVs UASs Valid Data Description Serial number for statistics report, ranging from 1 to 32 The number of errored seconds in the interval The number of severely errored seconds in the interval Times of code violation in the interval The number of invalid seconds in the interval Specifies whether the data collected in the interval is valid

19.5 Multilink Management
Select a board with a CPOS interface from the device panel and double click on [CPOS Port Management/Multilink Management] node on the function tree to open the "Multilink Management" window, as shown in Figure 19-23:

19-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-23 CPOS multilink management

19.5.1 Adding a Multilink
In the multilink management interface, click <Add> to open the "Add Multilink" window, as shown in Figure 19-24:

Figure 19-24 Adding a multilink

Here you need to type a multilink number in the range of 1 to 168. Click <OK> to add a multilink. If succeed, the system will refresh the multilink management interface, where you can view the new multilink. The parameters of the multilink use default values, as described in the following table:

19-20

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Table 19-15 Default multilink parameters
Content Multilink Number Multilink Description Admin Status Oper Status MTU(byte) Description The number of the multilink Description of the multilink By default, the administration status is up and can be modified. By default, the operation status is down and cannot be modified. The MTU of the multilink. It is defaulted to 1500 and is configurable.

You can configure such parameter as administration status of the multilink with the "Config" function (see the subsequent sections for more detail). If the adding fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

19.5.2 Deleting a Multilink
In the multilink management interface, select one or more lines to be deleted and click <Delete> to open the confirmation dialog box. Click <OK> in the dialog box to delete the selected contents. If succeed, the system will refresh the multilink management interface to remove the deleted multilinks. If the deletion fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

19.5.3 Configuring a Multilink
In the multilink management interface, select a line and click <Config> to open the configuration window where to configure the attributes of the multilink. The configuration 19-27: includes status configuration, parameter configuration and adding/deleting lower-order path, as shown in Figure 19-25, Figure 19-26 and Figure

I. Configuring multilink status
In the multilink configuration interface, click the "Multilink Status Configuration" tab to configure the administration status of the multilink, as shown in the following figure:

19-21

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-25 Multilink Status Configuration

Parameters in the interface are described in the following table: Table 19-16 Parameters of multilink status configuration
Content Multilink Description Admin Status Oper Status Description Description of the multilink, not configurable Administration status includes up and down Operation status is not configurable

Click <Config> to configure the administration status of the multilink. If succeed, you can refresh the interface and view the result. If the configuration fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

II. Configuring multilink parameters
In the multilink configuration interface, click the "Multilink Parameter Configuration" tab to configure the MRRU (Max-Receive-Reconstructed Unit), fragment timeout and fragment size of the multilink, as shown in the following figure:

19-22

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-26 Multilink Parameter Configuration

Parameters of multilink parameter configuration are described in the following table: Table 19-17 Parameters of multilink parameter configuration
Content Multilink Description Mrru Description Description of the multilink, not configurable MRRU (Max-Receive-Reconstructed Unit) is the necessary parameter for MP negotiation. The peer end reconstructs the received fragments to packets. This parameter is used to set the maximum size (ranging from 4 to 470) of the reconstructed packets so as to facilitate the fragmentation of IP packets. The timeout of an MP fragment ranges from 10ms to 100ms and is defaulted to 100ms. Enables/Disables short-sequence MP packet header negotiation Enables/Disables terminal authentication key MP packets can be divided into fragments of 128 bytes, 256 bytes or 512 bytes, or not be fragmented.

Drop timeout Short-sequence Discriminator Fragment-Threshold

Click <Config> to configure the parameters of the multilink. If succeed, you can refresh the interface and view the result. If the configuration fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

19-23

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

III. Add/delete Lower-Order Path
In the multilink configuration interface, click the "Add/delete Lower-Order Path" tab to configure the lower-order paths included in the multilink, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 19-27 Add/delete Lower-Order Path

This interface includes two lists, "Available Path" and "Select Path". The former lists the currently available lower-order paths, and the latter lists the lower-order paths to be included in the multilink. Select one or more lower-order paths from the "Available Path" list and click “>>” to add them to the "Select Path" list. Likewise, you can select one or more lower-order paths from the "Select Path" list and click “<<” to remove them. A multilink can be bound with 12 paths, while a path can only belong to a single multilink at any time. To add a path to a new multilink, you must remove it from the former multilink first. The physical status of a multilink is UP when the physical status any of its paths is UP, and physical status of a multilink is DOWN when that of all the paths is DOWN.

19-24

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

When a path joints a multilink, some of its interface attributes and configurations (such as IP, MPLS, peer and ISIS) that are related to network layer configuration are disabled and will be recovered when the path is removed from the multilink interface. Click <Config> to configure the lower-order paths of the multilink. If succeed, you can refresh the interface and view the result. If the configuration fails or in the case of SNMP operation timeout, you will be prompted accordingly.

" Note: You cannot bind paths of different service boards to a multilink. A service board does not provide E1 and T1 at the same time, but can be channelized to E1 or T1 according to the factory defaults (not changeable).

19.5.4 Multilink Statistics
This function is similar to the traffic statistics function for lower-order paths.

19.6 SDH Interface Query
I. Current status
Select a CPOS interface from the device panel and double click on [CPOS Port Management/SDH Interface Query/Current Status] node on the function tree to open the current status window, as shown in Figure 19-28:

19-25

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-28 Current status of an SDH interface - Section Layer

This interface includes four tabbed pages, "Section Layer", "Line Layer", "Farend Line Layer" and "E4GC Information", with the contents similar to those shown in above figure. The parameters of each tabbed page are described in the following tables: Table 19-18 Current status (Section Layer) parameters of an SDH interface
Name Interface Description Current Status Current ESs Current SESs Current SEFSs Current CVs Description Description of the interface Includes NoDefect, LOS, LOF, LOS and LOF The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) The number of serious error frame seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes) Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes)

Table 19-19 Current status (Line Layer) parameters of an SDH interface
Name Interface Description Current Status Current ESs Current SESs Current CVs Description of the interface Includes NoDefect, AIS, RDI, AIS and RDI The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 232-1 19-26 Description

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name Current UASs Description

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

The number of invalid seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900

Table 19-20 Current status (Farend Line Layer) parameters of an SDH interface
Name Interface Description Current ESs Current SESs Current CVs Current UASs Description Description of the interface The number of errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 The number of severely errored seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900 Times of code violation in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 232-1 The number of invalid seconds in current statistical interval (15 minutes), ranging from 0 to 900

Table 19-21 Current status (E4GC Information) parameters of an SDH interface
Name Interface Description Status Vendor Name Compliance Part Number Length9u (Km/n) Length50u (Km/n) Length62.5u (Km/n) Wave Len Description Name of the interface Includes Online (optical module in service), Offline (optical module not in service) Vendor the optical module Attribute of the optical module Model of the optical module Length in Km/n supported by 9u fibers Length in Km/n supported by 50u fibers Length in Km/n supported by 62.5u fibers Wave length

Caution: If the selected interface is not an optical module, the following information will appear in the message window: "The selected port doesn’t support this function". If the optical module is not in service, you will be prompted "E4GC module isn't online".

II. History Status
Select a CPOS interface from the device panel and double click on [CPOS Port Management/SDH Interface Query/History Status] node on the function tree to open the history status window, as shown in Figure 19-29:

19-27

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 19 CPOS Port Management

Figure 19-29 History status of an SDH interface - Section Layer

This interface lists the related history data in three tabbed pages, that is, "Section Layer", "Line Layer" and "Farend Line Layer". The contents of various pages are similar to those shown in above figure and the specific parameters included in each page are described in the following tables: Table 19-22 History status (Section Layer) parameters of an SDH interface
Name Interval Number ESs SESs SEFSs CVs Valid Data Description Serial number for statistics report, ranging from 1 to 32 The number of errored seconds in the interval The number of severely errored seconds in the interval The number of serious frame errored seconds in the interval Times of code violation in the interval Specifies whether the data collected in the interval is valid

Table 19-23 History status (Line Layer and Farend Line Layer) parameters of an SDH interface
Name Interval Number ESs SESs CVs UASs Valid Data Description Serial number for statistics report, ranging from 1 to 32 The number of errored seconds in the interval The number of severely errored seconds in the interval Times of code violation in the interval The number of invalid seconds in the interval Specifies whether the data collected in the interval is valid

19-28

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management
20.1 Overview
The ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) is a transmission and switching mode of broadband ISDN and, for its flexibility and support for multimedia services, is considered as the core technology that implements broadband communication. The ATM is a connection-oriented switching technology based on VC (Virtual Circuit), each of which is identified by a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier). For the IP, ATM networks and the existent physical subnets such as Ethernet and token ring networks are the same. With the IPoA (IP over ATM), users can directly run the existent IP-based network protocols and applications on an ATM network. The NetEngine core router supports the IPoA based on PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit). On a GSR, the physical layer of an ATM interface is implemented based on SDH, so the configuration of the ATM interface includes the configuration of the SDH layer parameters. This chapter introduces the management functions of ATM interfaces, including interface configuration, PVC configuration and parameter query and performance statistics. ATM interface management can be performed by any of the following means: 1) Function tree

The function menu of ATM interface management is shown in the following figure:

Figure 20-1 Function menu of ATM interface management

20-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Select an ATM interface from the device panel and double click on different nodes on the function tree, and you can configure various functions of the ATM interface. 2) Device menu

Select an ATM interface from the device panel and right click on it to access the short-cut menu of interface level, as shown in Figure 20-2. Select various sub-items of [ATM Interface Management], and you can configure the related ATM interface functions.

Figure 20-2 Device menu of ATM interface

The two operations function the same, and this chapter takes the function tree operation as an example.

Caution: Before performing any interface-related operation (such as configuration, query and statistics), you must select an interface first.

20.2 Interface Configuration
Select an ATM interface from the device panel, double click on [ATM Interface Management/Interface Configuration] node on the function tree to open the "Interface Configuration" window, as shown in Figure 20-3:

20-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Figure 20-3 ATM Interface Configuration (Interface Maintenance)

This interface includes two tabbed pages, Interface Maintenance and SDH Parameter Configuration.

20.2.1 Interface Maintenance
ATM interface supports subinterface. The interface maintenance page implements ATM subinterface adding and deletion, ATM interface reset, ATM interface disabling and interface parameter configuration. The interface maintenance page shows the currently selected main interface and all its subinterfaces, each of which occupies a line. Various parameters are described in Table 20-1: Table 20-1 Interface maintenance parameters
Name Interface Description Administration Status Operation Status Max VCC Current VCC Max VPI Bit Max VCI Bit Current Max VPI Bit Current Max VCI Bit Description Description of the interface, read-only Administration status of the interface, including up and down, read-write Operation status of the interface, including up and down, read-only Integer, read-only Integer, read-only Ranges from 0 to 7, read-write Integer, read-only Integer, read-only Integer, read-only

20-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

I. Adding an ATM subinterface
In Figure 20-3, click <Add…> to open the "Add Subport" window, as shown in Figure 20-4. Here type the subinterface number and click <OK> to add an ATM subinterface.

Figure 20-4 Adding an ATM subinterface

II. Deleting an ATM subinterface
In Figure 20-3, select one or more lines on your demand and click <Delete> to delete the subinterfaces.

III. Resetting an interface
In Figure 20-3, select one or more lines on your demand and click <Active> to set the administration status of the selected interfaces to up.

IV. Disabling an interface
In Figure 20-3, select one or more lines on your demand and click <Deactive> to set the administration status of the selected interfaces to down.

V. Configuring interface parameters
In Figure 20-3, select a line and click <Config…> to open the "Interface Parameter Configuration" window, as shown in Figure 20-5. Here only the "MAX VPI Bit" entry is configurable. Modify the entry and click <OK> to finish the operation.

20-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Figure 20-5 Interface Parameter Configuration

" Note: To configure "MAX VPI Bit" successfully, make sure that none of the interfaces is configured with PVC and all the configured interfaces are down.

20.2.2 SDH Parameter Configuration
The SDH parameter configuration page implements SDH parameter configuration, as shown in Figure 20-6:

20-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Figure 20-6 ATM Interface Configuration (SDH Parameter Configuration)

Various parameters are described in Table 20-2: Table 20-2 Parameters of SDH parameter configuration
Name Interface Description Medium Type Transfer Model J0 Description Description of the interface, read-only Type of medium, including Sonet and SDH, read-write Type of the remote device, including Sonet and SDH, read-write It is used by the receiving end to check the connectivity with the sending end. It is a number ranging from 0 to 255 when the transfer model is set to "Sonet", and is a string including 1 to 15 characters when the transfer model is set to "SDH". Read-write For loopback test, NoLoop (no loopback), FacilityLoop (internal loopback) and TerminalLoop (remote loopback), read-write Synchronous timing parameter, including master (internal clock) and slave (line recovery clock), read-write Sets whether to enable scramble, including Scramble (enable) and UnScramble (disable), read-write Sets the property of VC frame multiplexing structure and payload information, ranging from 0 to 255, read-write It is a string including 1 to 15 characters and is used to check the connectivity between the receiving and sending ends on the path layer. Read-write

LoopBack Clock Source Scramble C2 J1

20.3 PVC Management
Select an ATM interface from the device panel and double click on [ATM Interface Management/PVC Management] node on the function tree to open the "PVC Management" window, as shown in Figure 20-7:

20-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Figure 20-7 PVC Management (PVC Configuration)

The "Port Selection" list on the left lists the currently selected main interface and its subinterfaces, and the right page shows the related PVC information. Select different interfaces from the "Port Selection" list, and the tabbed pages on the right are refreshed automatically. The PVC management window includes such two tabbed pages as PVC Configuration and OAM Test Configuration.

20.3.1 PVC Configuration
You can configure PVCs on an ATM main interface and its subinterfaces. PVC configuration implements PVC adding, deletion, enabling, disabling, parameter configuration and performance statistics. Various parameters in the page are described in Table 20-3: Table 20-3 PVC configuration parameters
Name Link VPI Link VCI Description VPI of current PVC, ranging from 0 to 255, read-only VCI of current PVC. The value of this parameter depends on the VCI bits configured on the interface. For example, if the VCI is 5bit long, this value ranges from 0 to 31. In addition, this item should not be set to 3 or 4, and VPI and VCI cannot be 0 at a time. Read-only Administration status of the PVC, including up and down, read-write Operation status of the PVC, including up and down, read-only AAL5, read-only Includes AAL5_SNAP and AAL5_MUX_IP, read-write Includes CBR, UBR and NRT-VBR. If it is set to "CBR", only the PCR is effective; if it is set to "UBR", none of the following three items is effective; if it is set to "NRT-VBR, the following three items are effective. read-write Ranges from 100 to 149760 and is no less than the minimum cell rate, read-write Ranges from 100 to 149760, read-write Ranges from 1 to 255, read-write

Administration Status Operation Status AAL Type AAL5 Encaps Type Service Category PCR(kbps) SCR(kbps) MBS

20-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name TransSDU Size RedvSDU Size Integer, read-only Integer, read-only Description

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

I. Adding a PVC
In Figure 20-7, click <Add…> to open the "Add PVC" window, as shown in Figure 20-8. Here type the required PVC parameters and click <OK> to add a PVC.

Figure 20-8 Adding a PVC

II. Deleting a PVC
In Figure 20-7, select one or more lines on your demand and click <Delete> to delete the selected PVCs.

20-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

" Note: You cannot delete an enabled PVC, so make sure that the administration status of the PVC to be deleted is down.

III. Enabling a PVC
In Figure 20-7, select one or more lines on your demand and click <Enable> to set the administration status of the selected PVCs to up.

IV. Disabling a PVC
In Figure 20-7, select one or more lines on your demand and click <Disable> to set the administration status of the selected PVCs to down.

V. Configuring PVC parameters
In Figure 20-7, select a line and click <Config…> to open the "PVC Configuration" window, as shown in Figure 20-9. Here modify the related parameters and click <OK> to finish the operation.

20-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Figure 20-9 PVC Configuration

" Note: You cannot configure the parameters of an enabled PVC, so make sure that the administration status of the PVC is down before configuration.

VI. Performance statistics
In Figure 20-7, select a line and click <Monitor…> to open the performance statistics window of the PVC, as shown in Figure 20-10:

20-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Figure 20-10 Performance statistics

There three PVC performance statistics items, InArp Statistics Item, OAM Statistics Item and AAL5 Statistics Item. Various items are described in Table 20-4, Table 20-5 and Table 20-6: Table 20-4 InArp statistics item
Name Received InArp requests/s Sent InArp requests/s Received InArp replies/s Sent InArp replies/s Received Invalid InArp requests/s Sent Invalid InArp requests/s Description The number of request packets received in a time unit The number of request packets sent in a time unit The number of response packets received in a time unit The number of response packets sent in a time unit The number of invalid requests received in a time unit The number of invalid requests sent in a time unit

Table 20-5 OAM statistics item
Name Received End to End F5 OAM Loop Cells/s Sent End to End F5 OAM Loop Cells/s Received F5 AIS Cells/s Sent F5 AIS Cells/s Received RDI Cells/s Sent RDI Cells/s Description The number of end-to-end F5OAM loopback cells received in a time unit The number of end-to-end F5OAM loopback cells sent in a time unit The number of F5AIS cells received in a time unit The number of F5AIS cells sent in a time unit The number of RDI cells received in a time unit The number of RDI cells sent in a time unit

20-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

Table 20-6 AAL5 statistics item
Name AAL5CRC Errors/s Description The number of AAL5CRC errors encountered in a time unit

For the detailed operation of the window, refer to Chapter 8 "Performance Monitoring".

20.3.2 OAM Test Configuration
OAM test is used to enable the sending of the OAM F5 Loopback cells so as to check the status of a PVC. OAM test configuration configures the OAM test attributes of a PVC.

Figure 20-11 PVC Management (OAM Test Configuration)

Various parameters are described in Table 20-7: Table 20-7 Configuration parameters of OAM test
Name Link VPI Link VCI Description VPI of current PVC, ranging from 0 to 255, read-only VCI of current PVC. The value of this parameter depends on the VCI bits configured on the interface. For example, if the VCI is 5bit long, this value ranges from 0 to 31. In addition, this item should not be set to 3 or 4, and VPI and VCI cannot be 0 at a time. Read-only Includes enable and disable, read-write Includes up and down, read-only Ranges from 1 second to 600 seconds, read-write

Test Status Link Status OamFrequency(s)

20-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 20 ATM Interface Management

20.4 SDH Interface Query
For the detailed operation, refer to SDH Interface Query in POS Interface Management.

20.5 SDH Path Query
For the detailed operation, refer to SDH Path Query in POS Interface Management.

20-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration
21.1 Portal Protocol Overview
Portal service is a value-added service based on the existent Internet services. It provides users with individual services, better QoS assurance and higher network security. The NE16E/08E/05 router, jointly with a NAS (Network Access Server) and iTELLIN, provides narrowband Portal service for users. With the Portal service, a login user can only access the contents on the specified site server through which the operator provides various kinds of information and services for the users and decides whether to enable them to access the external network resources according to the authentication and service selection results. In a narrowband Portal solution, a NE16E/08E/05 router resides in the middle of a NAS, a content server (Portal Server) provided by the ICP and the other sites the users are authorized to access.

Figure 21-1 Location of NE16E/08E/05 on a network

The NE16E/08E/05 router is engaged in controlling the access rights of the Portal users. When a Portal user dials on the NAS, the NAS may communicate with the NE16E/08E/05 router in two modes. In the first mode, the NAS is A8010 that sends a Portal user login message to the NE16E/08E/05 router. Upon receiving the message, the latter reassembles it and sends the packet to the iTELLIN. In the other mode, the NAS is not A8010 but a third-party access server, and the NE16E/08E/05 router will

21-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

check whether the login user is a Portal user. If it is, the router will send a Portal user login message to the iTELLIN. Otherwise, the router will forward the packet according to common procedure. When receiving the HTTP packets of a Portal user, if not being informed by the iTELLIN that the user can access any other site, the NE16E/08E/05 router will redistribute the packets to the Portal Server. When the iTELLIN allows the user to access the other sites, it informs the NE16E/08E/05 router. After receiving the message, the NE16E/08E/05 router will no longer redistribute the packets of the user. A user may log out initiatively or be forced to logout. After logout, the NE16E/08E/05 router will clear the related data items of the Portal user.

21.2 Portal Configuration
21.2.1 Portal Function List
! ! ! ! ! ! !

Enable Portal Portal ID Configuration Address Pool Configuration NAS Configuration iTELLIN Server Key Configuration Browse Portal user information Browse Portal status information

21.2.2 Enabling Portal
The "Port Enable" interface is shown in Figure 21-2. When you enter the interface, all the ports supporting Portal function and their status will be displayed automatically. You can select a status for a port from the drop-down list and click <Config> to validate your configuration.

21-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Figure 21-2 Enabling Portal

Only when an interface is set to "portal server" status, could it process the Portal-related packets from the Portal Server and iTELLIN. Likewise, only when an interface is set to "portal user" status, could it process the Portal-related packets from the NAS. Therefore, before launching the Portal service, you must set the related interface to a proper status for communication. The status of a Portal port is described in Table 21-1: Table 21-1 Portal interface status
Status disable portal only enable portal server only enable portal user enable both portal server and portal user Description Disables the Portal function on the interface Enables the interface to conduct Portal service communicate with the iTELLIN and the Portal Server Enables the interface to conduct Portal service communicate with the NAS Enables the interface to conduct Portal service communicate with the NAS, iTELLIN and Portal Server simultaneously

By default, none of interfaces will process Portal-related packets.

21.2.3 Configuring Portal ID
Before launching a Portal service, you must configure the Portal ID and such attributes as the IP addresses of the iTELLIN and the Portal Server.

21-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Portal ID configuration includes creation, deletion and configuration. The interface is shown in Figure 21-3:

Figure 21-3 Configuring Portal ID

This interface displays all the configured Portal IDs and their attributes.

I. Creating a Portal ID
Click <New…> to open the "Create Portal ID" dialog box, as shown in Figure 21-4:

21-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Figure 21-4 Creating a Portal ID

Set various attributes and click <OK> to validate your configuration. If the settings are correct, the Portal ID will be set to "active" status automatically. Otherwise, the configuration will fail. The meaning of various attributes is described in Table 21-2: Table 21-2 Portal ID attributes
Attribute Portal ID Portal ID Description Server IP Address iTELLIN IP Address ITELLIN Timeout ITELLIN Retry Times Hold Time DestIPMaxcymometer ITELLIN Aging Time hwNBPortalEnableRe direct Max Idle Time Nas Secret Key Description The unique identifier of a Portal configuration, once configured, not editable A custom description of the Portal ID. If not specified, the system default value will be used. The IP address of the Portal server The IP address of the iTELLIN server iTELLIN packet response timeout in second The times of retries on the iTELLIN when the communication with it fails Hole time in second Update frequency of the destination IP User update timeout on the iTELLIN. If a user is not updated for the specified time, it will log out automatically. Specifies whether to force a user to enter the Portal status after successful authentication, yes by default The maximum idle time is not 0 and is effective for all the users logging in from a non-A8010 access server. If there is not packet received from a user for the specified time, the user will log out automatically. The key used to communicate with the NAS 21-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

II. Deleting a Portal ID
Select a Portal ID and click <Delete> to delete it.

III. Configuring a Portal ID
Select a Portal ID and click <Config…> to enter the configuration dialog box that is similar to the creation dialog box.

21.2.4 Address Pool Configuration
As shown in Figure 21-5, address pool configuration includes creation, deletion and configuration. When you enter the interface, all the configured address pools are displayed automatically.

Figure 21-5 Address Pool Configuration

I. Creating an address pool
Click <New…> to open the "Create Address Pool" window, as shown in Figure 21-6:

21-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Figure 21-6 Creating an address pool

Set various attributes and click <OK> to validate your configuration. The meaning of various attributes is described in Table 21-3: Table 21-3 Address pool attributes
Attribute Portal ID Pool Number First Address Last Address Description Select a Portal ID from the existent ones Identifier of the address pool Start address of the address pool End address of the address pool

II. Deleting an address pool
Select an existent address pool and click <Delete> to delete it.

III. Configuring an address pool
Select an existent address pool and click <Config…> to open the configuration dialog box that is similar to the creation dialog box.

21.2.5 NAS Configuration
The NAS configuration interface is shown in Figure 21-7:

21-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Figure 21-7 NAS Configuration

Various parameters are described in Table 21-4: Table 21-4 NAS configuration parameters
Parameter Nas TimeOut Nas Retry Times Nas Aging Time Description User update message timeout in second on the NAS. If there is no update message received from a user for the specified time, the user will log out automatically. Times of retries on the NAS when the communication with it fails NAS communication timeout

21.2.6 iTELLIN Key Configuration
The iTELLIN key management interface is shown in Figure 21-8:

21-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Figure 21-8 iTELLIN Key Configuration

This interface lists all the iTELLIN server addresses specified when configuring the Portal ID. Select a line and click <Config…> to enter the configuration interface, as shown in Figure 21-9:

Figure 21-9 iTELLIN key configuration

Various parameters are described in Table 21-5: Table 21-5 iTELLIN server configuration parameters
Parameter Server IP Key The IP address of the iTELLIN server The key of the iTELLIN server Description

21-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

21.2.7 Browsing Portal User Information
The Portal user information browsing interface is shown in Figure 21-10:

Figure 21-10 Portal user information browsing

Various parameters are described in Table 21-6: Table 21-6 User information
Attribute Portal ID Registing User Number UnRegisting User Number Holding User Number Redirect User Number URL Filter User Number Common User Number Description The unique identifier of a Portal configuration The number of registering users The number of users that are logging out The number of users in holding status The number of users to be redirected The number of users whose packets are to be filtered The number of users that can normally access the network and do not require redirection and packets filtering

21.2.8 Browsing Portal Status Information
The Portal status information browsing interface is shown in Figure 21-11:

21-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 21 Portal Configuration

Figure 21-11 Portal status information browsing

Various parameters are described in Table 21-7: Table 21-7 Portal status information
Attribute User IP User Status User Nas IP User Portal ID User Type User Online Time A valid IP address Current status of a user NAS address of a user Portal ID used by a user 1) Narrowband user that is registered by the NAS 2) Narrowband user that is automatically identified Online duration of a user Description

21-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Chapter 22 Voice Management
Voice service is typically applied to IP phone. The application of the VOIP to routers makes it possible for voice services to be borne by IP networks, just like traditional telephone service. At present, an IP phone gateway is used in most cases to interwork between PSTN and Internet. At the same time, as the technology of voice transmission from PC to telephone, and from telephone to telephone is becoming mature and the voice quality is improved greatly, VOIP fully meets the requirement of commercial use. This chapter introduces configuration methods of Quidview Voice service. Voice service is configured in the following two ways: 1) Function tree

Voice management function menus are shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-1 Voice Management Function Tree

Double click the relevant node in the function tree to configure related functions of Voice service. 2) Device menu

Right click the device panel and a device menu will pop up as shown in the figure below. Select relevant menus to configure the functions related to Voice service.
22-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-2 Device Menu

The functions of these two operations are completely the same. This chapter takes the function tree operations as an example for illustration.

22.1 Voice Common Information
Double click the function node [Voice Management/Voice Common Information] and the "Voice Common Information" configuration window will pop up as shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-3 "Voice Common Information" configuration window

The meaning of each parameter in the figure is shown in the table below:

22-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Table 22-1 Description of parameters in “Voice Common Information”
Name Call History Number Match Policy Description As the longest history record, its value ranges from 0 to 500. Designate the diversified number match policy for a user’s dialing scheme and its value is optional: shortest, longest. Designate the length of buffer in an incoming voice packet, whose value range is 0~10.

JitterBuffer Sending Voice Data Optional: normal, fast. Flow Mode Receiving Voice Data Optional: normal, fast. Flow Mode

Select or modify the parameter in the figure, and click <Config> to finish configuration.

22.2 Voice Port Information
22.2.1 Analog Port Configuration
Double click the function node [Voice Management/Voice Port Information] in the function tree and the "Voice Port Information" window as shown in the following figure will pop up:

Figure 22-4 Voice Port Information (Analog Port) configuration window

22-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

"Analog Port" attribute tab in the figure is divided into the upper and lower parts. The upper part shows the list of analog voice ports on the device, which specifies several voice point parameters such as "Port No", "Type", "Description" and "Status". The lower part is "Current Calling Information", which lists the ongoing call information about the selected port. Select a line of data in the port list. Click <Config…>, and the "Voice Port Details" window will pop up. It is allowed to configure parameters related to voice ports in this window. Depending on different port types, the configuration interface differs. Analog voice port is of three types: FXS, FXO and E&M. Specific configuration parameters will be described below one by one.

I. FXS Port Configuration
Select a FXS port, click <Config…> and a configuration window as shown in the figure below will pop up:

Figure 22-5 FXS Port Details (Analog Port Attribute) configuration window

There are two attribute tabs in the window: Analog Port Attribute and Common Information. Common Information attribute tab is illustrated in the figure below:

22-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-6 FXS Port Details (Common Information) configuration window

The meaning of each parameter in the figure is given in the table below: Table 22-2 Description of FXS port parameters
Name Port Number Port Type Port Description Port Status Initial Timeout Interdigit Timeout Description As the sequence number of this port in the interface board, it is read-only. It refers to port type: fxs, fxo or E&M. This parameter is read-only. Descriptive character string for this port. Two states are available: up, down; read-only. Used to set timeout time for port initialization, which ranges from 0 to 120s, 10s by default. Used to set key timeout, which ranges from 0 to 120s, 10s by default.

Analog Port Attribute

22-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name Enable Noise Input Gain Output Gain Common Information Enable Echo Cancelled Echo Cancel Depth Echo Cancel Delay Private Line Number Nation

Chapter 22 Voice Management Description

Whether to insert comfortable noise mode to disable auditory stimulation caused to users. Used to set the size of gain at the receiving end of voice interface, ranging from -14 to 14 dbs and 0 db by default. Used to set the size of gain at the transmitting end of voice interface, ranging from -14 to 14 dbs and 0 db by default. Used to set whether to enable echo cancellation; enabled by default. Used to set echo cancellation depth of a voice port, Options: 16ms, 24ms, 32ms. The default value is 16ms. This parameter is valid only when echo cancellation is enabled, Used to set echo cancellation delay of a voice port, ranging from 0 to 64ms, and 32ms by default. Used to specify private line number. Used to specify the nation.

Modify the parameters to be configured, and then click the <OK> button to complete the port parameter configuration.

II. FXO Port Config5uration
If FXO port is selected, the configuration window as shown in the following figure will pop up:

22-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-7 FXS Port Details configuration window

As the attribute tabs "Analog Port Attribute" and "Common" in the figure are common to analogy voice port and their parameters are also identical, no more detail will be given here. The meanings of FXO port parameters are described in the table below: Table 22-3 Description of FXO port parameters
Name Description

Used to set busy tone type at FXO port. Options: europe, custom, north-america; Europe by Area default. This item is configurable for the first FXO port of a voice card, and is read-only for the others. DTMF Digit Used to set DTMF digit duration output from the voice port, it ranges from 50 to 500ms and is Duration 120ms by default. DTMF inter-digit Used to set the DTMF inter-digit duration output from the voice port, it ranges from 50 to 500ms Duration and is 120ms by default.

Modify the parameters to be configured, and then click the <OK> button to complete the port parameter configuration.

22-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

III. E&M Port Configuration
If E&M port is selected, the configuration window as shown in the figure below will pop up:

Figure 22-8 Analog Port E&M Attribute configuration window

When you switch to the attribute tab "Interface Timing Parameter", the configuration window is shown in the following figure:

22-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-9 Interface Timing Parameter configuration window

The meanings of parameters in the figure are given in the table below: Table 22-4 Description of E&M port parameters
Name E&M Signaling Type Signal Operation Analog Port E&M Attribute Type Ringing no answer Timeout Timeout Wait Cancelled Number Timeout Timeout Description Used to set the signaling type of E&M voice port, it has the following options: delay-dial (designate delay start mode in digital E&M signaling, immediate (designate immediate start mode in digital E&M signaling), wink-start (designate wink start mode in digital E&M signaling). The default value is "immediate". Used to set the type of line used by analog E&M signal, it has the following options: twoWires (one pair of receiving and sending wires), fourWires (two pairs of receiving and sending wires). The default value is fourWires. Used to specify the type of trunk used in analog E&M signals, it has the following options: typeI, typeII, typeIII, typeV. The default value is typeV. Used to decide whether to time out in case of ringing no answer from E&M voice port. Used to specify timeout for ringing no answer from analog E&M voice port, it ranges from 5 to 600s, and is 60s by default. Used to decide whether to time out when analog E&M voice port is waiting for called number. Used to specify the timeout value for analog E&M voice port waiting called number, its value ranges from 3 to 600s and is 5s by default.

22-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name DTMF Digit Duration DTMF Inter-digit Duration Time of Cleaning Call Waiting Time Before Sending Wink Signal Max Time To Wait For Wink Signal Max Wink Duration Timing of Generatio n of Delay Start Signal Max Delay Signal Duration Delay Before Sending Out Called Digit

Chapter 22 Voice Management Description

Used to set DTMF digit duration output from the voice port, it ranges from 50 to 500ms and is 120ms by default. Used to set DTMF inter-digit duration output from the voice port, it ranges from 50 to 500ms and is 120ms by default. Used to set time interval of clearing call, it ranges from 200 to 2000ms; 200ms by default. Used to set the waiting time before the called sends wind signal, it ranges from 100 to 5000ms; 500ms by default. This parameter is valid only when "E&M start type" is set as "wink-start". Used to set the timeout value for the caller to wait for wink signal, it ranges from 100 to 5000ms; 2000ms by default. This parameter is valid only when "E&M start type" is set as "wink-start". Used to set the wink delay, this parameter ranges from 100 to 3000ms; 500ms by default. This parameter is valid only when "E&M start type" is set as "wink-start". Used to set timing of generation of delay start signal, this parameter ranges from 20 to 2000ms; 300ms by default. This parameter is valid only when "E&M start type" is set as "delay-dial". Used to set the maximum delay signal duration, it ranges from 100 to 5000ms; 300ms by default. This parameter is valid only when "E&M start type" is set as "delay-dial".

Interface Timing Paramet er

Used to set the delay before sending out the called number, it ranges from 50 to 5000ms; 300ms by default. This parameter is valid only when "E&M start type" is set as "immediate".

Modify the parameters to be configured, and then click the <OK> button to complete the port parameter configuration.

22.2.2 Digital Port Configuration
Choose "Digital Port" attribute tab from the "Voice Port Information" configuration window as shown in Figure 22-4, and the configuration window shown in the following figure will pop up:

22-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-10 Voice Port Information (Digital Port) configuration window

The "Digital Port" attribute tab in the figure consists of the upper part and lower part. The upper part shows the list of digital voice ports, which specifies the values of several voice port parameters including "Port No", "Group No", "Board Type", "Signaling Type", "Port Description" and "Port Status". The lower part is "Current TimeSlot Calling Information", which lists the time slot status of current port. Select a line of data in the port list. Click <Config >, and the "Voice Port Details" window will pop up. You may configure the parameters related to the voice port in this window. Depending on different port types, the configuration windows differ from each other. The digit port is of three signaling types in all: R2, E&M and DSS1, as described below.
…

II. R2 Port Configuration
If the device is configured with R2 type, a configuration window as shown in the figure below will pop up:

22-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-11 R2 Digital Port Details (Digital Port Attribute) configuration window

As the parameters under the "Common" attribute tab in the figure are identical to those in the voice port, no more detail will be given here. The meanings of Digital Port Attribute parameters are given in the table below: Table 22-5 Description of Digital Port Attribute parameters
Name Port Number Group Number Port Type Signal Type Port Description Port Status Description As the sequence number of this port in the interface board, it is read-only. As ds0 or pri group number, it ranges from 0 to 30, and is read-only. The port is of two types: e1vi and t1vi. This parameter is read-only. There are three types of port signaling: r2, dss1 and E&M. This parameter is read-only. Descriptive character string for this port. Two states are available: up, down; this parameter is read-only .

When you switch to the "R2 Signal Information" attribute tab, the configuration window is shown in the following figure:

22-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-12 R2 Digital Port Details (R2 Signal Information)configuration window

The meanings of R2 signaling information parameters are shown in the following table: Table 22-6 Description of R2 digit port parameters
Name Number of Bits Needed Description

Used to specify the number of bits required for calling number, this parameter ranges from 1 to 10; 1 by default. Used to set the line signaling effect time, this parameter ranges from 10 to 40ms; 40ms by Line Signal Effect Time default. KA Signal Encode Used to set KA signal code, this parameter ranges from 1 to 15; 1 by default. KD Signal Encode Used to set KD signal code, this parameter ranges from 1 to 15; 3 by default. Waiting Time of Used to set waiting time of sending holding confirmation signal, this parameter ranges Sending Holding from 200 to 3000ms; 1000ms by default. Confirm Signal Used to set R2 relay routing mode, this parameter has several options: max, maxpoll, min R2 Relay Route Mode and minpoll; min by default. Timeout of Waiting Used to set the timeout of waiting to receive KB signal, this parameter ranges from 1000 Receive KB Signal to 50000ms; 5000ms by default. Timeout of Waiting Used to set the timeout of waiting to receive KD signal, this parameter ranges from 1000 Receive KD Signal to 50000ms; 5000ms by default. Timeout of Waiting Used to set the timeout of waiting for next called number, this parameter ranges from Next Calling Number 1000 to 50000ms; 5000ms by default. Timeout of Waiting Used to set the timeout value of waiting to release monitoring, this parameter ranges from Releasing Monitor 200 to 3000ms; 1000ms by default. Waiting Time of End of Used to set the time of waiting for the end of ringing, this parameter ranges from 1000 to Ringing 240000ms; 30000ms by default.

22-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name Interval of Waiting Sending Response Signal Line Signal Reverse Mode Value of C,D Signal

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Description Used to set the interval of waiting to send response, this parameter ranges from 50 to 1000ms; 500ms by default. Used to set whether to reverse signal, each bit can be any of the two possible values: 0 (disable) and 1 (enable); 0000 by default (i.e. all four bits are set to "disable"). Used to set the signal bit, which needs to be sent but is not sent yet; 1111 by default.

Modify the parameters to be configured, and then click the <OK> button to complete the port parameter configuration.

III. E&M Port Configuration
If a device is configured with E&M type, the configuration window as shown in the figure below will pop up:

Figure 22-13 E&M Digital Port Details (E&M Attribute) configuration window

The parameters under the attribute tab "Interface Timing Parameter" are identical to relevant attributes of E&M port. For details, see Table 22-4. The meanings of E&M attribute parameters are given in the table below:

22-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Table 22-7 Description of Digital E&M Port parameters
Name Interdigit Timeout Ringing no answer Timeout Timeout Description Used to set the inter-digit timeout, this parameter ranges from 0 to 120ms;10ms by default. Used to set whether to time out when ringing gets no answer. Used to set the timeout value of "ringing no answer", this parameter ranges from 5 to 600s; 60s by default.

Wait Cancelled Number Used to set whether to time out while waiting for called number. Timeout Used to set the timeout value of waiting for the called number, this parameter ranges Timeout from 3 to 600s; 5s by default. ABCD Bit Value of Used to set ABCD bit value of receiving idle signaling, each bit of this parameter can be Receiving Idle Signaling two possible values: 0 (disable) and 1 (enable); 1101 by default. ABCD Bit Value of Used to set ABCD bit value of receiving busy signaling, each bit of this parameter can be Receiving Busy two possible values: 0 (disable) and 1 (enable); 0101 by default. Signaling ABCD Bit Value of Used to set ABCD bit value of sending idle signaling, each bit of this parameter can be Sending Idle Signaling two possible values: 0 (disable) and 1 (enable); 1101 by default. ABCD Bit Value of Used to set ABCD bit value of sending busy signaling, each bit of this parameter can be Sending Busy Signaling two possible values: 0 (disable) and 1 (enable); 0101 by default.

Modify the parameters to be configured, and then click the <OK> button to complete the port parameter configuration.

IV. DSS1 Port Configuration
If the device is configured with DSS1 type, the configuration window only contains two attribute tabs: "Digital Port Attribute" and "Common". Please refer to Table 22-5 and Table 22-2 for the meanings of their parameters.

22.3 Voice Entity Information
Double click the function node [Voice Management/Voice Entity Information] in the function tree, and the "Voice Entity Information" configuration window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

22-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-14 Voice Entity Information (POTS) configuration window

This window contains two attribute tabs: "POTS Voice Entity" and "VOIP Voice Entity", which will be described in detail one by one as follows.

22.3.1 POTS Voice Entity Configuration
POTS refers to ordinary pone service. To configure POTS voice entity is to relate physical voice port with local telephone equipment.

I. Adding voice entity
Click the <Add…> button in Figure 22-14, and the "Add a Voice Entity" window will pop up, as shown in the figure below:

22-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-15 "Add POTS Voice Entity (Common)" window

The figure lists basic information required for POTS voice entity to be added. The meanings of the parameters in the figure are shown in the table below: Table 22-8 Description of POTS Voice Entity (Common) parameters
Name Voice Entity ID Telephone Number Prefix Voice Port Cancel Truncate Description As the unique expression of the set entity, its value range is 1~231-1. This parameter indicates the telephone number of local entity. Used to set dialing prefix, which can either be any digit of the numbers 0~9 or ",". Voice port on the device. Used to set whether to disable truncating the called number.

When you switch to the attribute tabs "Advanced" and "IP FAX", the configuration window is illustrated in the following two figures. For parameter meanings, please refer to Table 22-9 and 0.

22-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-16 Add POTS Voice Entity (Advanced) window

22-18

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-17 Add POTS Voice Entity (IP FAX) window

Table 22-9 Description of POTS Voice Entity (Advanced) parameters
Name Description

Shutdown Used to set whether to disable this entity. Voice Activity Detect Used to set whether to enable mute compression. IP Precedence Used to set IP packet parameters, this parameter ranges from 0 to 7; 0 by default. Used to specify DTMF transmission mode, this parameter can be either "voice" or DTMF Relay "h245Alphanumeric"; voice by default. Used to specify the encode/decode mode, the value of this parameter can be any of the Encode/Decode following: G.711 A Law 64000 bps,G.711 U Law 64000 bps,G.723.1 5300bps,G.723.1 Type 6300bps,G.729 8000bps,G.729 A and Default; Default by default.

Table 22-10 Description of POTS Voice Entity (IP FAX) parameters
Name Fax Rate Train Mode Local Train Threshold Description Used to specify the fax rate, the value of this parameter is optional: r14400, r2400, r4800, r9600, disable and voice; voice by default. Used to set fax training mode for the dialing terminal, the value of this parameter can either be ppp or local; ppp by default. Used to specify local training threshold, the parameter ranges from 0 to 100; 10 by default.

22-19

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Name Fax Level Description

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Used to set the transmitting energy level of gateway carrier wave, its value ranges from 3 to 60db; 15db by default. Fax Relay(ECM) Used to set whether to use ECM in fax. Send Nsf Used to set whether to enable nonstandard capacity. Used to set supported fax protocols, the value of this parameter can be any of the followings: Fax Protocol Nonstandard-compatible,T38, and its default value is T38. High Speed Used to specify the number of T38 high speed redundancy packets, its value ranges from 0 to 2; Redundancy 0 by default. Low Speed Used to set the number of T38 low speed redundancy packets, its value ranges from 2 to 5; 0 by Redundancy default. Used to set the mode of interworking with other devices, the value of this parameter can either Support Mode be rtp or vt; rtp by default.

Fill in or choose relevant parameter values in the three attribute tabs, and click the <OK> button to complete POTS voice entity operation.

II. Deleting POTS voice entity
Choose a line of data from Figure 22-14, and click <Delete> to delete POTS voice entity upon confirmation.

III. Configuring POTS voice entity
Select a line of data from Figure 22-14 and click the <Config…> button. The "Config Voice Entity" window will pop up, which is similar to the "Add a Voice Entity" window. For the parameter meanings, please refer to Table 22-8, Table 22-9 and 0. Modify the relevant parameters, and then click the <OK> button to complete the POTS voice entity configuration.

22.3.2 VOIP Voice Entity Configuration
When you switch to the "VOIP Voice Entity" attribute tab, the configuration window is shown in the following figure:

22-20

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-18 Voice Entity Information (VOIP) configuration window

To configure VOIP voice entity is to relate telephone numbers with IP addresses.

I. Adding VOIP voice entity
Click the <Add…> button in Figure 22-18 to pop up the "Add a Voice Entity" window, as shown in the figure below:

22-21

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-19 Add VOIP Voice Entity (Common) window

The figure lists the basic information required for the VOIP voice entity to be added. The parameter meanings are given in the following table: Table 22-11 Description of VOIP Voice Entity (Common) parameters
Name Description

Voice Entity ID As the unique expression of the set entity, its value range is 1~231-1. Telephone Number Used to indicate remote telephone numbers. Used to technology prefix, the value of this parameter can either be any of the numbers 0 to Technology Prefix 9 or "#". Used to set routing type, the value of this parameter can be any of the following: IPV4,RAS Session Target and Unknown; Unknown by default. Fast Connect Used to set whether to enable fast connection. Tunnel Used to set whether to enable tunnel, which is valid only when fast connection is enabled.

The two attribute tabs "Advanced" and "IP FAX" are totally the same as POTS voice entity. For relevant parameter meanings, please refer to Table 22-9 and 0. Fill in or choose relevant parameter values in the three attribute tabs, and click the <OK> button to add POTS voice entity.

22-22

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

II. Deleting VOIP voice entity
Choose a line of data from Figure 22-18, and click <Delete> to delete POTS voice entity upon confirmation.

III. Configuring VOIP voice entity
Select a line of data from Figure 22-14 and click the <Config…> button. The "Config Voice Entity" window will pop up, which is similar to the "Add a Voice Entity" window. For the parameter meanings, please refer to Table 22-8, Table 22-9 and 0. Modify the relevant parameters, and then click the <OK> button to complete the POTS voice entity configuration.

22.4 Voice AAA Information
Double click the function code [Voice Management/Voice AAA Information] in the function tree, and the "Voice AAA Information" configuration window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-20 Voice AAA Information (AAA Attribute)

22.4.1 AAA Attribute Configuration
AAA Attribute Configuration window is shown in Figure 22-20 with the meaning of its parameters in the following table:

22-23

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Table 22-12 Description of AAA att7ribute
Name AAA Enable Client Type Enable VoIP Authentication Enable VoIP Authorization Enable VoIP Accounting Description Used to set whether to enable AAA function. Used to set client type, the value of this parameter can be any of the followings: huawei, nonstandard-compatible-vsa, nonstandard-compatible-overload and ietf-rfc; huawei by default. Used to set whether to enable one-stage dialing voice authentication. Used to set whether to enable one-stage dialing voice authorization. Valid only when VoIP Authentication is enabled Used to whether to enable voice accounting.

AAA information configured here is all related to voice function. Modify the parameter to be configured, and click <Config> to complete AAA attribute configuration.

22.4.2 Local User Configuration
When you switch to "Local User" attribute tab, the configuration window is shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-21 "Voice AAA Information (Local User)" configuration window

The above configuration window lists the information about configured local users. The three buttons at the bottom of this window <Add…>, <Delete> and <Modify Password...> are used for relevant configurations.

I. Adding a user
Click <Add…> and enter the username and password to be added in the popup "Add a Local User" window. Click the <OK> button in the window to add the user.

22-24

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

II. Deleting a user
Select a line of data in Figure 22-21. Click <Delete> to delete the user upon confirmation.

III. Changing user password
Select a line of data in Figure 22-21. Click <Modify Password…>, and enter a new password in the popup window "Modify User Password". Click <OK> to modify the user password.

22.4.3 Access Number Configuration
When you switch to the attribute tab "Access Number", the configuration window is shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-22 Voice AAA Information (Access Number)

The above configuration window lists the information about configured access numbers. The three buttons <Add…>, <Delete> and <Modify Password...> at the bottom of this window are used for relevant configurations.

I. Adding an access number
Click the <Add…> button to pop up the "Add a access number" window, as shown in the figure below:

22-25

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-23 Add Access Number window

The meanings of parameters in the window are given in the table below: Table 22-13 Description of Access Number parameters
Name Access Number Description

Used to set access number for AAA client, this parameter can be any character from 0 to 9. Dial-two Authentication Used to set whether to enable dial-two voice authentication. Used to set whether to enable dial-two voice authorization. When dial-two voice Dial-two Authorization authentication is not enabled, this option cannot be started either. Used to choose dial-two process, the value of this parameter can be either Card Number Dial-two Process or Caller Number; Card Number by default. Used to set the number of card digits, this parameter ranges from 1 to 31; 12 by default. Card Digit This option is valid only when "Card Number" is selected. Used to set the number of password digits, the value range of this parameter is 1~16; 6 by Password Digit default. This option is valid only when "Card Number" is selected. Used to specify redialing times, the value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 10; 3 by Redial Times default. This option is valid only when "Card Number" is selected.

Fill in or select relevant parameter values, and then click <OK> to add the access number.

II. Deleting an access number
Select a line of data in Figure 22-22. Click <Delete> to delete the access number upon configuration.

22-26

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

III. Configuring acess number
Select a line of data in Figure 22-22. Click <Config…>, and modify the relevant parameters in the popup "Config access number" window (all parameters except the access number can be modified). Click the <OK> button to finish configuring the access number.

22.5 GK Client Information
GateKeeper (GK) is a H.323 entity, which provides functions like address translation, access grant, bandwidth control and management, area management, security check, call control signaling and call management to LAN or WAN H.323 terminal, GW or some multipoint control units (MCU). Sometimes, it also provides functions such as route control and charging. For the calls in a GK-managed area, GK not only controls call service but also serves as a central control point. Depending on the composition of an entity that implements all GK functions, there are Client and Server. Normally, GK Client entity takes a router as its hardware carrier, so that GK Server can provide services such as address translation, access grant, bandwidth management and management of router’s IP voice gateway to the router’s IP voice gateway by interacting with GK Server via RAS (Registration Admission and Status) message. At present, Quidway series routers only provide GK Client functions. Double click the function node [Voice Management/GK Client Information] in the function tree, and the "GK Client Information" configuration window will pop up, as shown in the figure below:

22-27

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-24 "GK Client Information" configuration window

The meanings of parameters in the figure are given in the table below: Table 22-14 Description of GK Client parameters
Name GK Client Status Description

Used to set whether to enable GK, the value of this parameter can either be Enable or Disable; Disable by default. Interface Used to set a gateway interface used to connect GK. IP Address Used to display the interface IP address Gateway ID Used to set gateway ID. Gateway Technology Used to set technology prefix of the gateway, the value of this parameter can be a Prefix character within the range of 0~9, #,; with this technology prefix, GK identifies gateway types. A gateway can be configured with 30 prefixes, separated by ";". The prefix may contain a maximum of 31 characters. Gatekeeper ID Used to set GK’s ID. Gatekeeper IP Address Used to set IP address of GK. TCP Port Used to set GK’s port number.

22-28

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Modify the parameters to be configured, and then click the <Config> button to complete GK Client configuration.

22.6 Voice Call Information
Voice Call Information lists the current information and history information relating to the ongoing call. Double click the function node [Voice Management/Voice Call Information] in the function tree, and the "Voice Call Information" window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-25 Voice Call Information (Active Calling Information

Choose a line of data from the figure. Click the <Detail…> button, and the "Active Calling Details" window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

22-29

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-26 "Active Calling Details" window

When you switch to the attribute tab "Call History Information", the window is shown in the following figure:

22-30

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-27 "Voice Call Information (Call History Information)" window

Choose a line of data from the figure. Click the <Detail…> button, the "Call History Details" window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

22-31

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-28 Call History Details (Common Information) window

The "Call History Details" window contains three attribute tabs: "Common Information", "VOIP Information" and "PSTN Information". When you switch to the last two attribute tabs, a window will appear, as shown in the following figure:

22-32

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-29 Call History Details (VOIP Information) window

Figure 22-30 Call History Details (PSTN Information) window

22-33

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

22.7 H.323 Call Statistics
This function is used to count IPP H225 messages, IPP H245 messages and IPP RAS contained in H.323 calls in real time. Double click the function node [Voice Management/H.323 Call Statistics] in the function tree, and the "H.323 Call Statistics" window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 22-31 H.323 Call Statistics window

The buttons on the left side are <Select Items>, <Bar>, <Plot>, <Exporting Data>, <Importing Data>, <Properties> respectively from top down.

I. Selecting monitor item
Click <Select Items>, and the "Select Monitor Item" window will pop up, as shown in the following figure:

22-34

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Figure 22-32 Select Monitor Item window

As shown in the above figure, choose a message group from the "Group" drop box, and then choose the item to be monitored from the list of monitor items. Click <OK> and return to the "H.323 Call Statistics" window to see data curves, which vary with time, and the corresponding legend lists. The monitor items available for choice are shown in the following table:

22-35

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Table 22-15 List of H.323 Call Statistics monitor items
Monitor item group Sent Setups Sent CallProceedings Sent Alertings Sent Connects Sent ReleaseCompletes Sent FacilityUserInputs Sent FacilityTCSRequests Sent FacilityTCSAcks Sent FacilityTCSRejects Sent FacilityOLCRequests Sent FacilityOLCAcks Sent FacilityOLCRejects Sent FacilityMSDRequests Sent FacilityMSDAcks Sent FacilityMSDRejects Sent FacilityCLCRequests Sent FacilityCLCAcks Sent FacilityStartH245s Sent ErrorH225Msgs Received Setups Received CallProceedings Received Alertings Received Connects Received ReleaseCompletes Received Progresses Received FacilityTCSRequests Received FacilityTCSAcks Received FacilityTCSRejects Received FacilityOLCRequersts Received FacilityOLCAcks Received FacilityOLCRejects Received FacilityMSDRequests Received FacilityMSDAcks Received FacilityMSDRejects Received FacilityCLCRequests Received FacilityCLCAcks Received UnknownH225Msgs Monitor item

H225 Statistics

22-36

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

Monitor item group Sent TCSRequests Sent TCSAcks Sent TCSRejects Sent MSDRequests Sent MSDAcks Sent MSDRejects Sent OLCRequests Sent OLCAcks Sent OLCRejects Sent CLCRequests Sent CLCAcks Sent UserInputs Sent ErrorH245Msgs Received TCSRequests Received TCSAcks Received TCSRejects Received MSDRequests Received MSDAcks Received MSDRejects Received OLCRequests Received OLCAcks Received OLCRejects Received CLCRequests Received CLCAcks Received UserInputs Received UnknownH245Msgs Sent GRQs Sent RRQs Sent ARQs Sent BRQs Sent DRQs Sent URQs Sent UCFs Sent IRRs Sent ErrorRASMsgs Received GCFS Received RCFS Received ACFS Received BCFS Received DCFS Received GRJS Received RRJS Received ARJS Received BRJS Received DRJS Received URJS Received UCFs Received URJs Received IRQs Received UnknownRASMsgs

Monitor item

H245 Statistics

RAS Statistics

22-37

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 22 Voice Management

II. Graphical display switching
Click the buttons <Bar> and <Plot> to switch the graphical display. By default, the graphical display mode is "Plot".

III. Data export and import
Statistical data can be exported as disk files, while exported data files can be imported, shown in the form of graphics. Click <Exporting Data> or <Importing Data> to export or import data.

IV. Modifying real-time statistics properties
Click <Properties>, and select the values of parameters to be modified "Interval" and "Max Samples" in the pop up "Properties" window. Click <OK> to modify properties.

22-38

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Chapter 23 POS Access Management
POS (Point of Sale) refers to the card-punching service, which is widely used in such places as supermarket and gas station. This service is used to access POS terminals (at supermarkets, gas stations etc.) to a bank’s card accounting system, so that the user can pay for goods or service through his/her bank card. As the society gets more and more information-oriented, POS terminal equipment is widely used in the sectors ranging from business, finance to tax, and developed rapidly. Earlier POS terminal equipment was unique to each bank, so a card of one bank cannot be used on POS terminals of other banks. The access service technology based on shared POS has solved this problem effectively, so that several types of bank cards can be used on the same POS. Based on a powerful processing platform equipped with professional router, Huawei’s POS access solution provides a series of IP solutions, featuring high density, manageability and maintainability with multiple access modes and multiple applications/hosts. Such POS supports dialup access, RS232 point-to-point access, and master POS access over RS485. It supports serial port stream and TCP/IP for communication with the front end processor. Quidview NM system implements POS Access Management functions for medium and low end routers, including POS Access Common Information, POS Access Port Management, POS App Port Management, POS Application Management, POS Map Management and FCM Port Management. These parts will be described in detail below.

23.1 POS Access Common Information
This function is used to browse and configure POS access common information on medium and low end routers, and reset statistical information on POS access port and POS applications. Double click the function node [POS Access Management/POS Access Management] on the function tree in the function window. Open the window "POS Access Management", as shown in Figure 23-1:

23-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Figure 23-1 "POS Access Management" browse and configuration window

The meaning of each parameter is described in Table 23-1: Table 23-1 POS access comm. information
Content Enable POS Enable POS Trap Open Access POS Debug Switch Open App Debug Switch FCM Answer Time FCM Trade Time FCM Packet Interval Description Enable POS access server. Used to send SNMP alarms related to POS access to the NM system when the equipment is running. By default, no such a alarm is sent. Open Debug switch for all POS access ports. By default, Debug switch is disabled. Open Debug switch for all POS applications. By default, Debug switch is disabled. As answer time of dialing via FCM port, its value ranges from 500 to 2000ms; 500ms by default. As timeout value of a single POS transaction, it ranges from 30000 to 1200000ms; 60000ms by default. As timeout value of POS response packet, its value ranges from 3500 to 10000ms; 5000ms by default.

Users may modify part of the parameters according to needs, and then click <Config> to make configurations. If the user clicks <Refresh>, the system will read POS access common information from the device again and update information displayed in the window. The <Reset Statistics> button is used to reset statistical information counters for the current device’s POS access port and POS applications, so as to count corresponding packets again starting from zero. After such click, conformation information will pop up. Upon confirmation, statistical information will be reset.

23-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

23.2 POS Access Port Management
Before used as POS access port, router interfaces must be configured as POS access ports. At present, the following interfaces on Quidway series routers can be configured as POS access ports: asynchronous interface, AUX interface, synchronous/asynchronous interface (in asynchronous working mode) and FCM (Fast Connect Modem) board interface. This function can be used to browse, add or delete information at the POS access ports of medium and low end routers, and configure part of the information.

23.2.1 Browse POS Access Port
Choose the function tree’s function node [POS Access Management/POS Access Management] in the function window. Open the "POS Access Management" window, and select "POS Access Port" tab, as shown in Figure 23-2:

Figure 23-2 Window for browsing POS access port information

The parameters are described in Table 23-2: Table 23-2 Description of parameters for browsing POS access port information
Name ID Description A unique ID must be allocated to each POS access port. While adding a POS access port, the user may specify its ID, which ranges from 0 to 127.

Access Port Name of this POS access port. Connect Status The physical status of this POS access port. There are four types in all: noset, down, up and ok. Debug Switch The debug information switch of POS access port. 23-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

In the "POS Access Management" window, click the <Refresh> button, and the system will read POS access port data and refresh the display information.

23.2.2 Add POS Access Port
In the "POS Access Management" window, click the <Add...> button, and the "Add POS Access Port" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 23-3:

Figure 23-3 Add POS Access Port window

Enter POS access port number in this window. The "Access Port" drop box lists all device interfaces, which can be configured as POS access ports. Users may select an appropriate port according to needs. Finally, choose Debug switch status and click <OK> to add a new POS port. If your click <Cancel>, the system will do nothing but return to the "POS Access Port" window.

23-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Caution: 1) POS access port number ranges from 0 to 127. The number you enter cannot be an existing POS access port number. It is allowed to add a maximum of 128 such access ports. 2) The port selected in the list of POS access ports must work in asynchronous mode and does not stay in other application modes, such as POS application port and terminal access port. Otherwise, a message will appear indicating the configuration has failed.

23.2.3 Delete POS Access Port
In the "POS Access Management" window, select one or more lines in the table, and click <Delete> in the window to delete the selected POS access port(s). When the port fails to be deleted, the system will give a message indicating deletion failure.

23.2.4 Config POS Access Port
In the window "POS Access Management", select one line of the table, click <Config...> in the window, and the "Config POS Access Port" will pop up, as shown in Figure 23-4:

Figure 23-4 Config POS Access Port window

A user is only allowed to modify the Debug switch status of the current POS access port in the "Config POS Access Port" window. After modification, click <OK> to finish configuration. If your click <Cancel>, the system will do nothing but return to the "POS Access Management" window.

23-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

23.2.5 Monitoring Statistical Information of POS Access Port
Select one line of the table in the "POS Access Management" window, and click <Monitor...>, the "POS Access Port Monitor" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 23-5:

Figure 23-5 Window for monitoring statistical information of POS access port

The monitoring items are described in Table 23-3: Table 23-3 Description of POS access port items to be monitored
Name Received Packets Received Error Packets POS Map Error Packets Buffed Packets Discarded Packets Description The total number of packets received from this access port. The switching packet data that cannot be identified as complete, such as check sum error or incomplete packet. The number of packets whose correspondence cannot be found. The number of packets in the buffer to be allocated to this POS access port. The number of packets that cannot be sent out and thus are discarded after the application packets the router receives are distributed to this POS access port for such reasons as link disconnection, full buffer or failure to set the interface.

23-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

23.3 POS App Port Management
When POS access router and UNIX front end processor are connected in asynchronous mode, the interface must be configured to work in POS application mode. At present, the following interfaces on Quidway series routers can be configured as POS interface ports: asynchronous interface, AUX interface, synchronous/asynchronous interface (working in asynchronous mode). This function is used to view, add or delete information of POS application ports on medium and low end routers. Select the function node [POS Access Management/POS Access Management] of the function tree in the function window. Open the "POS Access Management" window, and select the "POS App Port" attribute tab, as shown in Figure 23-6:

Figure 23-6 POS App Port information window

The "Port Available" list in the left part shows the ports available for the current device, while the "Port Selected" list in the right part shows the POS application ports available on the current device. Choose a port from "Port Selected" list, and click the ">>" button to move this port to the "Port Selected" list, i.e. add a POS application port. Likewise, click "<<" and you may move a port in the "Port Selected" list to the "Port Available" list, that is, delete a POS application port. After that, click the <Config> button to make configurations. If you fail to configure a port, a message will appear indicating the configuration has failed. If you click the <Refresh> button, the system will read information on POS application port again from the device, and update the information in the window.

23-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Caution: 1) It is allowed to configure 128 POS application ports at most. 2) The interface to be configured as a POS application port must work in asynchronous mode and does not stay in any other application mode, such as POS application port and terminal access port. Otherwise, a message will appear indicating the configuration has failed.

23.4 POS Application Management
POS access router and UNIX front end processor are connected in two ways: streaming mode and TCP/IP mode. The commands used to configure POS application in these two ways are different. The connection with UNIX front end processor via Ethernet is called TCP/IP connection, while the connection with UNIX front end processor via asynchronous serial port is known as streaming mode. In whatever connection mode, it is required to configure POS application connected to UNIX front end processor for the terminal. This function can be used to browse, add, delete or configure POS application information on medium and low end routers, and monitor statistical information about an application.

23.4.1 Browse POS Applications
Select the function node [POS Access Management/POS Access Management] from the function tree in the function window. Open the window "POS Access Management", and select "POS Application" attribute tab, as shown in Figure 23-7:

23-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Figure 23-7 Window for browsing POS Application

The parameters are described in Table 23-4: Table 23-4 Description of parameter for browsing POS application
Name Application ID Description A unique ID should be allocated to each POS application. While adding a POS application, the user can specify such ID, which ranges from 0 to 31.

POS access router is connected to UNIX front end processor in two ways: streaming mode and TCP mode. Mode Streaming mode requires no IP address or port number but asynchronous port configuration; TCP application requires IP address and port number but no asynchronous port configuration. Application connection is in the following 7 states: noset: TCP application not configured; down: asynchronous application "down"; up: asynchronous application "up"; Status ok: synchronous application "ok", indicating "up" state of successful authentication; kept: TCP application not connected. linking: connecting TCP application. linked: connected TCP application. App Port Physical port of POS application in streaming mode IP Address Application IP address in TCP mode TCP Port Application port number in TCP mode, ranging from 1 to 65535 Source IP address of TCP application: when several terminals use a single TCP connection via terminal access server to communicate with host application, it is sometimes necessary to hide the real IP address for uplink TCP connection of the terminal access server for the sake of security or Source IP other considerations, and set another IP address as required; at the same time, in order for link Address backup, the terminal access server enables the function of TCP source address binding. TCP source address binding works in this way: first configure an IP address at a router interface not in use, and use that IP address as the IP for uplink TCP connection of the terminal server. Debug Switch Debug information switch of current POS application.

23-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

If you click <Refresh> in "POS Access Management" window, the system will read POS application data from the device and refresh its display information.

23.4.2 Add POS Application
Click <Add> in the "POS Access Management" window, and the "Add POS Application" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 23-8:

Figure 23-8 Add POS Application window

Enter POS application ID in this window and select an application mode. If you select TCP/IP Mode, you need to enter application IP address and TCP port ID; if you select "Flow Mode", you need to choose a port from the "App Port" drop box, which lists the interfaces that are configured as POS application ports. A user may select an appropriate port according to his needs; source address of TCP application is only configured in case of TCP application mode but it can also be null. During configuration, click the button on the right of TCP application source address edit box, and the window "Set Source IP Address for Application" will pop up. The list in this window shows the current IP addresses configured with the device. Choose one of them and click <OK>; finally, choose Debug switch status and click <OK> to add a new POS application. If you click the <Cancel> button, the system will do nothing but return to the "POS Access Management" window.

23-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Caution: 1) POS application ID ranges from 0 to 31. It is not allowed to enter any number beyond the above range in the edit box and the number you enter cannot be the same as an existing POS application ID. A maximum of 32 POS applications can be added. 2) When you select TCP mode, you need to enter the application IP address and TCP port ID; when you choose streaming mode, you need to select an application port; otherwise, it is impossible to add an application. 3) When you select TCP mode, the combination of IP address and TCP port ID cannot be identical to an existing POS application. Otherwise, a message will appear indicating a failure. 4) Binding TCP connection source IP is configured only when the state of this application is without TCP connection. Otherwise, the system will give a message indicating the configuration has failed.

23.4.3 Delete POS Application
Select one or more lines of the table in the "POS Access Management" window, and click the <Delete> button to delete the selected POS application. When the application is not deleted, the system will give a message indicating the deletion failure.

23.4.4 Config POS Application
Select a line of the table in the "POS application" window, click <Config...> in the window, and the "Configure POS application" window will pop up. To configure a POS application is similar to add an application, but it is not allowed to edit or modify POS application ID in the configuration window. After modifying each parameter, click <OK> to complete configuration. If you click <Cancel>, the system will do nothing but return to the "POS Access Management" window.

23.4.5 Monitoring Statistical Information of POS Application
Select one line of the table in the "POS Access Management" window, click <Monitor...> in the window, and the "POS Application Monitor" will pop up, as shown in Figure 23-9:

23-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Figure 23-9 POS Application Monitor window

The monitoring items are described in Table 23-5: Table 23-5 Description of POS monitor items
Name Received Packets Received Error Packets Received Packets can not be sent to port Buffed Packets Discarded Packets Description Total number of packets this application receives. The switching packet data that cannot be identified as complete, such as check sum error or incomplete packet. The number of packets whose access port correspondence cannot be found with distribution processing errors. The number of packets that are sent to the front end processor via this application, but cannot be sent out and thus are discarded for such reasons as link disconnection, full buffer or failure to set this application. The number of packets that exist in this application’s sending cache.

23.5 POS Map Management
POS multi-application refers to POS access function, by which the packets on one POS equipment can be sent to different POS applications depending on the destination address. For TCP/IP connection, an application ID is made up of two parts: IP address and port ID. In other words, different applications can either be ones with different IP addresses or those with identical IP address but different port IDs. Such a packet can be sent to an application depending on the exchange packet’s destination address number and the mapping table configured. If a packet’s destination address number
23-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

corresponds to an item in the mapping table, the packet will be sent to the corresponding application; if such matched item is not found, the packet will be sent to the default application. This function is used to browse, add, delete or configure POS multi-application mapping information on a medium or low end router.

23.5.1 Browsing POS Map
Select the function node [POS Access Management/POS Access Management] on the function tree of the function window, open the window "POS Access Management" and select the "POS Map" attribute tab, as shown in Figure 23-10:

Figure 23-10 POS Map browsing window

The parameters are described in Table 23-6: Table 23-6 Description of parameters used to browse POS multi-application mapping
Name Destination Code Description Packets sent from a POS all contain a package destination address. These packets are sent to different POS applications via destination code. While adding POS multi-application map, a user may specify such code, which ranges from 0 to 65535.

Application ID The ID of destination POS application, which ranges from 0 to 31.

23-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

If you click <Refresh> in the "POS Access Management" window, the system will read POS multi-application mapping data from the device again and refresh its display information.

23.5.2 Add POS Map
Click <Add...> in the "POS Access Management" window, and the "Add POS Map Item" window will pop up, as shown in Figure 23-11:

Figure 23-11 Add POS Map Item window

Edit in this window. If you select "Default", you need not enter the destination code. Otherwise, you need to enter a number and then the POS application ID, and click <OK> to add a new POS Map. If you click <Cancel>, the system will do nothing but return the window "POS Access Management".

Caution: 1) In case the current device has no default application, the “Add” window will display "Default" check box. Otherwise, such box will not appear. 2) It is allowed to add 32 POS multi-application maps at most. 3) The application ID can either be an existent one or not created.

23-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

23.5.3 Delete POS Map
Choose one or more lines of the table in the window "POS Access Management", and click <Delete> in the window to delete the selected POS multi-application map. When you fail to delete the map, the system will give a message indicating the deletion failure.

23.5.4 Config POS Map
Select one line of the table in the "POS Access Management" window, click <Config...> and the window "Config POS Map Item" will pop up. To configure POS multi-application map is similar to add one such map, but it is not allowed to edit or modify the destination code in the configuration window but you can only edit the application ID. After modification, click <OK> to complete the configuration. If you click <Cancel>, the system will do nothing but return to the window "POS Access Management".

23.6 FCM Port Management
During actual card punching, after responding to the operation, the POS equipment will dial up to fast connection Modem (FCM) on a Quidway router in a synchronous or asynchronous way using its built-in Modem. After a communication link is set up between the POS equipment and the router, the router will be connected to the bank’s front end processor and background host via WAN or in a direct way, so that the POS unit at the business end is connected to the bank’s card accounting system. As POS access service is unique, which requires the interface board to enable fast dialup connection, but an ordinary PC Modem at present cannot meet this requirement (its response takes 10 to 20 seconds). FCM (Fast Connect Modem) board developed for Quidway series routers is a Modem capable of fast handshake tailor-made for POS dialup access. This board is able to dial a number and create a link in synchronous/asynchronous mode in a very short time. This function is designed to browse data information on FCM port of medium and low end routers and clear the data information on FCM port through configuration. Select the function node [POS Access Management/POS Access Management] on the function tree in the function window, open the window "POS Access Management" and select the "FCM Port" attribute tab, as shown in Figure 23-12:

23-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 23 POS Access Management

Figure 23-12 FCM Port information window

The table is designed for the user to browse the times of disconnection due to timeout and the times of failed handshake negotiation that occur to all FCM ports of the current device. Click the <Reset> button to reset the statistical information counter for FCM ports of the current device, and restart counting over again.

23-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 24 NDEC Management

Chapter 24 NDEC Management
Quidway series modularized routers can implement hardware data

encryption/decryption operations using NDECs (Network Data Encryption Cards, modularized hardware cards). This eliminates the effect on a router's performance by the VRP principal software's processing on the IPSec and hence improves the working efficiency of the router. The encryption/decryption procedure with the participation of an NDEC is as follows: The router sends the data to be encrypted or decrypted to the NDEC that will then perform encryption/decryption operation on the data and add/remove encrypted frame headers to/from the data. After data encryption/decryption, the NDEC sends the data to the router for forwarding. User data processing by multiple NDECs: Each Quidway modularized router supports several NDECs. In the mode of polling, the host software sends user data to several normal NDECs for processing, thus implementing synchronous processing of user data on several NDECs and accelerating data encryption/decryption. When you apply the IPSec on NDECs, if all the NDECs on a router are abnormal, IPSec processing will abort. In this case, if host backup has been enabled and the IPSec module of the VRP principal software supports the encryption/authentication algorism used by the NDECs, the IPSec module will replace the NDECs for IPSec processing, thus implementing NDEC backup.

24.1 NDEC Management
The NDEC management page displays the number of activated IPSec connections on a router and provides host backup function management. In the function window, double click on [NDEC/NDEC] node on the function tree to open the "NDEC" window, as shown in Figure 24-1:

24-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 24 NDEC Management

Figure 24-1 NDEC Management

Various parameters are described in Table 24-1: Table 24-1 NDEC management parameters
Content NDEC Connection Backup Description The number of currently activated IPSec connections Specified whether to enable host backup function, including 0 (disable) and 1 (enable)

Click <Enable Backup> to enable the function.

24.2 NDEC Information
As shown in Figure 24-2, the NDEC information page provides such functions as clearing statistics, resetting NDEC, synchronizing clock and NDEC logging.

24-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 24 NDEC Management

Figure 24-2 NDEC information

Various parameters are described in Table 24-2: Table 24-2 NDEC information parameters
Content Card Slot InPac OutPac InByte OutByte DropPac Status Hardware Version Software Version CPLD Version Discarded Packets In Unit Time Description Slot number of the NDEC The number of received packets The number of sent packets The number of received octets The number of sent octets The number of discarded packets Current status of the NDEC Hardware version of the NDEC Software version of the NDEC CPLD version of the NDEC The number of packets discarded in a time unit

24.2.1 Clearing Statistics
This function is used to clear the related statistics in Figure 24-2, including InPac, OutPac, InByte, OutByte and DropPac. Select a line of NDEC data from the interface and click <ClearStatic>. After confirmation, you can clear the related data.

24.2.2 Resetting NDEC
If finding an NDEC work abnormally, you can reset it so that it can recover. Resetting an NDEC will return its configuration to the initial values and have the host resend the configuration and SA (Security Association) information to the NDEC.

24-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 24 NDEC Management

In Figure 24-2, select a line and click <Reset>. After confirmation, you can reset the NDEC.

24.2.3 Synchronizing Clock
Each NDEC has a clock. To synchronize an NDEC clock with the host clock, the host sends clock synchronization command to each NDEC periodically. This function enables you to synchronize an NDEC's clock manually. In Figure 24-2, select a line and click <SynTime>. After confirmation, you can synchronize the NDEC clock.

24.2.4 NDEC Logging
By default, NDEC logging function is disabled, and you can use the functions provided in Figure 24-2 to enable or disable the logging function or to clear NDEC logs. Select a line and click <OpenLog>. After confirmation, you will enable the NDEC logging function. Click <CloseLog> and confirm to disable the NDEC logging function. Click <ClearLog> and confirm to clear the existent NDEC logs.

24.3 Router SA Information
This function displays the SA information configured on a router, as show in Figure 24-3:

Figure 24-3 SA information

24-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 24 NDEC Management

Various parameters are described in Table 24-3: Table 24-3 SA information parameters
Content Peer IP Security Protocol SPI Encyrpt Auth Local IP Life(KByte) Life(Second) ByCard Negotiate SA Mode Exp_bytes Soft_bytes Exp_timeout Soft_timeout Description The IP address of the peer end The security protocol used by the NDEC Security policy identifier The encryption algorism adopted by the NDEC The authentication algorism adopted by the NDEC Local IP address Current life cycle in KByte of the SA Current life cycle in second of the SA Whether to use NDEC Includes manual negotiation (Manual) and IKE negotiation (isakmp) Hard timeout in KByte Soft timeout in KByte Hard timeout in second Soft timeout in second

24.4 NDEC IKE SA Information
This function displays the IKE SA information of an NDEC on a router, as shown in Figure 24-4:

Figure 24-4 NDEC IKE SA information

Various parameters are described in Table 24-4: Table 24-4 NDEC IKE SA information parameters
Content Conn-ID The identifier of the security path 24-5 Description

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Peer IP Phase

Chapter 24 NDEC Management Description

Flag Domain

The peer IP address of the SA The status of the SA: NONE: The SA is being established. READY: The SA has been successfully established. STAYALIVE: The initiator of the SA, which will reinitiate a negotiation in the case of soft timeout (a new negotiation is initiated before the end of the SA's life). REPLACED: The SA has been replaced by a new one, is not in use currently and will be deleted 10 seconds later. FADING: Though soft timeout occurs, the SA is still in use till a new SA is negotiated or hard timeout (the SA live through its whole life till timeout), when it will be deleted. The phase of the SA, including unknown, phase1 and phase2 The explanation domain of SA, including unknown and ipsec

Select a line and click <Delete>. After confirmation, you can delete the information.

24.5 Router IKE Policy Information
This function displays the IKE policy information of a router, as shown in Figure 24-5:

Figure 24-5 IKE policy information

Various parameters are described in Table 24-5:

24-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 24 NDEC Management

Table 24-5 IKE policy information parameters
Content Priority Encrypt Hash Auth DH Group Lifetime Description IKE policy priority of the router IKE policy encryption algorism of the router IKE policy authentication algorism of the router Whether to use pre-share-key authentication The group identifier of the DH The life cycle in second of the IKE SA

24.6 Router Security Policy Information
This function displays the security policy information of a router, as shown in Figure 24-6:

Figure 24-6 Security policy information

Various parameters are described in Table 24-6: Table 24-6 Security policy information parameters
Content Name Priority NegMode ACL ID Peer IP Transfer Name Lifetime Lifesize Local IP Name Used In AH SPI In ESP SPI Out AH SPI Description The name of the security policy The priority of the security policy The negotiation mode of the security policy ACL ID matching the policy Peer IP address corresponding to the policy Policy transference mode name Life cycle in second of the security connection Life cycle in KByte of the security connection Local IP address The name of the interface applying the policy SPI of the packet stream received by the AH SPI of the packet stream received by the ESP SPI of the packet stream sent by the AH

24-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Out ESP SPI In AH Hex Key String In ESP Hex Key String In ESP AuthenHexKeyString In AH StringKeyString In ESP StringKeyString Out AH HexKeyString Out ESP CipherHexKeyString Out ESP AuthenHexKeyString Out AH StringKeyString Out ESP StringKeyString

Chapter 24 NDEC Management Description

SPI of the packet stream sent by the ESP Key of the packet stream received by the hexadecimal AH Key of the packet stream received by the hexadecimal ESP Authentication key of the packet stream received by the hexadecimal ESP Key of the packet stream received by the AH in character string mode Key of the packet stream received by the ESP in character string mode Key of the packet stream sent by the hexadecimal AH Key of the packet stream sent by the hexadecimal ESP Authentication key of the packet stream sent by the hexadecimal ESP Key of the packet stream sent by the AH in character string mode Key of the packet stream sent by the ESP in character string mode

24.7 Transform Mode Security Information
This function displays the transform mode security information of a router, as shown in Figure 24-7:

Figure 24-7 Transform mode security information

Various parameters are described in Table 24-7: Table 24-7 Transform mode security information parameters
Content Transform Name Transform Mode Transform Protocol AH ESP-Encrypt ESP-Auth IsCardTransform Description Name of transform Includes transport and tunnel Protocol used for authentication/encryption AH protocol (AH authentication algorism) ESP (encryption algorism) ESP (authentication algorism) Whether to use NDEC

24-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management
Terminal access servers are primarily applied to the systems operating in host-terminal mode, such as banking service system. It accesses the terminals residing at different business sites to the host in the central equipment room over IP networks. Using virtual terminal, it implements smooth transition from multiplexer access to IP network access. As this transition is transparence to customers, they do not need to change the existent applications.

25.1 Terminal Access Server Management
Terminal access server management includes the setting of general and debugging information of terminal applications. In the function window, double click on [Terminal Server/Terminal Server] node on the function tree to open the "Terminal Server" window, as shown in Figure 25-1:

Figure 25-1 Terminal application management

Information in this window falls into two types, general information and debugging information. Various parameters are described in Table 25-1:

25-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Table 25-1 Terminal application management parameters
Content Enable Tty Server Enable Trap Clear Statics Info Debug Tty Error Debug Tty Manager Description Enables or disables the terminal access server function on the router Sets whether to send Trap information from the server Clears the related statistics Sets whether to display the error information of the terminal applications Sets whether to display the management path information of the terminal applications

25.2 Terminal Access Application Management
Terminal access application management interface lists the configured terminal applications and the related statistics, as shown in Figure 25-2:

Figure 25-2 Terminal access application management

Various parameters are described in Table 25-2: Table 25-2 Terminal access application management parameters
Content App ID Description The application ID of the terminal server. Its value depends on the number of asynchronous serial interfaces on the device. If there are two available interfaces, it ranges from 0 to 7. If there is one available interface, it ranges from 0 to 3. The IP address of the UNIX host where the terminal server application resides TCP port of the UNIX host where the terminal server application resides, ranging from 1025 to 65535 Includes normal and special The name of the terminal server application The source IP address bound to the application Local port

App IP App Port App Type App Name4 Source IP Local Port

25-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Unix ID Server Status Socket Received Buffer Socket Sent Buffer Socket Received Bytes Socket Sent Bytes Last Received Time Last Sent Time Description

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

The index of the management path information Displays the connection status between the UNIX host and the router, including kept, linked and linking Related statistics of the terminal access application

I. Adding a terminal server application
In Figure 25-2, click <Add…> to open the "Add App" window, as shown in Figure 25-3:

Figure 25-3 Adding a terminal server application

Various parameters are described in Table 25-2. Click <…> following the "Source IP" edit box, and you will open the IP address window, as shown in Figure 25-4:

25-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-4 Selecting a source IP address

Select a line and click <OK> to finish the selection of source IP address. In Figure 25-3, click <OK> to finish the adding operation.

II. Deleting a terminal server application
In Figure 25-2, select one or more terminal server applications and click <Delete>. After confirmation, you will delete the related data.

III. Configuring a terminal server application
In Figure 25-2, select a terminal server application and click <Config…> to open the "Modify App" window, as shown in Figure 25-5:

25-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-5 Modifying a terminal server application

All the parameters except App ID are configurable. The meaning of various parameters is same as that in the adding window.

IV. Clearing statistics
In Figure 25-2, select one or more terminal server applications and click <Clear Statics>. After confirmation, you will clear the related statistics.

25.3 Physical Terminal and Virtual Terminal Management
On a terminal access server, a physical terminal (terminal) corresponds to an asynchronous port of a router. Each asynchronous port, when being properly configured, can be connected to a terminal over asynchronous cable or Modem. The terminal access server numbers all the connected physical terminals following the same rule. Currently, a router can support up to 32 terminals. On a terminal access server, you can configure up to 4 virtual terminals, each of which corresponds to a host application, for a single physical terminals. If there are several host applications specified on the terminal access server and you want to correlate a terminal with several applications and switch between different applications using hotkeys, you can configure several virtual terminals for the physical terminal and correlate them with the applications. The physical terminal and virtual terminal management interface is shown in Figure 25-6:

25-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-6 Physical terminal and virtual terminal management

Various parameters are described in Table 25-3: Table 25-3 Physical terminal and virtual terminal management parameters
Content Tty ID Vty ID Interface App ID Status Flow Control Description ID of the physical terminal. Its value depends on the number of interfaces supporting terminal access on the device. For example, if the number of such interfaces is 2, it ranges from 0 to 1. Virtual terminal ID ranging from 0 to 3 The interface supported by the device Application ID that subjects to the configuration of terminal access application management Current status of the physical terminal and its virtual terminal Flow control setting of the physical terminal and its virtual terminal

I. Adding a physical terminal and its virtual terminal
Click <Add…> to open the physical terminal and virtual terminal adding window, as shown in Figure 25-7:

25-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-7 Adding a physical terminal and its virtual terminal

Various parameters are described in Table 25-3. Enter various parameters and click <OK> to add a physical terminal and a virtual terminal.

Caution: If the adding fails and you are prompted "Config failed, please confirm the port selected is in async mode instead of pos access port, pos app port or any other ports", please run the "async mode protocol" command on the device in the proper interface mode.

II. Deleting a physical terminal and its virtual terminal
In Figure 25-6, select one or more lines and click <Delete>. After confirmation, you can delete the related information.

III. Configuring a physical terminal and its virtual terminal
In Figure 25-6, select a line and click <Config…> to open the physical terminal and virtual terminal modification window, as shown in Figure 25-8:

25-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-8 Modifying a physical terminal and its virtual terminal

The Tty ID and Vty ID are not configurable.

IV. Aborting a connection
This function is used abort the connections of a selected virtual terminal. In Figure 25-6, select a line and click <Disconnect>. After confirmation, you will abort the connections.

25.4 Physical Terminal Information
The physical terminal information interface displays the information of the physical terminals and its virtual terminals configured on a router, as shown in Figure 25-9:

Figure 25-9 Physical terminal information

25-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Various parameters are described in Table 25-4: Table 25-4 Physical terminal information parameters
Content TTY ID Buffer Size Auto Link Auto Close Link ConnPrint Delay Logo Print MenuKey1/2/3 Read Block RedrawKey1/2/3 ResetKey1/2/3 TCP No Delay RecvBufferSize SendBufferSize TestKey1/2/3 Buffer Rate TtyRecvBytes TtySendBytes TtyLastRecvTime TtyLastSendTime CurrentVty CurrentVtyRecv CurrentVtySend CurrentApp CurrentAppRecv CurrentAppSend Debug tty all Debug tty brief Debug tty socket Debug tty timestamp Debug tty tty Description Physical terminal ID that depends on the number of interfaces supporting terminal access. For example, if the number of such interfaces is 2, it ranges from 0 to 1. Buffer size ranging from 4096 to 204800 Connection auto creation time ranging from 5 seconds to 3600 seconds Connection auto closing time ranging from 5 seconds to 3600 seconds Includes english, chinese and none Ranges from 0 to 1200 seconds Whether to display terminal server Logo Hotkey for menu Reads the blocking mode of physical terminal data, including Set and noSet Hotkey for redrawing screen Hotkey for reset Sets whether to enable TCP delay Size of receiving buffer ranging from 512 to 16384 Size of sending buffer ranging from 512 to 16384 Hotkey for test Utilization rate of the buffer The number of octets received by the physical terminal The number of octets sent by the physical terminal Time when the physical terminal receives data the last time Time when the physical terminal sends data the last time Current virtual terminal ID The number of octets received by current virtual terminal The number of octets sent by current virtual terminal Current application ID The number of octets received by current application The number of octets sent by current application Sets whether to enable debugging Sets whether to enable brief information to be received/sent Sets whether to enable socket information to be received/sent Sets whether to log timestamp access information Sets whether to enable the physical terminal information to be received/sent

I. Configuring pyhsical terminal information
In Figure 25-9, select a line and click <Config…> to open the physical terminal information modification window, as shown in Figure 25-10:

25-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-10 Modifying physical terminal information

Various parameters are described in Table 25-4. Enter the parameters, click <OK> and confirm to finish the operation.

II. Setting hotkeys
In Figure 25-9, select a line and click <Set HotKey…> to open the "Set Hotkey" window, as shown in Figure 25-11:

25-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-11 Setting hotkey

Set the related hotkeys in the window.

III. Clearing statistics
In Figure 25-9, select a line and click <Clear Statistic>. After confirmation, you will clear the related statistics, including TtyRecvBytes, TtySendBytes, TtyLastRecvTime, TtyLastSendTime, CurrentAppSend. CurrentVtyRecv, CurrentVtySend, CurrentAppRecv and

25.5 Management Path Information
The management path information interface lists the information of the management paths configured on a router, as shown in Figure 25-12:

25-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 25 Terminal Server Management

Figure 25-12 Management path information

Various parameters are described in Table 25-5: Table 25-5 Management path information parameters
Content Unix Index Unix Socket ID Local IP Managed Apps Description Management path index Socket ID Local IP address The number of applications covered by the management path

25-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management
DLSW (Data Link Switch) is an implementation of SNA (a network protocol family promoted by IBM in 1970's, which completely corresponds to the OSI reference model) over TCP/IP. The DLSW technology is one of the solutions to SNA transmission cross WAN. The working principal of DLSW is illustrated in Figure 26-1:

Figure 26-1 Working principal of DLSW

As shown, the router running DLSW converts the LLC2 frames from a local SNA device to SSP frames that can be encapsulated in TCP packets and sends them to a remote device cross WAN over a TCP channel. The remote device converts the SSP frames to LLC2 frames again and sends them to the peer SNA device. In this case, the local terminal device thinks that the remote device resides on the same network. Different from transparent bridge, DLSW does not transparently transmit LLC2 frames to the peer end directly, but converts them to SSP frames so that they can be encapsulated in TCP packets. DLSW uses local response mechanism to reduce unnecessary data traffic (ACK and Keepalive frames) and to solve the problem of data link control timeout. With the DLSW technology, you can also implement SDLC transmission over TCP/IP in the following way: Convert packets of SDLC format to those of LLC2 format and communicate with the peer end via DLSW. In this way, DLSW also supports the interconnection between LAN and SDLC over different mediums.

26.1 DLSW Configuration
DLSW configuration includes general parameter configuration of the DLSW service. In the function window, double click on [DLSW Service Management/DLSW Service Management] node on the function tree to open the "DLSW Service Management" window, as shown in Figure 26-2:

26-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-2 DLSW Configuration

Various parameters are described in Table 26-1: Table 26-1 DLSW configuration parameters
Content Status Connection Timeout Local Pend Timeout Remote Pend Timeout Sna Cache Timeout Description Sets the status of the DLSW service to active or inactive Sets connection hole time in the range of 60ms to 60000ms Sets local timeout in the range of 1ms to 60000ms Sets remote timeout in the range of 1ms to 60000ms Sets address storage timeout of the buffer in the range of 1ms to 60000ms

Enter various parameters and click <Config> to finish the operation.

26.2 Local Peer

Caution: Before configuring local peer, you must set the status of DLSW to active.

This function configures the related parameters of local peer, and the interface is shown in Figure 26-3:

26-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-3 Local Peer

Various parameters are described in Table 26-2: Table 26-2 Local peer configuration parameters
Content Local Address Promiscuous Keepalive Interval Virtual Segment LF-Size Init Pacing Window Max Pacing Window Cost Description Sets the IP address of DLSW local peer Sets whether to enable an un-configured remote peer to establish a connection, including permit, forbid and unknown Sets DLSW life cycle in the range of 1ms to 2000ms Sets the maximum frame length of local peer, including 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454, 17800 and 65535 Initial window size in the range of 1 to 2000 Maximum window size in the range of 1 to 2000 Cost value in the range of 1 to 5

Enter various parameters and click <Config> to finish the operation.

26.3 Remote Peer
This function is used to browse and configure the related parameters of the remote peer, and the interface is shown in Figure 26-4:

26-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-4 Remote Peer

This interface includes the parameters and statistics of the remote peer. Various parameters are described in Table 26-3: Table 26-3 Remote peer configuration parameters
Content Address Pack Window Init IsConfig Cost KeepAlive Virtual Segment LF-Size TcpQueueMax HaveBackup IsBackup PrimaryEntityAddr Peer Linger Link Status Reveived Packets Sent Packets Drops Uptime DLSW Version DLSW OUI OS Version Description Sets the IP address of the DLSW remote peer Initial window size Whether the peer is a static peer Cost value ranging from 1 to 5 Life cycle ranging from 0 to 1200ms Maximum frame length, including 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454 and 17800 Maximum length of a TCP queue, ranging from 50 to 2000 Whether the peer is a primary peer Whether the peer is a backup peer Address of the primary peer Hold time of the backup peer Connection status The number of received packets The number of sent packets Disconnection times Connection hole time DLSW version number and release number The OUI of DLSW Operating system version number

26-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

I. Creating a remote peer
In Figure 26-4, click <Add…> to open the "Create Remote Peer" window, as shown in Figure 26-5:

Figure 26-5 Creating a remote peer

Various parameters are described in Table 26-3. Select or modify the parameters and click <OK> to finish the operation.

II. Deleting a remote peer
In Figure 26-4, select a line and click <Delete>. After confirmation, you will delete the selected remote peer.

III. Configuring a remote peer
In Figure 26-4, select a line and click <Config…> to open the remote peer configuration window that is similar to the creation window. All the parameters in the interface except the remote peer IP address are configurable.

26.4 Bridge Group
The DLSW technology is developed based on the bridge technology. Bridge group is the forwarding unit of a bridge, and you can configure several Ethernet interfaces to a bridge group to enable packet forwarding among them. The bridge group window is shown in Figure 26-6

26-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-6 Bridge Group

On the left of the window is a bridge group list and the interfaces included in each bridge group are displayed in the right list.

I. Creating a bridge group
To forward the packets from the specified bridge group over a TCP connection, you need to connect the local bridge group to the DLSW so that packets from the bridge group can be sent to remote over a TCP channel. You can create several bridge groups and connect them with the DLSW so that they can forward packets over a TCP channel. In Figure 26-6, click <Add…> to open the "Create Bridge Group" window, as shown in Figure 26-7:

26-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-7 Create Bridge Group

Type the bridge group ID (in the range of 1 to 63) and click <OK> to create a bridge group.

II. Deleting a bridge group
In Figure 26-6, select a bridge group ID from the bridge group list and click <Delete>. After confirmation, you will delete the selected bridge group.

III. Configuring a bridge group
In Figure 26-6, select a bridge group ID from the bridge group list and click <Config…> to open the configuration window, as shown in Figure 26-8:

26-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-8 Bridge group configuration

This window lists the selected interfaces of the bridge group and those available for selection. You can click “>>” or “<<” to move interfaces to or form the bridge group, and then click <OK> to finish the operation.

26.5 SDLC Interface
The SDLC is a link layer protocol relative to the SNA, and its working principal is similar to the HDLC. To have the DLSW work normally, you need to change the link layer encapsulation protocol of the synchronous interface to the SDLC. The SDLC interface configuration window is shown in Figure 26-9:

26-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-9 SDLC Interface

Various parameters are described in Table 26-4: Table 26-4 SDLC interface configuration parameters
Content Serial Port Name Encapsulating SDLC Role Virtual MAC Hold Queue Size Sending Window Size Modulus Max Receivable Frame Length Retry Poll Pause Interval Simultaneous Enable Calling Waiting Interval Called Waiting Interval Description The name of the SDLC port Sets to encapsulation protocol of the synchronous interface to the SDLC, including SDLC, PPP and OTHER Includes primary, secondary and norole The MAC address of the SDLC virtual circuit The length of sending queue ranging from 20 to 255 The size of sending window ranging from 1 to 7 Includes m8 and m128 Maximum receivable frame length ranging from 1 to 17680 Retry times in the case of timeout ranging from 1 to 255 Interval at which each secondary site is polled, ranging from 1ms to 10000 ms Sets whether to enable SDLC bi-directional transmission The timeout of the response to the primary site, ranging from 1ms to 60000ms The timeout of the response to the secondary site, ranging from 1 to 60000ms

26.5.1 SDLC Interface Configuration
In Figure 26-9, select a line and click <Config…> to open the "SDLC Port Config" window, as shown in Figure 26-10:

26-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-10 SDLC port configuration - SDLC port attribute

This interface includes two tabbed pages, SDLC Port Attribute and SDLC Port Remote Peer. Various parameters in the "SDLC Port Attribute" page are described in Table 26-4.

26.5.2 SDLC Prot Remote Peer Configuration
The SDLC port remote peer interface is shown in Figure 26-11:

26-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-11 SDLC port configuration - SDLC port remote peer

This interface provides adding, deletion and modification of SDLC port remote peers.

I. Creating an SDLC port peer
Click <Add…> to open the "Create SDLC Port Peer" window, as shown in Figure 26-12:

Figure 26-12 Creating an SDLC port peer

26-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Various parameters are described in Table 26-5: Table 26-5 SDLC port remote peer parameters
Content SDLC Address XID Remote Peer MAC Peer Source SAP Peer Destination SAP Description Ranges from 1 to 254 The XID of SDLC, ranging from 0 to 2147483647 The MAC address of the remote peer The source SAP address of the peer end, ranging from 1 to 254 The destination SAP address of the peer end, ranging from 1 to 254

Enter the parameters and click <OK> to create an SDLC port remote peer.

II. Deleting an SDLC port peer
In Figure 26-11, select a line and click <Delete> to delete the SDLC port remote peer.

III. Modifying an SDLC port peer
In Figure 26-11, select a line and click <Modify…> to open the SDLC port remote peer modification window that is similar to the creation window. All the parameters in the window are editable. After configuring SDLC port attributes and remote peer, click <OK> in the configuration window and confirm to validate your configuration.

26.6 LLC2 Parameter Configuration
This function is used to configure the related parameters of LLC2 packets, and the interface is shown in Figure 26-13:

26-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-13 LLC2 parameter configuration

Select a line and click <Config…> to open the "LLC2 Parameter Configuration" window, as shown in Figure 26-14:

Figure 26-14 LLC2 parameter configuration

26-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Various parameters are described in Table 26-6: Table 26-6 LLC2 parameters
Content Acknowledge Delay Time Acknowledge Max Frame Local Window Size Modulus Retry Wait Time for Acknowledge Busy Time Wait Time of P/F Reject Status Time Send Queue Size Description Delay of information frame acknowledgement, ranging from 1ms to 60000ms The maximum number of information frames that can be received before an acknowledgement frame is sent, ranging from 1 to 127 The maximum number of information frames that can be sent before an acknowledgement frame is received, ranging from 1 to 127 LLC2 modulus, including m8 and m128 Times of retries, ranging from 1 to 255 Acknowledgement timeout, ranging from 1ms to 60000ms Polling interval for a busy site, ranging from 1ms to 60000ms Duration from the sending of a P frame to the reception of a correct information frame, ranging from 1ms to 60000ms Duration from the sending of a rejection frame to the reception of a correct information frame, ranging from 1ms to 60000ms Length of the LLC2 information frame output queue, ranging from 20 to 200

Select or modify the related parameters, click <OK> and confirm to finish the configuration operation.

26.7 DLSW View
This function is used to browse the DLSW-related information. The interface includes three tabbed pages, as shown in Figure 26-15, Figure 26-16 and Figure 26-17:

26-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-15 DLSW View - DLSW Static Information

Figure 26-16 DLSW View - DLSW Virtual Circuit

26-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 26-17 DLSW View - DLSW MAC Cache

Various parameters are described in Table 26-7, Table 26-8 and Table 26-9: Table 26-7 DLSW static information parameters
Content DLSW Version DLSW OUI DLSW Product Information Circuit Pacing Type Description Standard DLSW version The OUI of the DLSW Information of the product applying the DLSW Type of circuit pacing

Table 26-8 DLSW virtual circuit parameters
Content S1 Circuit ID S1 MAC S1 SAP S2 MAC S2 SAP S1 Interface Index S1 Interface Name S1 Ic Type S2 Location S2 Address S2 Circuit ID Origin Entry Time Status Time Description Circuit ID allocated by local DLSW node, ranging from 0 to 2147483647 MAC address of terminal1 of the circuit SAP address of S1 MAC address of terminal2 of the circuit SAP address of S2 Index of the interface connected with S1, ranging from 0 to 2147483647 Name of the interface connected with S1 DLC type between the DLSW device and S1 Location of terminal2 Remote DLSW's IP address when terminal2 is not a local terminal Circuit ID allocated by remote DLSW node, ranging from 0 to 2147483647 Originator of the circuit, including s1(1), s2(2) Creation time of the entry Time when the circuit entered current status

26-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System Content Status Description

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Priority Send Granted Units Send Current Window

Current status of the circuit, including disconnected(1), circuitStart(2), resolvePending(3), circuitPending(4), circuitEstablished(5), connectPending(6), contactPending(7), connected(8), disconnectPending(9), haltPending(10), haltPendingNoack(11), circuitRestart(12) and restartPending(13) Includes unsupported(1), low (2), medium (3), high (4) and highest (5) The number of SSP messages that can be sent by the DLSW over the circuit according to the pacing window size, ranging from 0 to 65535 Current window length of the DLSW as a sender, ranging from 0 to 65535

Table 26-9 DLSW MAC catch parameters
Content MAC Port Description MAC address Port name Description

26-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Chapter 27 DHCP Management
This function can be used on core routers and S8016 LAN switch. DHCP is short for (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Users can be assigned IP addresses dynamically using DHCP compare to manual configuration. Core routers and S8016 support both built-in DHCP server and external DHCP server function. For external DHCP servers, it needs the DHCP Relay support on the equipment. By modifying users’ properties, it can also be configured for the user to obtain IP address from the built-in DHCP server or from the external DHCP servers via DHCP Relay. Built-in DHCP server means the IP address pool is configured within the equipment and when user goes online, if he was configured to obtain IP address from the built-in address pool, the built-in DHCP server will assign an address to the user according to his address pool properties. If there was no external DHCP server or there’s problem communicating with external DHCP servers, built-in DHCP server can also be used for IP address allocation. The built-in DHCP server normally service 2 types of users: one is VLAN user that initiate DHCP request directly to the equipment and called VLAN address pool users; the other’s request passes through DHCP relay equipment such as MA5200 before reaching the core routers or S8016 and is called global address pool users.

27.1 DHCP Server Group Management
Core routers and S8016 can support 20 DHCP server groups. Each server group can support 2 IP addresses. The config of DHCP server groups can support different user groups to request IP addresses from different DHCP servers such as some of the VLANs request IP addresses from one server group and the other VLANs request from another server group. This can fulfill different user requirements and to provide special DHCP policies to some specific users. This also can reduce the risk of DHCP server from attacks. You can configure 2 IP addresses for each group to enable the backup of servers.

27.1.1 Browsing DHCP Server Group Information
In the function menu double click the [DHCP Management/DHCP Server Group Management] on the function tree, open "DHCP Server Group Management" windows as shown in Figure 27-1:

27-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-1 DHCP Server Group Management

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-1: Table 27-1 Description of parameters of DHCP Server Group Management
Name Description

Group ID DHCP server group’s unique ID DHCP Server IP Address1 First DHCP server address in the group DHCP Server IP Address2 Second DHCP server address in the group

The information viewable including all DHCP server groups list on the same equipment and the according 2 IP address for each group.

27.1.2 Configuring DHCP Server Group
In the "DHCP Server Group Management" window click any group data, then click <Config…> button to pop up "DHCP Server Group Configuration" window as shown in Figure 27-2:

27-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-2 DHCP Server Group Configuration

Input the DHCP server IP addresses in the window for this server group and click <OK> button to finish the configuration.

27.2 DHCP Relay Management
This function is used to query and config the associating relationship between VLAN and DHCP server group.

27.2.1 Querying VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association
In the function window double click [DHCP Management/DHCP Relay Management] on the function tree to open "DHCP Relay Management" window as shown in Figure 27-3:

27-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-3 DHCP Relay Management

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-2: Table 27-2 Description of parameters of DHCP Relay
Name VLAN ID Description An integer for unique VLAN identification

DHCP Server Group ID DHCP server group’s unique ID DHCP Server IP Address1 First DHCP server address in the group DHCP Server IP Address2 Second DHCP server address in the group

The associating VLAN and DHCP server group on the equipment can be seen including VLAN ID, associating DHCP server group ID and the IP addresses of the servers in the group.

27.2.2 Creating VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association
In the "DHCP Relay Management" window click <Add…> button to pop up the "DHCP Relay Creation" window as shown in Figure 27-4:

27-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-4 DHCP Relay Creation

This window provides example of the input. User can input the VLAN ID list like the example and choose DHCP server group then click <OK> to finish this operation.

27.2.3 Deleting VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association
In the "DHCP Relay Management" window choose one or more associations and click <Delete> button to delete them.

27.2.4 Configuring VLAN and DHCP Server Group Association
In the "DHCP Relay Management" window, choose a line of associations, click <Config…> button to pop up "DHCP Relay Configuration" window as shown in Figure 27-5:

Figure 27-5 DHCP Relay Configuration

27-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

In this window choose the DHCP server group again and click <OK> button to finish.

27.3 VLAN Address Pool Management
27.3.1 Querying VLAN Address Pool Information
In the function window double click the [DHCP Management/VLAN Address Pool Management] on the function tree to open the "VLAN Address Pool Management" window as shown in Figure 27-6:

Figure 27-6 VLAN Address Pool Management

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-3: Table 27-3 Description of parameters of VLAN Address Pool
Name VLAN ID Address Allocation Mode L3 Interface Address Mask Primary DNS Secondary DNS Primary WINS Secondary WINS DHCP server group’s unique ID User address allocation mode in current VLAN. When address allocation mode is local, it become VLAN address pool VLAN address pool Layer 3 interface IP address VLAN address pool’s subnet mask Primary DNS server IP address Secondary DNS server IP address Primary WINS server IP address Secondary WINS server IP address Description

27-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Information viewable including associating address allocation method of each VLAN on the equipment. When the method is local, it is the VLAN address pool and the Layer 3 interface IP address, subnet mask, primary/secondary DNS/WINS server addresses and reserved address range in the pool can be seen.

27.3.2 Changing VLAN Address Allocation Mode
In "VLAN Address Pool Management" window choose a line of data from the "VLAN Address Pool List" and click <Change Allocation Mode> button to change the allocation mode. If previously is local, then changed to extern; if previously is extern, then changed to local.

27.3.3 Configuring VLAN Address Pool
In "VLAN Address Pool Management" window choose an address pool, click <Config…> button to pop up "VLAN Address Pool Configuration" window as shown in Figure 27-7:

Figure 27-7 VLAN Address Pool Configuration

In the window, Primary/Secondary DNS/WINS addresses can be configured. After modification, click <OK> to finish the operation.

27-7

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

27.3.4 Querying Statistics Information
In "VLAN Address Pool Management" window, choose an address pool, click <Statistics…> button to pop up VLAN Address Pool Statistics window as shown in Figure 27-8:

Figure 27-8 VLAN Address Pool Statistics

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-4: Table 27-4 Description of parameters of VLAN Address Pool Statistics
Name Used Addresses Unused Addresses Disabled Addresses Total Addresses Description Number of addresses being used in the pool Number of free addresses in the pool Number of disabled addresses in the pool Number of all addresses in the pool

This window displays pool information including Used Addresses, Unused Addresses, Disabled Addresses and Total Addresses.

27-8

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

27.3.5 Appending Disabled IP Segment
In "VLAN Address Pool Management" window choose an IP address pool, click <Append Disabled IP Segment…> button to pop up "Disabled IP Segment Creation" window as shown in Figure 27-9:

Figure 27-9 Disabled IP Segment Creation

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-5: Table 27-5 Description of parameters of Disabled IP Segment Creation
Name VLAN ID Low Address High Address VLAN address pool VLAN ID Start address of the disabled address segment Last address of the disabled address segment Description

Input the disabled segment’s Low Address and High Address in the window then click <OK> button to finish the operation. Now new disabled segment can be seen in the window shown as in Figure 27-6.

27.3.6 Canceling Disabled IP Segment
Choose an address pool in "VLAN Address Pool Management" window then click <Cancel Disabled IP Segment…> button to pop up "Disabled IP Segment Cancellation" window as shown in Figure 27-10:

27-9

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-10 Disabled IP Segment Cancellation

The length in the window means the length of the segment needs cancellation. The value is between 1 to actual length of the segment. Input length, click <OK> button to finish the cancellation operation.

" Note: The first and the last address value in the disabled segment (the low and high address of “Disabled IP Segments”) cannot be cancelled.

27.4 Global Address Pool Management
27.4.1 Querying Global Address Pool Information
In the function window, double click the [DHCP Management/Global Address Pool Management] on the functions tree to open "Global Address Pool Management" window as shown in Figure 27-11:

27-10

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-11 Global Address Pool Management

Information viewable including Name, Gateway, Mask, Router IP, Primary/Secondary DNS/WINS addresses and disabled address segment in the pool.

27.4.2 Creating Global Address Pool
In "Global Address Pool Management" window click <Add…> button to pop up "Global Address Pool Creation" window as shown in Figure 27-12:

27-11

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-12 Global Address Pool Creation

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-6: Table 27-6 Description of parameters of Global Address Pool
Name Name Gateway Mask Router IP Primary DNS Secondary DNS Primary WINS Secondary WINS Global address pool unique ID Global address pool Gateway address Global address pool subnet mask, with address pool gateway address, defines ip address range with in the pool Router IP address for this pool Primary DNS Server IP address Secondary DNS Server IP address Primary WINS Server IP address Secondary WINS Server IP address Description

In

the

window,

input

parameters

of

Name,

Gateway,

Mask,

Router

IP,

Primary/Secondary DNS/WINS address and click <OK> to finish operation.

27-12

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

27.4.3 Deleting Global Address Pool
Choose one or more global address pool to be deleted in the "Global Address Pool Management" window, then click <Delete> button and click <OK> button to confirm the deletion in the pop up warning window.

27.4.4 Configuring Global Address Pool
Choose an address pool in the "Global Address Pool Management" window, click <Config…> button to pop up the "Global Address Pool Configuration" window as shown in Table 27-7:

Table 27-7 Global Address Pool Configuration In the window the configurable parameters including Router IP, Primary/Secondary DNS/WINS address. After modification, click <OK> button to finish the operation.

27.4.5 Querying Statistics Information
Choose an address pool in the "Global Address Pool Management" window then click <Statistics…> button to pop up "Global Address Pool Statistics" window as shown in Figure 27-13:

27-13

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-13 Global Address Pool Statistics

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-8: Table 27-8 Description of parameters of Global Address Pool Statistics
Name Used Addresses Unused Addresses Disabled Addresses Total Addresses Description Number of addresses being used in the pool Number of free addresses in the pool Number of disabled addresses in the pool Number of all addresses in the pool

27.4.6 Appending Disabled IP Segment
Choose an address pool in the "Global Address Pool Management" window and click <Append Disabled IP Segment…> button to pop up "Disabled IP Segment Creation" window as shown in Figure 27-14:

27-14

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-14 Disabled IP Segment Creation

Parameters in the window are described as in Table 27-9: Table 27-9 Description of parameters of Disabled IP Segment Creation
Name Pool Name Low Address High Address Description Name of the pool to create a disabled segment Start address of the disabled address segment Last address of the disabled address segment

Input the Low Address and the High Address in the window, click <OK> button to finish the operation. Now new disabled segment can be seen in the window shown as in Figure 27-11.

27.4.7 Canceling Disabled IP Segment
Choose an address pool in the "Global Address Pool Management" then choose a disabled segment and click <Cancel Disabled IP Segment…> button to pop up "Disabled IP Segment Cancellation" window as show in Figure 27-15:

27-15

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-15 Disabled IP Segment Cancellation

In the window, the length means the address range length to be cancelled, ranging from 1 to actual segment length. Input length value click <OK> button to finish operation.

" Note: The first and the last address value in the disabled segment (the low and high address of “Disabled IP Segments”) cannot be cancelled.

27.5 DHCP Traffic Monitoring
This function uses graphical view to monitor all types of DHCP packet flow. The types of packets including: DISCOVER Messages, REQUEST Messages, RELEASE Messages, DECLINE Messages, INFORM Messages, Invalid Messages, OFFER Messages, ACK Messages, NACKS Messages and Discarded Messages. In the function window, double click the [DHCP Management/DHCP Traffic Monitoring] on the function tree to open "DHCP Traffic Monitoring" window as shown in Figure 27-16:

27-16

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Chapter 26 DLSW Service Management

Figure 27-16 DHCP Traffic Monitoring

For detail operation procedures of DHCP Traffic Monitoring window, please see Chapter 8 "Performance Monitoring" part.

27-17

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix A

How to Use SNMPc 5.0

Appendix A How to Use SNMPc 5.0
A.1 Installing SNMPc 5.0
Run SNMPc 5.0 setup file to install the default options. The window shown in Figure A-1 will pop up in the course of installation:

Figure A-1 “Select Component” window

Select “Server” and the <Next> button will become activated. Click <Next> to start installation. In the pop-up window, select the installation directory, and the “Discovery Seed” window shown in Figure A-2 will pop up.

A-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix A

How to Use SNMPc 5.0

Figure A-2 “Discovery Seed”

Enter the IP address, subnet mask and community name of a device in the “Discovery Seed” input box. Usually this device is the gateway or the core device (such as the router) in the managed network. SNMPc 5.0 will use this device as the seed node to automatically discover other device quickly. If wrong information is entered, the network discovery function of SNMPc may become abnormal. If the “Start with Discovery off” option on the lower part is selected, the network discovery will not be implemented after SNMPc is started. After the installation of SNMPc is accomplished, the installation program of “Air Messenger Pro” paging application will be started automatically. Air Messenger Pro can send via E-mail the alarm information to the SNMPc management user. You can select to install or quit the installation of Air Messenger Pro. Restart the computer after the installation.

A.2 Starting SNMPc
The procedure of starting the network topology management of SNMPc is as follows: 1) Select the menu [Start/Program/SNMPc 5.0/Startup System] to start SNMPc, and a dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure A-3.

A-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix A

How to Use SNMPc 5.0

Figure A-3 “Server Login…”

The user name is “Administrator” by default, and there is no password. Click <OK> to log in to the SNMPc main interface. If SNMPc is running for the first time after Quidview is integrated, you will be asked whether to compile MIBs. Select <Yes> to compile. The SNMPc interface is shown in Figure A-4.

Figure A-4 SNMPc interface

The functions of tools are as follows: Main Button Bar Edit Button Bar Selection Tool Event Log Tool To quickly run the commands. To quickly add a device into Map. To select different SNMPc functional modules. To display the event log information.

A-3

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix A

How to Use SNMPc 5.0

View Window Area To display topology map, MIB table and MIB interface. Select the menu [Config/Discovery Agent....] to pop up the interface shown in Figure A-5.

Figure A-5 Discovery Agents interface 2) 3) 4) In the “General” page, check the “Enable Discover” and “Enable Status Poll”. In the “Seed” page, enter the IP address of the device (multiple addresses can be entered to facilitate topology map discovery). In the “Community” page, enter the community name of the device, and then click <OK>.

!

Note:

If there are too many devices in the network, remove “Find Non-SNMP (Ping) Nodes” from “Protocol” page, so that SNMPc 5.0 discovers only the devices supporting SNMP. Or use the “Filter” function to limit the areas discovered. Specific operations are as follows: In the “Address” edit box of the “Filter” page, enter the IP address (the wildcard “*” can be included) in one of the following formats: 207.* 207.212.33.* 198.*.*.22-88 207.100-211.*

Then, select the [File/Reset] menu to delete the current topology view. Use the setting of “Filter” to rediscover devices and generate new topology map. After the setting is completed, SNMPc 5.0 will perform device discovery automatically and put the devices’ topology map in the main interface.

A-4

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix A

How to Use SNMPc 5.0

A.3 Editing SNMPc 5.0 Topology Map Manually
After the automatic discovery function of SNMPc5.0 is started, SNMPc will arrange the discovered devices in the topology view. If you are not satisfied with the arrangement, you can manually edit the topology view. In this case, some of the settings should be changed. Select [Config/Discovery Agent....], and use one of the three methods below: 1) 2) Uncheck the “Enable Discover” option to prohibit the automatic discovery, so that the topology view will not get changed after automatic discovery. Select “Discovery Object” in the “Layout” pull-down list on the left of the window, so that the newly discovered device can be added into the submap “Discovery Object”. 3) Select “Top Level/Incremental” in the “Layout” pull-down list on the left of the window, so that the newly discovered device will be added into the topology map without changing the original arrangement. After the setting, you can drag the device to the desired position in the window. If not all the devices are discovered somehow, you can manually add the device into the topology map. To add a device, click the first button <Insert Device> on “Edit Button Bar”, and the dialog box as shown in Figure A-6 will appear.

Figure A-6 Map Object Properties

A-5

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix A

How to Use SNMPc 5.0

Enter the IP address and Label of the device, and then click <OK> to add the new device icon into the topology map. If too many network devices are discovered, you can delete manually the unwanted nodes. Select the device to be deleted and then select the [Edit/Del] to delete.

A-6

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix B

Abbreviations

Appendix B Abbreviations
Abbreviation ADM APS ATM DTMF DWDM FCS FXO FXS GK GSR GW LACP LOF LOP LOS PAIS POS POTS PRDI PSLM PUNEQ RAS RPR RSTP SDH SONET SPE TDM VC VLAN VOIP VPC VPI Add Drop Multiplexer Automatic Protection Switching Asynchronous Transfer Mode Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dense Wave Division Multiplexer Frame check sequeces Foreign eXchange Office Foreign eXchange Station GateKeeper Gigabit Switch Router GateWay Link Aggregation Control Protocol Loss of Frame Loss of Pointer Loss of Signal Path Alarm Indication Signal Packet Over SDH Plain Old Telephone Service Path Remote Defect Indication Path Signal Label Mismatch Path Unequipped Registration, Admission, Status Protocol Resilient Packet Ring Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Synchronous Optical Network Synchronous Payload Envelope Time Division Multiplexing Virtual Channel Virtual LAN Voice Over IP Virtual Path Connection Virtual Path Identifier Full name

B-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix C

FAQ

Appendix C FAQ
I. Why did I fail in connecting the host through [Tools/Telnet…] menu operation?
Troubleshooting: Please check whether the telnet function has been enabled on the host. You cannot create a telnet connection from a network management station to the host, unless the telnet service is enabled on the latter.

II. Why did I fail in executing the "Telnet" command by selecting [Tools/Telnet…] on a Sun or HP workstation?
Troubleshooting: To run the "Telnet" command on a Sun or HP workstation, you may need to execute the "/usr/dt/bin/detterm" command first. The "detterm" command, however, is not involved in the environment variables by default, so you should set it to the environment variables or run it manually before performing the "Telnet" command.

III. Why did I fail in opening the device under management in Quidview?
Troubleshooting: First, check the connectivity of the network with the "Ping" command. If you can ping the device successfully, but still cannot open it in Quidview, check whether the SNMP community names are correct following the procedure below: 1) Perform the following command to telnet to the device under management:

Telnet 10.110.99.59 2) Execute the following command in system view to check the SNMP community names of the device: [R2631E]display snmp community 3) In the "Protocol parameters" dialog box of Quidview, configure the default read-only and read-write community names of the system to the same as those of the device, and click <OK> button. 4) Click <Open> button on the toolbar once again, enter the IP address of the device under management in the popup dialog box, and click <OK> button. Then you will be able to open the device.

IV. What is SNMP?
Troubleshooting: The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is informally defined in a series of RFC documents.

C-1

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix C

FAQ

V. How many versions does the SNMP have currently?
Troubleshooting: SNMPv1 - a widely applied standard SNMPv2p - a party-based standard that has been outdated SNMPv2c - a community-based standard that is being widely used SNMPv2u - a user-based standard that is not in use SNMPv3 with USM -the latest SNMP standard

VI. Which versions are supported by Huawei data communication products at present?.
Troubleshooting: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.

VII. My router and the network operate normally, and the version, community names (users) and related view information have been properly configured. Why did I fail in connecting the NMS?
Troubleshooting: Check whether you are separated by the firewall following the procedure below: Browse the configuration with the "display current-configuration" command, or check whether the community name (user) in use and its group are configured with an ACL that denies your IP address with the "display snmp-agent community/display snmp-agent group" and "display snmp-agent usm-user" commands.

VIII. Why was a packet with the content as "hello" and destined for the same port as its subsequt trap packet always captured by the capturing tool?
Troubleshooting: Generally, this happens on the traps of "linkdown/linkup" and "coldstart" types. While sending such trap, the port may be down, and will send a "hello" character string to the specified trap port to ensure that the trap packet can reach the NMS. This is normal.

IX. Why was timeout always encountered on certain node when I conduct walk operation on the device via MIBBROSER?
Troubleshooting: Usually, there are several empty tables under the node. In this case, you may adjust the timeout value of the NMS for troubleshooting.

C-2

User Manual HUAWEI iManager Quidview Router Network Management System

Appendix C

FAQ

X. Why did I fail in browsing the configured SNMP commands?
Troubleshooting: You may easily execute the "display snmp-agent statistics" command to check whether the SNMP Server has been closed. If the system prompts "SNMP Agent disabled", the SNMP Server must have been closed, when you can use the "snmp-agent" command to enable it.

XI. The MIBBrowser could receive alarms from a router with the SNMP VERSION configured as "1" not "V2C" (when the MIBBrowser is configured as "V2C" either). Meanwhile I failed in detecting the alarm packets sent from the router with NETXRAY in the later case. Why?
Troubleshooting: You should use the following command to configure the trap host of SNMPv2c: snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain x.x.x.x params securityname string v2c

XII. My router can send not SNMPv2c trap but SNMPv1 trap packets. Why?
Troubleshooting: First, check whether SNMPv2c has been enables. If enabled, check whether the trap host of SNMPv2c has been configured.

C-3